Instruction Manual-Bus Diff

DBN Bus Differential Protection
Instructions Manual
© ZIV GRID AUTOMATION, S.L. 2011 BDBN0901Av07

License agreement for Software Embedded in Equipment
ZIV APLICACIONES Y TECNOLOGÍA, S.L.

End-User Software License Agreement
THE EQUIPMENT YOU HAVE PURCHASED INCLUDES EMBEDDED SOFTWARE

PROGRAM(S). THE PROGRAM IS COPYRIGHTED AND IS BEING LICENSED TO
YOU (NOT SOLD) FOR USE WITH THE EQUIPMENT.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN US ( AS “LICENSEE) AND ZIV

APLICACIONES Y TECNOLOGÍA, S.L. ( AS “LICENSOR”) FOR THE SOFTWARE
PROGRAM INCLUDED WITH THE EQUIPMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE
EQUIPMENT.
IF YOU INSTALL OR USE THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND

AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT . IF YOU ARE NOT
WILLING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, YOU
SHOULD PROMPTLY RETURN THE EQUIPMENT UNUSED TO YOUR SELLER, AND
YOU WILL RECEIVE A REFUND OF YOUR MONEY.
Terms and Conditions of License
1. License Grant. Licensor hereby grants to you, and your accept, a nonexclusive and non-
transferable license to use the embedded programs and the accompanying documentation, if any
(collectively referred to as the “Software”), only as authorized in this License Agreement.
2. Restrictions. You may not (a) use, copy, modify or transfer the Software except as expressly
provided in this or another Agreement with Licensor, (b) reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble or separate the components of the Software, or (c) rent, sell or lease the Software or
make the Software available to others to do any of the foregoing.
3. No Assignment. This License is intended for your exclusive use with the purchased equipment.
You agree that you will not assign, sublicense, transfer, pledge, lease, rent or share your rights
under this License Agreement.
4. Licensor’s Rights. You acknowledge and agree that the Software is the proprietary product of
Licensor protected under U.S. copyright law and international treaties.. You further
acknowledge and agree that all right, title and interest in and to the Software, including
associated intellectual property rights, are and shall remain with Licensor. This License
Agreement does not convey to you an ownership interest in or to the Software, but only a
limited right of use revocable in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement.
5. Confidentiality. The Software is confidential and no details or information relating to the same
shall be disclosed to any third party without the prior written consent of Licensor. For the
purposes of this clause, sub-contract staff, employed or retained by the Licensee to perform
computer systems development work, shall not be deemed to be third parties provided such staff
are subject to the disclosure restrictions set forth above. In no event, except with a prior written
authorization duly signed by an officer of Licensor, may you disclose any such confidential
information, even for subcontracted jobs, to persons or entities that may be considered to be
direct competitors of Licensor.
6. Term. The License Agreement is effective upon delivery of the equipment to you and shall
continue until terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by returning
the equipment to Licensor, or by destroying the equipment. Licensor may terminate this License
Agreement upon your breach of any term hereof. Upon such termination by Licensor, you agree
to return the equipment to Licensor.
7. Warranty and Disclaimer. Licensor warrants, for your benefit only, that the Software, when
and as delivered to you, will conform to the specifications described in the instruction manuals
for the equipment purchased, or any specifications agreed to in writing by Licensor with a
particular customer. This warranty does not cover any minor errors or deviations from the
specifications that do not affect the proper functioning of the equipment. EXCEPT FOR THE
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED “AS IS”, AND
LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
8. Licensee’s Remedy. You sole and exclusive remedy for any breach of Licensor’s warranty
shall be the repair or replacement, at Licensor’s sole option, of any Software that does not
conform to stated specifications. Licensor shall not be responsible for any failure arising from
inadequate or improper use of the Software.
9. Limitation of Liability. Licensor’s cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or
damages resulting from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this
Agreement shall not exceed the purchase price paid to Licensor for the equipment. In no event
shall Licensor be liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary
damages or lost profits, even if licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
10. Trademark. All ZIV trademarks (including ZIVERCOM, ZIVERLOG and ZIVERSYS) are
common law trademarks of Licensor. No right, license or interest to such trademarks is granted
hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license or interest shall be asserted by you with
respect to such trademark.
11. Licensee’s Indemnity. You shall defend, indemnify and hold Licensor harmless against any
loss or damage of any kind arising from a breach by you of this License Agreement, or any use
or misuse of the Software by you or your employees, agents or representatives, and from any
other of your conduct or from any claim or action by any of your customers in connection with
the Software or this License Agreement.
12. Governing Law. This License Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with
the internal laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A.
13. No Waiver. The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take action
against the other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that
party as to subsequent enforcement of rights or subsequent actions in the event of future
breaches.
14. Entire Agreement. This License Agreement is the entire agreement between you and Licensor
with respect to the use of the software and supersedes all prior understandings or agreements
between the parties. This License Agreement may be amended only by a writing signed by an
officer of Licensor.
ZIV Aplicaciones y Tecnología, S.L.

Parque Tecnólogico, 2089
48016 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
48080 Bilbao
Spain
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Description and Start-Up
1.1 DBN Functions (Bus Differential) ............................................................. 1.1-1

1.1.1 DBC Central Unit ......................................................................................... 1.1-3
1.1.1.a Main Differential Unit ................................................................................... 1.1-3
1.1.1.b Supervision Differential Unit ........................................................................ 1.1-3
1.1.1.c Differential Alarm Unit .................................................................................. 1.1-4
1.1.1.d Lockout Function ......................................................................................... 1.1-4
1.1.2 Current Bay Unit Functions (DBP-B) ........................................................... 1.1-5
1.1.2.a 50 Supervision Unit for Differential Unit Trip ............................................... 1.1-5
1.1.2.b 50 Supervision Unit for Breaker Failure Trip ............................................... 1.1-5
1.1.2.c Breaker Failure Unit (with Retrip Function, Previously Failed BF
Function and possibility to use an External BF) .......................................... 1.1-5
1.1.3 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Protection Unit .................. 1.1-6
1.1.4 Voltage Bay Unit Functions (DBP-A) ........................................................... 1.1-6
1.1.4.a Undervoltage Supervision Unit .................................................................... 1.1-6
1.2 DBN Additional Functions ........................................................................ 1.2-1

1.2.1 Local Control ................................................................................................ 1.2-2
1.2.2 LED Targets ................................................................................................. 1.2-2
1.2.3 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 1.2-2
1.2.4 Analog Inputs ............................................................................................... 1.2-2
1.2.5 Trip Outputs ................................................................................................. 1.2-2
1.2.6 Auxiliary Outputs.......................................................................................... 1.2-3
1.2.7 Event Recording .......................................................................................... 1.2-3
1.2.8 Oscillographic Register ................................................................................ 1.2-3
1.2.9 Time Synchronization .................................................................................. 1.2-3
1.2.10 Local Information (Keypad and Display)...................................................... 1.2-4
1.2.11 Self-Test Program........................................................................................ 1.2-4
1.3 Local Interface: Alphanumeric Keypad and Display.............................. 1.3-1

1.3.1 DBC Local Interface..................................................................................... 1.3-2
1.3.1.a Alphanumeric Keypad and Display.............................................................. 1.3-2
1.3.1.b Keys, Functions and Operation Modes ....................................................... 1.3-3
1.3.1.c Using the F2 Key to Access the Functions .................................................. 1.3-6
1.3.1.d Main Menu ................................................................................................... 1.3-7
1.3.1.e Information Menu ......................................................................................... 1.3-8
1.3.1.f Last Trip Indication ...................................................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.1.g Test Mode .................................................................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.2 DBP Type Bay Local Interface .................................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.3 “V” Type Bay (DRV or DCV) Local Interface ............................................... 1.3-13
1.4 Model Selection ......................................................................................... 1.4-1

1.4.1 DBC Model Selection (Bus Differential Central Unit) .................................. 1.4-2
1.4.2 Bay Model Selection .................................................................................... 1.4-3
1.4.2.a DBP Type Bay ............................................................................................. 1.4-3
1.4.2.b DRV Type Bay ............................................................................................. 1.4-3
1.4.2.c DCV Type Bay ............................................................................................. 1.4-3
I
BDBN0901A
DBN: Bus Differential Protection
© ZIV GRID AUTOMATION, S. L. Zamudio, 2011
Table of Contents
1.5 Installation and Commissioning............................................................... 1.6-1

1.5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 1.5-2
1.5.2 General ........................................................................................................ 1.5-2
1.5.3 Accuracy ...................................................................................................... 1.5-2
1.5.4 Installation .................................................................................................... 1.5-3
1.5.5 Preliminary Inspection.................................................................................. 1.5-3
1.5.6 Isolation Test ................................................................................................ 1.5-3
1.5.6.a DBC Central Unit ......................................................................................... 1.5-3
1.5.6.b DBP Type Bay Units .................................................................................... 1.5-4
1.5.6.c Verification of the DBC and DBP Power Supply .......................................... 1.5-5
1.5.7 Metering Tests ............................................................................................. 1.5-5
1.5.7.a DBP-B Type Bays Current Metering Test .................................................... 1.5-5
1.5.7.b Differential and Restraint Current Metering Test ......................................... 1.5-6
1.5.7.c Voltage Metering Test (if the Model contains DBP-A) ................................. 1.5-6
Chapter 2. Technical Specifications and Physical Description
2.1 Technical Data ............................................................................................ 2.1-1

2.1.1 Power Supply Voltage.................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.2 Power Supply Burden .................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.3 Current Analog Inputs .................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.4 Voltage Analog Inputs .................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.5 DBP Type Bay Measurement Accuracy ...................................................... 2.1-3
2.1.6 “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay Measurement Accuracy ................................. 2.1-3
2.1.7 Repeatability ................................................................................................ 2.1-3
2.1.8 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 2.1-3
2.1.9 Trip Outputs ................................................................................................. 2.1-4
2.1.10 Auxiliary Outputs .......................................................................................... 2.1-4
2.1.11 Communications Link ................................................................................... 2.1-5
2.2 Standards and Type Tests ........................................................................ 2.2-1

2.2.1 Insulation ...................................................................................................... 2.2-2
2.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility...................................................................... 2.2-2
2.2.3 Environmental Test ...................................................................................... 2.2-3
2.2.4 Power Supply ............................................................................................... 2.2-3
2.2.5 Mechanical Test ........................................................................................... 2.2-3
2.3 Physical Architecture ................................................................................ 2.3-1

2.3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 2.3-2
2.3.2 General ........................................................................................................ 2.3-2
2.3.3 Dimensions .................................................................................................. 2.3-6
2.3.4 Connection Elements ................................................................................... 2.3-6
2.3.4.a Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................... 2.3-6
2.3.4.b Plug-in Connectors (Non Self-shorting) ....................................................... 2.3-6
2.3.4.c Removing Printed Circuit Boards (Non Self-shorting) ................................. 2.3-6
2.3.4.d Internal Wiring .............................................................................................. 2.3-6
II
BDBN0901A
Table of Contents
Chapter 3. Functions and Description of Operation
3.1 Trip and Operation Principles .................................................................. 3.1-1

3.1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.1-2
3.1.2 Trip Logic of one Bus ................................................................................... 3.1-4
3.1.3 Trip Logic of the Bus by Differential Unit ..................................................... 3.1-5
3.1.3.a Bus Differential Trip Blocking....................................................................... 3.1-6
3.1.4 Trip Logic of the Bus by Breaker Failure ..................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.4.a Bus Trip Blocking by Breaker Failure .......................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.5 Trip Logic of the Bus by Digital Input ........................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.5.a Bus Trip Blocking by Digital Input ................................................................ 3.1-7
3.1.6 Trip Logic of the Current Bay ....................................................................... 3.1-8
3.1.6.a Trip Limit Time (T7) ..................................................................................... 3.1-8
3.1.6.b Trip Reset Time (T5).................................................................................... 3.1-9
3.1.6.c Issues to be Considered .............................................................................. 3.1-9
3.1.7 Setting Ranges affecting Current Bay Tripping ........................................... 3.1-11
3.1.8 Possible HMI Operations ............................................................................. 3.1-12
3.1.8.a DBN Models 10 and 11................................................................................ 3.1-12
3.1.8.b DBN Model 12 ............................................................................................. 3.1-12
3.1.9 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 3.1-14
3.1.9.a Digital Inputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking ...................................... 3.1-14
3.1.9.b Digital Inputs of the BF Trip and of the Sealed BF Reset............................ 3.1-14
3.1.9.c Digital Inputs of the Buses Trip .................................................................... 3.1-15
3.1.9.d Digital Inputs Affecting Current Bay Tripping............................................... 3.1-15
3.1.10 Auxiliary Outputs and Events ...................................................................... 3.1-16
3.1.10.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Buses Trip .......................................... 3.1-16
3.1.10.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking ............. 3.1-17
3.1.10.c Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Supervision ..................................... 3.1-18
3.1.10.d Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the BF Trip and BF Trip Blocking ............. 3.1-19
3.1.10.e Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Bay Trip .............................................. 3.1-20
3.2 Protection Functions in the DBN Central Unit ........................................ 3.2-1

3.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.2-2
3.2.2 Main Differential Unit ................................................................................... 3.2-3
3.2.2.a Fault Start Detector...................................................................................... 3.2-4
3.2.2.b External Fault Detector ................................................................................ 3.2-4
3.2.2.c Directional Blocking ..................................................................................... 3.2-5
3.2.2.d Differential Characteristic with Percentage Restraint .................................. 3.2-6
3.2.3 Supervision Differential Unit ........................................................................ 3.2-7
3.2.4 Differential Alarm Unit .................................................................................. 3.2-8
3.2.5 Settings Ranges .......................................................................................... 3.2-9
3.2.6 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 3.2-14
3.2.7 Auxiliary Outputs and Events ...................................................................... 3.2-14
3.2.7.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Main Differential Unit .......................... 3.2-14
3.2.7.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Supervision Differential Unit ............... 3.2-16
3.2.7.c Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Differential Alarm Units ...................... 3.2-16
3.2.8 Units Test ..................................................................................................... 3.2-18
3.2.8.a Main Differential Characteristic Test............................................................ 3.2-18
3.2.8.b Supervision Differential Characteristic Test................................................. 3.2-20
3.2.8.c Differential Alarm Unit Test .......................................................................... 3.2-22
3.3 Current Bay Functions .............................................................................. 3.3-1

3.3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.3-2
3.3.2 DBP-B Breaker Failure Unit with Retrip Function ........................................ 3.3-2
3.3.2.a Latched Breaker Failure Output (BF_L) ...................................................... 3.3-6
III
BDBN0901A
Table of Contents
3.3.2.b Disabling Breaker Failure Function .............................................................. 3.3-6

3.3.2.c Single Phase Breaker Failure ...................................................................... 3.3-7
3.3.2.d Three Phase Breaker Failure (with Overcurrent) ......................................... 3.3-7
3.3.2.e No Load Three Phase Breaker Failure (without Overcurrent) ..................... 3.3-8
3.3.2.f Previously Failed Breaker Failure ................................................................ 3.3-8
3.3.2.g Breaker Failure by External Activation ......................................................... 3.3-9
3.3.2.h Retrip............................................................................................................ 3.3-9
3.3.2.i Trip Time Limit (T7) ...................................................................................... 3.3-11
3.3.2.j Reset Trip Time (T5) .................................................................................... 3.3-11
3.3.3 “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay Breaker Failure Unit with Retrip Function ...... 3.3-11
3.3.4 Other Breaker Failure Related Paragraphs ................................................. 3.3-11
3.3.5 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection ....................................... 3.3-12
3.3.6 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip ........................................................ 3.3-13
3.3.7 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Trip Protection ................... 3.3-13
3.3.8 Bay Disabling ............................................................................................... 3.3-18
3.3.8.a Bay Disabling by Setting .............................................................................. 3.3-18
3.3.8.b Bay Disabling by Dynamic Zone .................................................................. 3.3-18
3.3.8.c Bay Disabling by Digital Input ...................................................................... 3.3-19
3.3.9 Settings Ranges ........................................................................................... 3.3-20
3.3.10 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 3.3-24
3.3.10.a Digital Inputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit ................................... 3.3-24
3.3.10.b Digital Inputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic .................................................... 3.3-26
3.3.10.c Digital Inputs of Bay Disabling ..................................................................... 3.3-26
3.3.11 Auxiliary Outputs and Events ....................................................................... 3.3-27
3.3.11.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit .......... 3.3-27
3.3.11.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End
Fault Protection Unit .................................................................................... 3.3-29
3.3.11.c Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit .......... 3.3-30
3.3.11.d Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Dynamic Zone Logic........................... 3.3-30
3.3.11.e Auxiliary Outputs and Events of Bay Disabling............................................ 3.3-31
3.3.12 Units Test ..................................................................................................... 3.3-32
3.3.12.a Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit Test ........................................................... 3.3-32
3.3.12.b 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection Unit Test ....................... 3.3-34
3.3.12.c 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit Test ......................................... 3.3-35
3.4 Voltage Bay Functions .............................................................................. 3.4-1

3.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.4-2
3.4.2 Voltage Bay Connection to Bus ................................................................... 3.4-2
3.4.3 Undervoltage Supervision Units for Bus Trip ............................................... 3.4-2
3.4.4 Settings Ranges ........................................................................................... 3.4-3
3.4.5 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Supervision by Undervoltage ............. 3.4-4
3.4.6 Supervision by Undervoltage Unit Test ....................................................... 3.4-5
3.5 DBN Central Unit Logic ............................................................................. 3.5-1

3.5.1 DBN Central Unit Logic ................................................................................ 3.5-2
3.5.2 Lockout (86) and Bus Latched Trip Unit ...................................................... 3.5-2
3.5.3 87 Block by Disagreement ........................................................................... 3.5-4
3.5.4 Tie Blind Spot Unit ....................................................................................... 3.5-4
3.5.5 Bus Coupler ................................................................................................. 3.5-5
3.5.5.a Buses Coupler Examples............................................................................. 3.5-6
3.5.6 Logic of Transfer Bus with Combined Coupler ............................................ 3.5-11
3.5.6.a Differential Unit Blocking due to Transfer Logic........................................... 3.5-12
3.5.6.b Example of the Application of this Logic ...................................................... 3.5-14
3.5.7 Settings Ranges ........................................................................................... 3.5-18
3.5.8 Digital Inputs of the Central Unit Logic ........................................................ 3.5-21
3.5.9 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Central Unit Logic ............................... 3.5-23
3.5.10 Central Unit Logic Tests............................................................................... 3.5-26
IV
BDBN0901A
Table of Contents
3.5.10.a Lockout and Bus Latched Trip Test ............................................................. 3.5-26

3.5.10.b 87 Block by Disagreement Test ................................................................... 3.5-26
3.5.10.c Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit Test ........................................................................ 3.5-28
3.6 DBN Current Bay Logic ............................................................................. 3.6-1

3.6.1 DBN Current Bay Logic ............................................................................... 3.6-2
3.6.2 Bus Disconnecting Switch Status and Bus Connection Logic.
Reduction to Single Bus .............................................................................. 3.6-2
3.6.3 Bypass Disconnecting Switch Status Logic ................................................. 3.6-3
3.6.4 Transfer Disconnecting Switch Status Logic ............................................... 3.6-3
3.6.5 Line Disconnecting Switch Status Logic ...................................................... 3.6-3
3.6.6 Logic of Special Bus Connection Disconnecting Switch Status for
Longitudinal Transversal Coupling .............................................................. 3.6-3
3.6.7 Breaker Status Logic ................................................................................... 3.6-3
3.6.8 Faults between the Breaker and the Current Transformer .......................... 3.6-4
3.6.8.a Faults in Bus Tie .......................................................................................... 3.6-4
3.6.8.b Faults in a Line ............................................................................................ 3.6-5
3.6.9 Issues regarding Current Bay Connection and Enable ............................... 3.6-6
3.6.10 Settings Ranges .......................................................................................... 3.6-8
3.6.11 Digital Inputs of the Current Bay Logic ........................................................ 3.6-9
3.6.12 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Current Bay Logic .............................. 3.6-12
3.7 Configuration Settings .............................................................................. 3.7-1

3.7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.7-2
3.7.2 Passwords ................................................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.3 Operation Enable ......................................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.4 Inputs and Outputs Configuration (Auxiliary Contacts and LEDs)............... 3.7-4
3.7.5 Rear Port Communication (DBC) ................................................................ 3.7-4
3.7.6 Protocols ...................................................................................................... 3.7-5
3.7.6.a IEC-61850 Protocol Settings ....................................................................... 3.7-5
3.7.6.b TCP/IP Protocol Settings ............................................................................. 3.7-5
3.7.6.c Specific P Protocol Settings......................................................................... 3.7-5
3.7.7 Front Port Communication (DBC) ................................................................ 3.7-6
3.7.8 Date and Time ............................................................................................. 3.7-6
3.7.8.a Local Time Zone Setting .............................................................................. 3.7-6
3.7.8.b Summer Time / Winter Time Change .......................................................... 3.7-6
3.7.9 Protection Configuration .............................................................................. 3.7-7
3.7.10 IRIG-B Type: UTC / Local Time Configuration ............................................ 3.7-7
3.7.11 Ethernet Port (RJ45) .................................................................................... 3.7-7
3.7.12 Configuration Settings ................................................................................. 3.7-8
3.8 General Settings ........................................................................................ 3.8-1

3.8.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.8-2
3.8.2 DBC General Settings (Central Unit) ........................................................... 3.8-2
3.8.2.a Relay “In Service” Output ............................................................................ 3.8-2
3.8.2.b Substation Name ......................................................................................... 3.8-2
3.8.2.c Bus # Enable ............................................................................................... 3.8-2
3.8.2.d Bus # Name ................................................................................................. 3.8-2
3.8.2.e Trip Time Limit ............................................................................................. 3.8-3
3.8.2.f Reset Trip Time ........................................................................................... 3.8-3
3.8.2.g Current for Disabling .................................................................................... 3.8-3
3.8.2.h Rated Phase-to-Phase Voltage ................................................................... 3.8-3
3.8.3 Current Bay General Settings ...................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.a Enable .......................................................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.b Breaker ........................................................................................................ 3.8-4
3.8.3.c Line .............................................................................................................. 3.8-4
V
BDBN0901A
Table of Contents
3.8.3.d Bus Number Connection .............................................................................. 3.8-4

3.8.3.e Invert Polarity ............................................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.f CT 89-TR Location (Logic 1)........................................................................ 3.8-4
3.8.4 DBP-A General Settings (Voltage Bay) ....................................................... 3.8-5
3.8.4.a Enable .......................................................................................................... 3.8-5
3.8.4.b Invert Polarity ............................................................................................... 3.8-5
3.8.5 General Settings .......................................................................................... 3.8-5
3.9 Change Settings Group ............................................................................. 3.9-1

3.9.1 Description ................................................................................................... 3.9-2
®
3.9.2 Changing the Settings Group via ZIVercomPlus ....................................... 3.9-2
3.9.3 Change of Settings Group via DBC HMI ..................................................... 3.9-2
3.9.4 Change of Settings Group via Digital Inputs ................................................ 3.9-3
3.9.5 Digital Inputs to Change Settings Groups.................................................... 3.9-3
3.9.6 Events to Change Settings Groups ............................................................. 3.9-4
3.10 Event Record .............................................................................................. 3.10-1

3.10.1 Description ................................................................................................... 3.10-2
3.10.2 Pickup Events .............................................................................................. 3.10-2
3.10.3 Event Mask .................................................................................................. 3.10-2
3.10.4 Consulting the Record ................................................................................. 3.10-3
3.10.5 Event Record Settings (via Communications) ............................................. 3.10-3
3.11 Oscillographic Recording ......................................................................... 3.11-1

3.11.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.11-2
3.11.2 Number of Oscillograms and Length of each Stored Oscillogram............... 3.11-2
3.11.2.a Oscillogram Lengths for Models 10 and 11 ................................................. 3.11-2
3.11.2.b Oscillogram Lengths for Model 12 ............................................................... 3.11-3
3.11.3 Oscillography Trigger Enabling .................................................................... 3.11-3
3.11.4 Stored Data .................................................................................................. 3.11-4
3.11.4.a Analog Channels .......................................................................................... 3.11-4
3.11.4.b Digital Channels ........................................................................................... 3.11-4
3.11.4.c Digital Channels in Models 10 and 11 ......................................................... 3.11-5
3.11.4.d Digital Channels in Model 12 ....................................................................... 3.11-15
3.11.5 Oscillographic Recording Records .............................................................. 3.11-25
3.11.6 Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording ............................................. 3.11-28
3.11.7 Events of the Oscillographic Recording ....................................................... 3.11-28
3.12 Inputs, Outputs & LED Targets................................................................. 3.12-1

3.12.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 3.12-2
3.12.2 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 3.12-2
3.12.2.a Logic Inputs of the Central Unit (DBC) ........................................................ 3.12-2
3.12.2.b Inputs Activation Events of the Central Unit (DBC) ..................................... 3.12-3
3.12.2.c Inputs Activation Events of the Bay Unit ...................................................... 3.12-4
3.12.3.a Logical Outputs of the Bay Unit .................................................................. 3.12-7
3.12.3.b Logical Outputs of the Central Unit (DBC) ................................................... 3.12-7
3.12.4 Trip Outputs ................................................................................................. 3.12-8
3.12.4.a Trip Outputs of the Central Unit (DBC) ........................................................ 3.12-8
3.12.4.b Trip Outputs of the Current Bay Unit .......................................................... 3.12-8
3.12.5 LED Targets (LEDs) ..................................................................................... 3.12-9
3.12.6 Digital Inputs, Auxiliary Outputs and LEDs Test .......................................... 3.12-10
3.13 Communications ........................................................................................ 3.13-1

3.13.1 Communications Ports ................................................................................. 3.13-2
3.13.1.a Central Unit Communications Ports (DBC) .................................................. 3.13-2
VI
BDBN0901A
Table of Contents
3.13.1.b Bay Unit Communications Ports .................................................................. 3.13-2

3.13.2 Communications between DBC and Bay Unit. Events, Status and
Blockings...................................................................................................... 3.13-3
3.13.2.a Communications Events between DBC and Bay Unit ................................. 3.13-3
3.13.2.b Statuses showing Communications between DBC and Bay Unit ............... 3.13-5
3.13.2.c Blocking on Communications Failure between the DBC and Enabled
Bay ............................................................................................................... 3.13-5
3.13.3 Communications with the ZIVercomPlus® ................................................... 3.13-5
3.13.3.a DBN Status in the ZIVercomPlus®. Alarms ................................................. 3.13-7
3.13.3.b Actions and Operations Carried Out through the ZIVercomPlus® ............... 3.13-13
3.13.3.c Oscillogram Capture and Display ................................................................ 3.13-14
3.13.3.d ZIVercomPlus® Emulation Mode ................................................................. 3.13-17
3.13.4 DBC Communications Events ..................................................................... 3.13-18
3.13.5 IRIG-B 123 Synchronization ........................................................................ 3.13-18
3.13.5.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the IRIG-B Function ................................. 3.13-19
3.13.6 Communications Protocols .......................................................................... 3.13-19
3.13.6.a DNP 3.0 Protocol ......................................................................................... 3.13-20
3.13.6.b MODBUS Protocol ....................................................................................... 3.13-21
3.13.6.c IEC-61850 Protocol over CPT (G Protocol)................................................. 3.13-21
3.13.6.d IEC 61850 Protocol...................................................................................... 3.13-21
3.13.6.e PROCOME Protocol through Rear RJ45 Ethernet Port .............................. 3.13-21
3.13.7 Settings ........................................................................................................ 3.13-22
3.13.7.a IEC 61850 and Ethernet Port (RJ45) Settings............................................. 3.13-22
3.13.7.b DNP3, MODBUS and IEC-61850 Compliant CPT Settings ........................ 3.13-22
3.13.8 Communications Test .................................................................................. 3.13-26
3.14 Alarm Codes ............................................................................................... 3.14-1

3.14.1 Description of the Alarm Codes in DBC Display ......................................... 3.14-2
3.14.2 DBN Status Alarm........................................................................................ 3.14-2
A. PROCOME 3.0 Protocol............................................................................. A-1

A.1 PROCOME 3.0 Protocol: Model DBC-***-****11*D* .................................... A-2
A.1.1 Control Application Layer............................................................................. A-2
A.1.2 Control Metering (MEA-s) ............................................................................ A-4
A.1.3 Digital Control Signals (ISC-s) ..................................................................... A-5
A.2 PROCOME 3.0 Protocol: Model DBC-***-****12*D* .................................... A-6
A.2.1 Control Application Layer............................................................................. A-6
A.2.2 Control Metering (MEA-s) ............................................................................ A-8
A.2.3 Digital Control Signals (ISC-s) ..................................................................... A-9
B. DNP V3.00 Device Profile Document ....................................................... B-1
C. MODBUS RTU Documentation Address Map ......................................... C-1

C.1 Models DBC-***-*******F*............................................................................. C-2
C.1.1 Preliminary Information ................................................................................ C-2
C.1.2 Function 01: Read Coil Status ..................................................................... C-2
C.1.2.a Modbus Address Range .............................................................................. C-2
C.1.2.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-*******F* ................................................ C-2
C.1.3 Function 02: Read Input Status ................................................................... C-5
C.1.4 Function 04: Read Input Registers .............................................................. C-8
C.1.5 Function 05: Force Single Coil .................................................................... C-10
VII
BDBN0901A
Table of Contents

C.2 Models DBC-***-****12*F*............................................................................ C-11
C.2.1 Preliminary Information ................................................................................ C-11
C.2.2 Function 01: Read Coil Status ..................................................................... C-11
C.2.2.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-****12*F* ............................................... C-11
C.2.3 Function 02: Read Input Status ................................................................... C-14
C.2.4 Function 04: Read Input Registers .............................................................. C-17
C.2.5 Function 05: Force Single Coil ..................................................................... C-19
D. IEC 61850 Protocol .................................................................................... C-1

D.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. D-2
D.2 Starting Communications ............................................................................. D-3
D.3 Information Screens ..................................................................................... D-4
D.4 Web Server .................................................................................................. D-6
D.5 Communications Port Configuration ............................................................ D-7
D.6 FTP Access .................................................................................................. D-9
D.7 SCL: Substation Configuration Language ................................................... D-9
D.7.1 CID file for Protection and Control Equipment ............................................. D-10
D.7.2 Loading the CID trough FTP ........................................................................ D-10
D.7.3 Loading the CID through USB by means of a Pendrive .............................. D-11
D.8 Errors ........................................................................................................... D-12
E. Schemes and Drawings............................................................................. E-1
F. List of Illustrations and Tables ................................................................. E-1

F.1 List of Illustrations ........................................................................................ F-2
F.2 List of Tables ................................................................................................ F-4
G. Warranty...................................................................................................... G-1
VIII
BDBN0901A
Chapter 1
Description and
Start-Up
Contents
1.1 DBN Functions (Bus Differential)

1.2 DBN Additional Functions
1.3 Local Interface: Alphanumeric Display and Keypad
1.4 Model Selection
1.5 Installation and Commissioning
1.1 DBN Functions
(Bus Differential)

1.1.1 DBC Central Unit ..................................................................................................... 1.1-3
1.1.1.a Main Differential Unit .......................................................................................... 1.1-3
1.1.1.b Supervision Differential Unit ............................................................................... 1.1-3
1.1.1.c Differential Alarm Unit ......................................................................................... 1.1-4
1.1.1.d Lockout Function ................................................................................................ 1.1-4
1.1.2 Current Bay Unit Functions (DBP-B) ....................................................................... 1.1-5
1.1.2.a 50 Supervision Unit for Differential Unit Trip ...................................................... 1.1-5
1.1.2.b 50 Supervision Unit for Breaker Failure Trip ...................................................... 1.1-5
1.1.2.c Breaker Failure Unit (with Retrip Function, Previously Failed BF Function
and possibility to use an External BF) ................................................................ 1.1-5
1.1.3 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Protection Unit .............................. 1.1-6
1.1.4 Voltage Bay Unit Functions (DBP-A) ....................................................................... 1.1-6
1.1.4.a Undervoltage Supervision Unit ........................................................................... 1.1-6
The DBN is a sophisticated low-impedance bus bar differential protection system comprised of
powerful, distributed microprocessor based IEDs (a Central Unit designated DBC and bay units
designated DBP or bay units V type (designated DRV or DCV). DBN systems provide the
protection, control and metering functions for bus differential protection in medium, high and
extra high voltage substations.
DBN Systems are suitable for substations with up to four or five buses (depending on model),
and up to 28 current bay units (line bay). Up to 4 bus voltage DBP type bay units are available
as a function of the selected model (Voltage Bay not applicable in Model 12). Thanks to the
possibility to configure different digital inputs and to bus tie and line bay configuration logic, the
DBN can also be applied to different substation types (single bus, double bus, breaker and a
half, double bus with transfer bus, etc).
DBN systems count on different models to adapt to different situations (allow a mix of bays of
different nominal currents or having all bays with the same nominal current).
When bays are DBP type

- If all line bays are of the same nominal current, DBC-*2 and DBP-B*N models are used for 5
A bays and DBC-*1 and DBP-B*E models for 1 A bays.
- Situations in which 5 A bays (DBP-B*N model) and 1 A bays (DBP-B*H model) are to be
mixed, the DBC model to be used will be DBC-*3.
When bays are “V” type (DRV or DCV)

- If all line bays are 5 A, DBC-*2 models are used setting the nominal phase current of bay to
5 A.
- In the rest of situations (1 A nominal or mix of 1 A and 5 A bays) the DBC model to be used
will be DBC-*3, setting the nominal current of each bay as applicable.
The Central Unit and the Bay Units exchange information via high-speed fiber optic
communications to provide the differential bus protection in a substation. Bus Differential
Protection is achieved by a series of functions implemented in both the Central Unit and the Bay
and Voltage IEDs. These functions are complemented by a Breaker Failure function per line.
1.1-2
BDBN0901A
1.1 Functions
1.1.1 DBC Central Unit

1.1.1.a Main Differential Unit
For models 10 and 11 are included twelve single-phase Differential Units (three per phase for
up to four busses). Each unit has a percentage restraint characteristic.
DBN model 12 is provided with 5 busbars and has therefore 15 single phase percent restraint
differential elements (one for each bus and phase).
The Main Differential Unit of every bus can be selectively enabled or disabled via settings.
Three different setting groups are available (one active and two alternative), and independent
activation signaling is provided for each of the single-phase units.
The algorithm of the Main Differential Unit includes a CT saturation detector (refer to Main
Differential Unit Trip Logic). The saturation detector is designed to avoid misoperation due to CT
saturation in one of the substation lines.
Elements attached to the bus phase differential characteristic (fault start detector, external fault
detector and directional blocking), contribute to the correct operation of the main differential unit
even with saturated external faults (which could cause the differential characteristic to activate
as a function of its settings), preventing in this way incorrect bus trips.
1.1.1.b Supervision Differential Unit

The Supervision Differential Unit includes currents of all enabled bays no matter the bay bus
connection status. Neither coupler bays nor disabled bays are considered in this unit. Sensitivity
and Restraint Slope settings independent from the Main Differential Unit settings are available.
The Supervision Differential Unit is always enabled (signaling always in operation). Bus trip
differential supervision may be disabled by means of a setting. If the unit is enabled for the bus
trip differential supervision, it will supervise the operation of the main differential units; thus, for
a bus differential trip to take place the supervisory differential unit must be active.
The Supervision Differential Unit also includes three different setting groups (one active and two
alternative), and independent unit activation signaling per phase.
1.1-3
BDBN0901A
1.1.1.c Differential Alarm Unit

Twelve single-phase units are available (three phases for each of four possible busbars) for
models 10 and 11. All differential alarm units measure the corresponding differential current all
the time.
DBN model 12 is provided with 5 busbars and has therefore 15 single phase differential alarm
units (one for each bus and phase).
This unit detects situations of significant differential currents (although always below differential
unit sensitivity), due to metering or application errors, so that the unit activates when the
differential current remains above a certain threshold for a given time, causing in this way an
alarm display in the applicable bus phase. Furthermore, if the 87 Blocking Enable by
Differential Alarm setting is set to YES, the alarm activation blocks the applicable bus
differential trip.
Three different setting groups are available (one active and two alternatives). Signaling
independent from the activation output of the unit related to each phase is also available in
every bus.
1.1.1.d Lockout Function

Bus tripping may activate the Lockout function (through the applicable enable setting). After
lockout activation, the closing contact is blocked until a manual reset signal is received. Manual
reset can be initiated via the from panel operator interface (HMI), a status contact input, or via
local or remote communications.
Lockout function can be caused by differential bus trip, breaker failure bus trip or digital input
bus trip. The cause for Lockout function activation can be selected through 3 settings.
Means for Lockout reset can also be selected through settings (operation enable): keyboard,
front port, remote port or digital input.
It is provided with three selectable settings tables (one active and two alternative), except for
DBC Model 12 with HW Rev. 2 (DBCC*****x12**, where x = 6, 7, 8 or 9) in which there is only
one settings table.
1.1-4
BDBN0901A
1.1 Functions
1.1.2 Current Bay Unit Functions (DBP-B)

1.1.2.a 50 Supervision Unit for Differential Unit Trip
Three Overcurrent units are included (one per phase) in each Current Bay Unit. Every element
detects the current flowing through the line to which the bay unit is connected, so that when the
differential trip that sends trip commands to all bays of a protection zone is activated, tripping is
prevented in those protection zone lines through which no significant current flows (less than
the set level). This is therefore the differential protection associated to the local bay.
The Overcurrent unit can be selectively enabled or disabled via settings. Three different setting
groups are available (one active and two alternatives).
1.1.2.b 50 Supervision Unit for Breaker Failure Trip

Three Overcurrent units are included (one per phase) in each Current Bay Unit. Every element
detects the current flowing through the line to which the bay unit is connected, so that when the
breaker failure trip that sends trip commands to all bays of a protection zone is activated,
tripping is prevented in those protection zone lines through which no significant current flows
(less than the set level). This is therefore the differential protection associated to the local bay.
The Overcurrent unit can be selectively enabled or disabled via settings. Three different setting
groups are available (one active and two alternatives).
1.1.2.c Breaker Failure Unit (with Retrip Function, Previously Failed BF

Function and possibility to use an External BF)
Breaker Failure detection is included for single-phase or three-phase modes, sending a signal
to the DBC for this to trip the bay bus, causing therefore other breakers to trip and clear the
fault.
This unit includes the retrip function, which purpose is to retry opening the breaker of the line
where breaker failure conditions have been detected before sending a trip command to the
whole applicable protection zone.
Breaker Failure Unit and Retrip may be enabled or disabled through settings. Also, the trip
output configuration of DBP type bays may be switched to retrip output by means of a setting,
whereas if retrip outputs of “V” type bays (DRV or DCV) are used these are configured as for
the rest of outputs of this type of bay.
The breaker failure element is also provided with a previously failed breaker failure function,
with which the activation of the bay breaker failure can be increased when low gas pressure is
detected in SF6 breakers.
On the other hand, the bay breaker failure signal sent to the DBC can be activated
instantaneously through an input (IF_EXT) activated via a BF unit external to the DBN, causing
in this way the applicable bus to trip on breaker failure.
Three different setting groups (one active and two alternatives) are available.
1.1-5
BDBN0901A
1.1.3 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Protection Unit
The bay is disabled by the Dynamic Protection Zone Logic when the bay has not influenced
over the protection zone, (i.e. with open breaker), so that when the bay is disabled for this
reason, it is not taken into account for bus tripping (neither for Differential Protection, nor for
Breaker Failure Protection) their currents not being taken into consideration to the effect of bus
protection. The bay must be enabled before the bay has influence again over the protection
zone.
The purpose of the End Fault Protection Unit is to detect fault currents (above pickup setting,
which coincides with the pickup value of the overcurrent unit for the supervision of the
differential trip unit) when the bay is disabled by the Dynamic Protection Zone, by the activation
of an output that could be sent to trip the End Fault Protection Breaker of this line.
These units include three setting tables to select from (one active and two alternatives).
1.1.4 Voltage Bay Unit Functions (DBP-A)

1.1.4.a Undervoltage Supervision Unit
Every phase is provided with an instantaneous undervoltage measuring element, so as not to
allow tripping if a bus voltage above the setting is detected.
The instantaneous unit can be selectively enabled or disabled via settings. Three different
setting groups are available (one active and two alternatives).
1.1-6
BDBN0901A
1.2 DBN Additional
Functions

1.2.1 Local Control ............................................................................................................ 1.2-2
1.2.2 LED Targets ............................................................................................................. 1.2-2
1.2.3 Digital Inputs ............................................................................................................ 1.2-2
1.2.4 Analog Inputs ........................................................................................................... 1.2-2
1.2.5 Trip Outputs ............................................................................................................. 1.2-2
1.2.6 Auxiliary Outputs ...................................................................................................... 1.2-3
1.2.7 Event Recording ...................................................................................................... 1.2-3
1.2.8 Oscillographic Register ............................................................................................ 1.2-3
1.2.9 Time Synchronization .............................................................................................. 1.2-3
1.2.10 Local Information (Keypad and Display) .................................................................. 1.2-4
1.2.11 Self-Test Program .................................................................................................... 1.2-4
1.2.1 Local Control

The following operations can be performed via the front panel HMI:
• Lockout reset.
• Trip blocking of the different buses upon differential unit operation.
• Trip unblocking of the different buses upon differential unit operation.
• Breaker failure or digital input trip blocking of each bus.
• Breaker failure or digital input trip unblocking of each bus.
• Tie buses as a single bus (1&2, 1&3, 1&4, 2&3, 2&4, 3&4).
• Separate buses from single bus configuration (1&2, 1&3, 1&4, 2&3, 2&4, 3&4).
• Reset latched breaker failure.
• Oscillography trigger.
1.2.2 LED Targets

Central Unit front panel indication consists of thirteen (13) LEDs. Twelve (12) of the LEDs are
user programmable. DBP type bay units are provided with 5 LEDs, four of which are
configurable and the fifth indicates equipment “Ready". In “V” type (DRV or DCV) bay units, the
number of LEDS is a function of the model, but only the four first ones are visualized through
the DBC ZIVercomPlus®.
1.2.3 Digital Inputs

The DBN System has 7 or 14 status contact inputs in the Central Unit (the number of inputs is a
function of whether there is an optional auxiliary module or not) and a variable number of inputs
in each bay (as a function of the model), all of them being configurable: 8 or 16 in each DBP
type bay, and a variable number of inputs as a function of the model of each “V” type (DRV or
DCV) bay, only the status of the 16 first inputs being visualized through the DBC
ZIVercomPlus® (the status of all digital inputs of the “V” type equipment are visualized in the
ZIVercomPlus®. See details in the manual of the applicable equipment).
1.2.4 Analog Inputs

Each Bay and Voltage IED has three (3) analog inputs (one for each phase) with reversible
polarity (via Invert Polarity setting)
1.2.5 Trip Outputs

Both in DBC and DBP type bays, all system equipment is provided with two switching outputs
with two contacts in each output. These four switching contacts can be expanded to eight
through an auxiliary module (optional).
In DBP type current bays the first two contacts are NO trip and the next two contacts are close
block (one NO and the other NC). If the DBP has a second board, the four contacts are NO trip.
Trip contacts can also be configured as retrip as a function of the retrip type setting.
In “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays, the first four contacts are switch contacts (the first two
being general protection trip contacts but not including the trip signal of the DBN current bay by
default. See BAY_TRIP signal details in the “V” type -DRV or DCV- equipment manual).
1.2-2
BDBN0901A
1.2 DBN Additional Functions
1.2.6 Auxiliary Outputs

There are seven (7) auxiliary contact outputs in the Central Unit, six (6) of which are
configurable. An optional expansion module doubles these numbers. DBP type bay IEDs
include eight (8) auxiliary contact outputs (7 programmable), expandable to sixteen (16). In “V”
type (DRV or DCV) bays, the number of auxiliary outputs differs as a function of the model
(refer to the manual applicable to those equipment), of which, although all are configured the
same, only the status of the 14 first outputs is visualized through the DBC ZIVercomPlus® (the
status of all auxiliary equipment outputs are visualized through the “V” type equipment
ZIVercomPlus®. For details, refer to the manual of the applicable equipment).
1.2.7 Event Recording

The event record capacity is one hundred (100) events in the DBC (events involving the
operation of DBC and DBP or “V” type bays related to Bus Differential Protection). The
organization of the record is such that simultaneous events generated by the same function will
not occupy separate records, and will use only one position of the event memory. Simultaneous
events are those that occur separately within a time interval of 1ms, which is the resolution time
of the recorder.
On the other hand, in each “V” type (DRV or DCV) bay, there exist events specific to that bay
(events of all units comprised in the bay). Refer to the manual applicable to that equipment.
1.2.8 Oscillographic Register

The DBC incorporates a built in oscillographic recorder. Both analog magnitudes of the three
phases and digital signals of the DBC and all of the bays will be recorded in each oscillogram.
Sampling and storing frequency is 48 samples per cycle.
On the other hand, in each “V” type (DRV or DCV) bay there exist oscillogram records specific
to that bay. Refer to the manual applicable to that equipment.
1.2.9 Time Synchronization

The DBC includes an internal clock with a resolution of 1 ms. This can be synchronized:
- Via GPS (IRIG-B 123 Protocol), for models with BNC connector.
- By communications through remote communications port (Protocols PROCOME 3.0, DNP
3.0, etc.).
Type “V” (DRV or DCV) equipment have also a synchronizeable internal clock (refer to the
manual of the applicable equipment).
1.2-3
BDBN0901A
1.2.10 Local Information (Keypad and Display)

The following information of the DBN system can be displayed and modified via the DBC front
panel HMI:
• Settings Display and Adjustment:

- Central Unit.
- Line Bay Units.
- Voltage Bay Units.
• Configuration:
- Passwords.
- Operation Permission.
- Inputs and Outputs.
- Communications.
- Date and Time.
• Operations:
- Buses indication and tripped bays.
• Metering Information:
- Differential currents.
- Restraint currents.
- Line currents.
- Bus voltages.
• · Status Report:
- Activation of Units.
- Central unit inputs.
- Central unit outputs.
- Activated differential blockings.
- Communication between bays and central unit.
- Bay disable (by disabling status contact input or by activation of the Dynamic
Protection Zone Logic).
1.2.11 Self-Test Program

A continuously running diagnostic self-test program verifies the correct operation of the Central
Unit and each IED and alerts the user to potential problems.
1.2-4
BDBN0901A
1.3 Local Interface:
Alphanumeric
Keypad and Display

1.3.1 DBC Local Interface ................................................................................................. 1.3-2
1.3.1.a Alphanumeric Keypad and Display..................................................................... 1.3-2
1.3.1.b Keys, Functions and Operation Modes .............................................................. 1.3-3
1.3.1.c Using the F2 Key to Access the Functions ......................................................... 1.3-6
1.3.1.d Main Menu .......................................................................................................... 1.3-7
1.3.1.e Information Menu ................................................................................................ 1.3-8
1.3.1.f Last Trip Indication ........................................................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.1.g Test Mode ......................................................................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.2 DBP Type Bay Local Interface............................................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.3 “V” Type Bay (DRV or DCV) Local Interface ......................................................... 1.3-13
1.3.1 DBC Local Interface

1.3.1.a Alphanumeric Keypad and Display
• Display
The dimensions of the liquid crystal
display of the DBC are 114 x 64 mm
(240 x 128 points or pixels) and it has
its own illumination. It displays the
configuration, settings,
measurements, states and alarms,
etc. Under the display, there are 4
function keys (F1, F2, F3 and F4).
Figure 1.3.1 shows the layout of the
default screen and the auxiliary
function keys.
Figure 1.3.1: Alphanumeric Display.
DBC displays can be provided with an AUTODIMMING unit that keeps the display background
light off when not in use. The display lights on when:
- A key is pressed.
- The relay trips.
Pressing a key immediately lights the display on and the 15 minute timer starts timing. Every
time a key is pressed before the timer times out, the timer resets. Here two conditions can
occur, that the home screen is displayed after using the keyboard or that any other screen is
displayed. In the latter case the home screen is displayed after the two minute timer times out.
Until then, no matter the way the home screen is reached, the display light is on. Once in the
home screen the 15 minute timer starts timing and the display light goes off when the timer
times out.
• Keypad associated with the Alphanumeric Display
The keypad has 16 keys laid out in a 4 X 4 matrix, as shown in
Figure 1.3.2.
In addition to the keys corresponding to the digits (keys from 0

to 9), there are the selection keys (µ and ¶), the confirmation
key (ENT), the escape key (ESC) and the contrast key ( ).
Starting with the default screen, operations can be performed

on DBN System functions in two different ways using one
single key (F2) or using the whole keypad.
Figure 1.3.2: Keypad.
1.3-2
BDBN0901A
1.3 Local Interface: Alphanumeric Keypad and Display
1.3.1.b Keys, Functions and Operation Modes

This section explains the keys available, the function keys associated with the alphanumeric
display as well as those on the keypad.
• Keypad
Confirmation Key
The ENT key is used to confirm an action: After making a selection, after editing a
setting or to advance in order to view all the records. After any operation
(selection, change of settings, information, etc.), press ENT again to access the
immediately preceding level.
Escape Key
The ESC key is used to exit a screen if you do not want to change a setting or,
simply, to exit an information screen. In any case, press this key to return to the
immediately preceding screen.
Selection Keys on the Display

The selection keys are for advancing or returning, in correlative order, to any of
the options of a menu or a submenu. When a menu has more than six options, an
arrow (È) will appear in the lower right corner of the display indicating their
existence. Use the * key to view these options and the first set of options will
disappear. An arrow (↓) will appear in the upper right corner of the display to
indicate, in turn, the existence of the first set of options.
The key ↓ is also used to delete digits within a setting that is being modified. It
only has this function when a setting is being entered.
1.3-3
BDBN0901A
• Auxiliary Function Keys
Pressing F1 confirms changes in settings (when the unit requests confirmation of

such changes) or it confirms the activation of a settings group (when the unit
requests this confirmation).
Use the F2 key to consult the unit for the information relative to the measurements
of each bus current / voltage (depending on the model), as well as for resetting
the indication of the last trip and LEDs. This entire sequence of functions,
implemented by pressing F2 repeatedly, is explained in the next section.
In the DBN system, the function of the F3 key is to activate Test Mode.
The F4 function key is used to reject changes in settings (when the unit requests
the confirmation of such changes) and to reject the activation of a reserve settings
group (also when such confirmation is requested). F4 is also used to activate the
function of resetting the unit from the default screen.
Although the unit requests a password and its subsequent confirmation before
resetting, you must be careful with this function because it implies losing all the
settings, with the ensuing danger for the performance of the protection.
• Accessing the Options

The digit keys (from 0 to 9) allow direct access to the various options (settings, information,
measurements, etc.), which are presented in the following sections. This direct access consists
in successively pressing the identification numbers that the screen displays prior to each
setting, or option within the corresponding setting.
Another way to access the options consists in navigating the menus with the selection keys and
then confirming the option selected with ENT.
1.3-4
BDBN0901A
• Operation
Change of Settings (Range)
The change of settings (Range) presents the following arrangement: the operational value of
the setting appears in the place indicated by the word ACTUAL. The new value is entered into
the next line, in the place indicated by the word NEW, where you see a blinking cursor.
Use the digit keys to edit the new value, which

must agree with the range specified in the last line
of the display. If an error occurs upon inputting a
value, use the ↓ key to erase it. Once you have
edited the new value, press ENT to confirm it and
exit to the preceding menu.
There is a type of setting that follows this outline

but with a range limited to the options YES and
NO. In this case, the keys 1 and 0, correspond to
the values YES and NO. Then press ENT to
confirm the setting and return to the preceding
screen.
Change of Settings (Options)

These settings are presented in an options menu
which is selected by either of two already known
procedures: with the direct access number
associated with the option or by using the selection
keys and confirming with ENT. In both cases, the
system returns to the preceding screen.
Exit Menus and Settings

To exit a menu or a setting that you do not want to change, press the ESC key. To exit an
information screen, press either ENT or ESC indistinctly. In either case, you return to the
preceding menu.
1.3-5
BDBN0901A
1.3.1.c Using the F2 Key to Access the Functions

• Measurements
Pressing F2 then will display the information in a rounded rectangle window in which you can
view the following screens:
- Differential currents of the three phases at bus 1.

- Restraint currents of the three phases at bus 1.
- Voltages of the three phases at bus 1 (optional).
- Differential currents of the three phases at bus 5 (only for models 12).
- Restraint currents of the three phases at bus 5 (only for models 12).
The currents and voltages appear or not according to the bus settings (General Settings does
not show measurements of busbars set to NO). The same occurs for the state of the
measurements information screen when the differential and restraint currents appear. The
format of these screens, pressing F2, is as follows:
And so on for the four buses.
1.3-6
BDBN0901A
• LEDs Reset
Pressing F2 again brings up the screen for
Resetting LEDs. If you do not want to reset the
indication, press continue to access the screen for
Resetting Trips. Otherwise, if you press it during
2 seconds, the order is executed and the LEDs
light up. The screen displays: ACTIVATED LEDs.
• Trip Indication Reset

Once the LEDs have been reset, pressing F2
again brings up the screen for Resetting Trips, as
shown to the right. If you do not want to reset the
indication, press continue to return to the default
screen. Otherwise, pressing it during 2 seconds
executes the order and the screen displays:
INDICATION RESET.
Pressing F2 again from this last screen described returns you to the default screen, from where
you can start the cycle over.
If, in any screen, the key is not pressed during more than twenty seconds, the system will
automatically move on to the next screen without executing any of the operations described.
1.3.1.d Main Menu

This screen shows the main menu, which appears
after pressing any key of the numeric keypad from
the default or last trip screen. Each option has a
direct access digit.
Options 0, 1, 2 and 3 require the access password

(2140, defect access password).
Configuration, Operation, Activate Group and

Change Settings menus are explained in the
applicable operation sections (see Chapter 3).
1.3-7
BDBN0901A
1.3.1.e Information Menu

The Information menu can be accessed freely,
that is, it does not require a password. This
Information option brings up a screen with the
following options: Settings, Configuration,
Operations, Status and Metering.
• Settings Information
The options of the Settings information menu correspond to the development of option 3 of the
main menu, Change Settings. Therefore, the Settings option of the Information menu
accesses a set of screens that work just like the Change Settings option, with the exception
that the Information menu only displays the established settings.
• Configuration Information
The Configuration option provides the information about the Password configuration, the
Communications and the Date and Time in which the DBN system is configured.
• Operations Information
Selecting it elicits the screen on the right (if there is
some trip that has not been reset).
Next to BUS, the display will show the bus tripped

(by breaker failure, differential unit or activation of
digital input). The tripped bay IEDs are displayed
next to BAY. If the trips were reset, the message in
the display would be: TRIP RESET.
• Status Information
Selecting the option for information about Status in
the display takes you to a menu with the following
options: Alarms, Measuring Unit, Digital Inputs,
Digital Outputs, Connected Bays, Diff.
Blockings, Communications Failure Counter
and Disabled Bays.
1.3-8
BDBN0901A
Alarms Status
Selecting the Alarms option elicits the information about the current bays (1…28) or the voltage
bays (1…4) to which they refer. This situation will occur in case bay communication is correct
but is disabled via setting, in which case the alarm will go off when the bay is enabled.
This alarm indication can also be viewed in the screen that presents the state of each of the
bays through the Protection Alarm LED.
Measuring Unit Status
Selecting the Measuring Unit option elicits the following information:
- Status of the Differential Units of each Bus.

- Status of the Differential Alarm Units of each Bus.
- Status of the Differential Supervision Units.
These screens appear in the order in which they

are listed, so that you can navigate them with the
selection keys.
The format of these screens is shown on the right.

First line shows the applicable unit. Numbers 1 or
0 show whether the applicable phase element is
enabled or not.
Digital Inputs Status
Selecting the Digital Inputs status option elicits
the information about their status. There will be a 1
or a 0 below each input indicating whether the
corresponding input is activated or not
respectively.
The figure shows the state of the digital status

contact inputs of board 1 (T1) of the Central Unit.
To see board 2 (T2), press the ↓ key.
Digital Outputs Status

The information relative to the Digital Outputs
follows the same diagram as that described for the
inputs, including the indication of the existence of
the second information screen (T2).
1.3-9
BDBN0901A
Connected Bays
Selecting the Connected Bays option elicits the
information presented on the screen to the right. A
1 reports that that bay unit (laid out in groups of 8)
is communicating with the central unit, while a 0
means that it is not.
Differential Blockings
Selecting the Diff. Blockings option provides
information about the reasons for the blocking of
the units on each bus, where B1 is bus 1, B2 is
bus 2, etc. The possible causes of blocking are the
following:
ENT Blocking due to digital input.

COM Blocking due to communications failure between DBC and some enabled
bay.
BYP Blocking due to bypass or because there is a bay IED in service that could
not be adjusted
ALR Blocking due to Differential Alarm.
DIS Blocking due to discordance between a differential unit and the supervision
unit.
HDW Blocking due to hardware failure detected by the self-monitoring system of
the central unit (communication problems between DSPs).
PKUP Blocking appeared when powering up the unit because when it was
disconnected the power supply was blocked.
TRN Transfer block. Differential blocking caused by the transfer logic (combined
coupling breaker status or bay 89-TR status).
The screen in the preceding figure shows that the

unit has not been blocked for any of the foregoing
reasons. On the right, you have an example of the
information that this screen would provide if, for
example, there were a failure in the
communications between DBC and an enabled
bay (DBN model 10 or 11, 4 buses)
In the event of a communications failure between DBC and an enabled bay, since it is the bay
itself that indicates which bus it is connected to, all the differential units are blocked because it
is no longer possible to know which bus the bay IED that does not communicate belongs to.
1.3-10
BDBN0901A
Communications Failure Counter

Selecting the Comm. Failure Counter elicits the
following information: Each bay IED has a counter
so that, when a failure is detected in the
communication between the central unit and the
bay IED, this counter increases a unit.
When you have consulted the screen and are ready to exit, press ESC. The message RESET
RECORD? will appear. The F1 key resets and the F4 key does not reset the record.
It is important to distinguish between a sporadic communications failure, which locks out the
differential unit only during that point in time and a permanent communication failure, which will
block the differential units until the blocking is reset.
Bear in mind that a loss in the permanent communications of the central unit with any of the bay
IEDs will block the four (or five, depending on the model) buses.
Disabled Bays
If the Disabled Bays option is selected, the
information on the screen to the right is displayed.
A 1 means that the bay (distributed in groups of 8)
is disabled via activation of the digital input for
disabling that bay or disabled via dynamic zone,
whereas a 0 means that the bay is not disabled via
digital input nor via dynamic zone
• Measurements Information
Selecting the option brings up a menu with: Line
Currents, Measurements of Differential Current,
Measurements of Restraint Current and Bus
Voltages (the latter option is only available in DBN
models with voltage supervision).
Line Current Measurements

Selecting the Line Currents option first elicits a
screen like the one depicted on the right. From this
screen, corresponding to Bay 1, and by means of
the selection key, you access the information
about the various Line Bays (from 1 to 28 or from 1
to 14, depending on the DBN model).
The screen shows the measurements of bay 1 of a DBN model 10 as for DBN models 11 and
12 bay current phase angles are also shown.
1.3-11
BDBN0901A
Differential Current Measurements

When you select the measurements of Differential
Current option, the first screen you see is the one
presented on the right. As in the preceding point,
by means of the selection keys you access the
information about the enabled busbars (from 1 to 4
or from 1 to 5, depending on the DBN model).
Restraint Current Measurements

As in the preceding case, the information about the
measurements of the Restraint Current of bus 1
appears first. Then, with the selection keys you
can advance to see the information about the
enabled busbars (from 1 to 4 or from 1 to 5,
depending on the DBN model).
Bus Voltages Measurements

The last information provided by the
Measurements menu is that of the Bus Voltages,
which is displayed as in the previous points
(screens with the information about enabled
busbars 1 to 4 or 1 to 5).
This information is only shown in DBN models with Voltage supervision (not applicable to
model 12).
Increasing and decreasing the measurement display refresh rate
On every model 12 measurement screen, pressing F1 refreshes the measurement more
frequently, whereas pressing F2 refreshes the measurement less frequently (measurements
appear more stable).
1.3-12
BDBN0901A
1.3.1.f Last Trip Indication

If there has been a trip, the unit will present, first of
all, the data about it.
Next to BUS, the display will show the bus tripped

(by breaker failure, differential unit or activation of
digital input). The IEDs belonging to that bus that
have also tripped will appear after BAY.
In the event of a trip occurring before the indication of the preceding trip is reset, the actual
indication is added to the preceding one (that is, the indication of the preceding trip does not
disappear).
1.3.1.g Test Mode

Differential characteristic static tests (see 3.2) are carried out using Test Mode (in which the
differential element does not take into account the fault start signal).
To activate the Test Mode:
- Press the F3 key from the default screen.

- This brings up a screen with the message CONFIRM TEST MODE.
- Pressing F1 confirms the option, while pressing F4 returns you to the default screen.
In Test Mode, the LEDs of the Central Unit blink.
To return to normal operation, press the F3 key again. The message CONFIRM EXITING TEST
MODE appears. Pressing F1 confirms and pressing F4 cancels the exit option.
If no key is pressed during some 10 minutes, the unit returns to normal mode.
1.3.2 DBP Type Bay Local Interface

DBP type bay units do not have display and only have one key (R) for the reset of LEDs that
are programmed as memorized.
1.3.3 “V” Type Bay (DRV or DCV) Local Interface

“V” type bay units (DRV or DCV) have alphanumeric display and keyboard (see details in the
corresponding manual).
1.3-13
BDBN0901A
1.3-14
BDBN0901A
1.4 Model Selection

1.4.1 DBC Model Selection (Bus Differential Central Unit)............................................... 1.4-2
1.4.2 Bay Model Selection ................................................................................................ 1.4-3
1.4.2.a DBP Type Bay .................................................................................................... 1.4-3
1.4.2.b DRV Type Bay .................................................................................................... 1.4-3
1.4.2.c DCV Type Bay .................................................................................................... 1.4-3
1.4.1 DBC Model Selection (Bus Differential Central Unit)
DBC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Options
B Standard C B + Dynamic Zone v.1.0
2 Rated Current
1 1 A (DBC not applicable to “V” type bay) 2 5 A (with DBP or with “V” type bay)
3 Mixture of 1A and 5A (with DBPB*H and
DBPB*N or with “V” type bay)
3 Number of Bays
A Up to 14 line bays C Up to 28 line bays
B Up to 14 line bays + 4 bus voltage bays D Up to 28 line bays + 4 bus voltage bays
4 Auxiliary Voltage
Power Supply Digital Inputs Power Supply Digital Inputs
1 24 - 48 Vdc 24 - 125 Vdc 3 220 - 250 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc
2 110 - 125 Vdc 24 - 125 Vdc
5 Frequency / Language
0 50 Hz / Spanish C 60 Hz / Spanish
2 60 Hz / English E 60 Hz / Portuguese
A 50 Hz / English
6 Communications
1 RS232 (local) + GFO (ST) (Remote 2) + 6 RS232 (local) + RJ45 for ETHERNET (Remote
RS232 (Remote 1) 2)+ GFO (ST) (Remote 1)
2 RS232 (local) + GFO (ST) (Remote 2) + 1 7 RS232 (local) + RJ45 for ETHERNET (Remote
mm PFO (Remote 1) 2)+ GFO (SMA) (Remote 1)
GFO (SMA) (Remote 1) 2)+ 1 mm PFO (Remote 1)
GFO (ST) (Remote 1) 2)+ RS232 (Remote 1)
RS485 (Remote 1) 2)+ RS485 (Remote 1)
7 Inputs / Outputs
0 Basic 5 3 + Auto Dimming
1 I / O Expansion Module 6 5 + DBC Rev.2 HW + IEC 61850 (RJ45 and RJ45)
2 0 + IRIG-B123 7 5 + DBC Rev.2 HW + IEC 61850 (RJ45 and MTRJ)
3 1 + IRIG-B123 8 5 + DBC Rev.2 HW + IEC 61850 (ST and ST)
4 2 + Auto Dimming 9 5 + DBC Rev.2 HW
8/9 Models
10 4 Buses Protection (87 and BF). Dynamic Zone. 12 Model 11 + 5 Buses Protection (No Voltage Bay
(Number of Bays depending on System compatible)
configuration).
11 Model 10 + Up to 28 Current Bays
10 Enclosure
N 4U x 1 19” Rack
11 Communications Protocol
D PROCOME J [PROCOME or DNP3] + (PROCOME) + [IEC 61850 v00]
E [PROCOME or DNP3.0] + [PROCOME] K [PROCOME or MODBUS] + (PROCOME) + [IEC 61850 v00]
F [PROCOME or MODBUS] + [PROCOME] L [PROCOME or DNP3] + [PROCOME (Port ETHERNET)] + [IEC
G [PROCOME or CPT with IEC 61850] + [PROCOME] 61850 v00]
H [PROCOME or DNP3.0] + [PROCOME (Port M [PROCOME or MODBUS] + [PROCOME (Port ETHERNET)] +
ETHERNET)] [IEC 61850 v00]
I [PROCOME or MODBUS] + [PROCOME (Port P [PROCOME or DNP3] + (PROCOME)+ [IEC 61850 v00 +
ETHERNET)] “Bonding” type redundancy]
12 Finishing
A Stainless without cover. Tropicalized C Stainless with cover (IP 51 in front side). Tropicalized.
U A + CG logo W C + CG logo
-- Enclosure done in plate without cover. No
Tropicalized
1.4-2
BDBN0901A
 ZIV GRID AUTOMATION, S. L. Zamudio, 2011
1.4 Model Selection
1.4.2 Bay Model Selection

1.4.2.a DBP Type Bay
DBP D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Unit Type
A Voltage B Current
2 Options
1 Standard 2 DBP-B1 + Dynamic Zone v.1.0
3 Rated Current
0 Voltage Unit N 5 A (with DBC*2 or with DBC*3)
E 1 A (with DBC*1) H 1 A (with DBC*3)
4 Auxiliary Voltage
Power Supply Digital Inputs Power Supply Digital Inputs
1 24 - 48 Vdc 24 - 125 Vdc 3 220 - 250 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc
2 110 - 125 Vdc 24 - 125 Vdc
5 Language
0 Spanish E Portuguese
2 English
6 Spare
0 Basic 1 DBC Rev. 2 HW
7 Inputs / Outputs
0 Basic 1 I / O Expansion Module
8/9 Models
10 4 Buses Protection. BF and Retrip. 87 Trip 50 12 Model 11 + 5 Buses Protection (No Voltage Bay
Supervision and BF. Dynamic Zone. compatible)
11 Model 10 + Angles in measurements
10 Enclosure
F 2U x 1 19” Rack
12 Finishing
A Stainless without cover. Tropicalized. C Stainless with cover (IP 51 in front side). Tropicalized.
U A + CG logo W C + CG logo
-- Enclosure done in plate without cover. No
Tropicalized.
1.4.2.b DRV Type Bay

See Model List in DRV equipment Instructions Manual.
1.4.2.c DCV Type Bay

See Model List in DCV equipment Instructions Manual.
1.4-3
BDBN0901A
1.4-4
BDBN0901A
1.5 Installation and
Commissioning

1.5.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1.5-2
1.5.2 General .................................................................................................................... 1.5-2
1.5.3 Accuracy .................................................................................................................. 1.5-2
1.5.4 Installation ................................................................................................................ 1.5-3
1.5.5 Preliminary Inspection ............................................................................................. 1.5-3
1.5.6 Isolation Test............................................................................................................ 1.5-3
1.5.6.a DBC Central Unit ................................................................................................ 1.5-3
1.5.6.b DBP Type Bay Units ........................................................................................... 1.5-4
1.5.6.c Verification of the DBC and DBP Power Supply ................................................ 1.5-5
1.5.7 Metering Tests ......................................................................................................... 1.5-5
1.5.7.a DBP-B Type Bays Current Metering Test........................................................... 1.5-5
1.5.7.b Differential and Restraint Current Metering Test ................................................ 1.5-6
1.5.7.c Voltage Metering Test (if the Model contains DBP-A) ........................................ 1.5-6
1.5.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the DBC Central Unit and DBP type bays. For "V" type
(DRV or DCV) bays, refer to the applicable manual.
1.5.2 General
Improper handling of electrical equipment is extremely dangerous. Therefore, only skilled and
qualified personnel familiar with appropriate safety procedures and precautions should work
with this equipment. Damage to equipment and injury to personnel can result when proper
safety precautions are not followed.
The following general safety precautions are provided as a reminder:
• High magnitude voltages are present in Power Supply and metering circuits even
after equipment has been disconnected.
• Equipment should be solidly grounded before handling or operating.
• Under no circumstances should the operating limits of the equipment be exceeded
(power supply voltage, current, etc.).
• The power supply voltage should be disconnected from the equipment before
extracting or inserting any module; otherwise damage may result.
1.5.3 Accuracy
The accuracy of the measuring instruments and test source signals (auxiliary power supply
voltage, AC currents and AC voltages) is key in electrical testing. Therefore, the information
specified in the Technical Data section (2.1) of this manual can only be reasonably verified with
test equipment under normal reference conditions and with the tolerances indicated in the UNE
21-136 and IEC 255 standards in addition to using precision instruments.
It is extremely important that there be little or no distortion (<2%) in the test source signals as
harmonics can affect internal measuring of the equipment. For example, distortions will affect
this IED, made up of non-linear elements, differently from an AC ammeter, because the
measurement is made differently in both cases.
It must be emphasized that the accuracy of the test will depend on the instruments used for
measuring as well as the source signals used. Therefore, tests performed with secondary
equipment should focus on operation verification and not on measuring accuracy.
1.5-2
BDBN0901A
1.5.4 Installation
• Location
The place where the equipment is installed must fulfill some minimum requirements, not only to
guarantee correct operation and the maximum duration of useful life, but also to facilitate
placing the unit in service and performing necessary maintenance. These minimum
requirements are the following:
• Absence of dust • Absence of vibration • Easy access

• Absence of humidity • Good lighting • Horizontal mounting
Installation should be accomplished in accordance with the dimension diagrams.

• Connections
The B1 (Central Unit) and the C1 (Bay Unit) terminals must be connected to ground so that the
filter circuits can operate. The cable used for this connection should be 14 AWG stranded wire,
with a minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2. The length of the connection to ground should be as
short as possible, but not more than 75 inches (30 cm). In addition, the ground terminal of the
case, located on the rear of the unit, should be connected to ground.
1.5.5 Preliminary Inspection

The following equipment aspects should be examined:
• The unit is in good physical condition, mechanical parts are securely attached and no
assembly screws are missing.
• The unit model number and specifications agree with the equipment order.
1.5.6 Isolation Test

While testing for isolation of switchgear and external wiring, the IED must be disconnected to
avoid damage in case the test is not performed properly or if there are shorts in the harness,
since the manufacturer has performed isolation testing on 100% of the units.
1.5.6.a DBC Central Unit

• Common Mode
Wire all the terminals of the unit together except B1 and all those that already have a wire
connected (connections between external units and internal drivers), and apply 2000 Vac,
during 1 min between this set of terminals and the metal enclosure.
1.5-3
BDBN0901A
• Between groups
Group the following terminals and apply 2,000 Vac, during 1 minute, between each pair of
groups listed.
Central Unit
B7 - B8 - B9 - B10
B11 - B12 - B13 - B14
A7 - A8 - A9 - A10 - A11 - A12 - A13 - A14 - A15 - A16 - A17 - A18 - A19 - A20
A1 - A2 - A3 - A4 - A5 - A6 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B15 - B16 - B17 - B18 - B19 - B20
B2 - B3
1.5.6.b DBP Type Bay Units

Before proceeding with the test, place the jumper (J1, J2, J5 and J6) in the power supply
module in NO.
• Common Mode
Wire all the bay IED terminals together except C1 and all those that already have a wire
connected (connections between external units and internal drivers), and apply 2,000 Vac,
during 1 min between this set of terminals and the metal enclosure.
• Between groups
Group the following terminals:
Line Bay
A1 - A2
A3 - A4
A5 - A6
C7 - C8 - C9 - C10
C11 - C12 - C13 - C14
B7 - B8 - B9 - B10 - B11 - B12 - B13 - B14 - B15 - B16 - B17 - B18 - B19 - B20 - B21 - B22 - B23 - B24
B1 - B2 - B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - C4 - C5 - C6 - C15 - C16 - C17 - C18 - C19 - C20 - C21 - C22 - C23 - C24
C2 - C3
Apply 2,000 Vac during 1 min, between each pair of numbered groups.
There are internal capacitors that can generate high voltage if the test
points for the insulation test are removed without reducing the test
voltage.
1.5-4
BDBN0901A
1.5.6.c Verification of the DBC and DBP Power Supply

Connect the power supply to the system as indicated in the following table.
The terminals indicated correspond to a DBC Central Unit and to a DBP Bay with one I/O
module.
Unit Vdc. CON 1P CON 2P

DBC B3 (+) / B2 (-) B4 - B6 B4 - B5
DBP C3 (+) / C2 (-) C6 - C4 C6 - C5
The terminals indicated in the next table correspond to a DBC Central Unit and to a DBP Bay
with two I/O modules.
Unit Vdc. CON1P CON2P

DBC (1st module) B3 (+) / B2 (-) B4 - B6 B4 - B5
DBC (2nd module) D4 - D6 D4 - D5
DBP (1st module) C3 (+) / C2 (-) C6 - C4 C6 - C5
DBP (2nd module) F6 - F4 F6 - F5
Check that when the units have no power supply, the contacts designated by CON2P of the
preceding table are closed and those designated by CON1P are open. Then power up the unit
to central DBC at its rated voltage and check that the contacts designated CON1P and CON2P
must change state and the “In Service” LED must light up. Then power up the IED and check
that its contacts designated by CON1P and CON2P change state and the “In Service” LED
illuminates.
1.5.7 Metering Tests

To check the various metering units, in each test, deactivate those that are not being tested to
avoid trips. All transformer ratios will be set to one.
1.5.7.a DBP-B Type Bays Current Metering Test

This test is run for each of the system's line bays (DBP-B). For this test, disable the "cut-out" of
the injection of current by the breaker.
If DBP-B rated current is 5 A, apply the currents indicated in Table 1.5-1 to each of the phases
and check the following measurements:
Table 1.5-1: Current Metering Test (In = 5A)

Applied Current Measured Value
0.5 Aac 0.485 - 0.515 Aac
5 Aac 4.85 - 5.15 Aac
20 Aac 19.4 - 20.6 Aac
The current value of 20 Aac is not applied longer than 8 seconds.
1.5-5
BDBN0901A
If DBP-B rated current is 1 A, apply the currents indicated in Table 1.5-2 to each of the phases
and check the following measurements:
Table 1.5-2: Current Metering Test (In = 1A)

Applied Current Measured Value
0.3 Aac 0.291 - 0.309 Aac
1 Aac 0.97 - 1.03 Aac
5 Aac 4.85 - 5.15 Aac
For DBN models 11 and 12, apart from current RMS checks, bay phase angles can be checked
in the ZIVercomPlus® status screen and in the bay information screen of the DBC display.
Apply current to three phases of two bays and check that the reference angle is that of the
current injected into phase A of the first bay linked to the DBC (bay phase angle reference is
taken from the first phase with current flow).
1.5.7.b Differential and Restraint Current Metering Test

Put only two bays into service and connect that two bays (through Bus setting or through Digital
Inputs) to bus 1. Maintaining the two in phase, apply rated current in phase A of each of them.
Check that the differential current and the restraint current are similar and have an approximate
value 2 times that of the current applied. Repeat the test connecting both currents in phase
reverse configuration. Check that the restraint current is the same as the preceding one and
that the differential current value is zero. Repeat the test for phases B and C and for each bus.
1.5.7.c Voltage Metering Test (if the Model contains DBP-A)

Apply the voltages indicated in Table 1.5-3 for each phase and check that the measurements
fall within the values indicated:
Table 1.5-3: Voltage Metering Test

Applied Voltage Measured Value
10 Vac 9.7 – 10.3 Vac
100 Vac 97 - 103 Vac
220 Vac 213.4 – 226.6 Vac
1.5-6
BDBN0901A
Chapter 2
Technical
Specifications
and Physical
Description
Contents
2.1 Technical Data

2.2 Standards and Type Tests
2.3 Physical Architecture
2.1 Technical
Data

2.1.1 Power Supply Voltage ............................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.2 Power Supply Burden .............................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.3 Current Analog Inputs .............................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.4 Voltage Analog Inputs .............................................................................................. 2.1-2
2.1.5 DBP Type Bay Measurement Accuracy .................................................................. 2.1-3
2.1.6 “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay Measurement Accuracy ............................................. 2.1-3
2.1.7 Repeatability ............................................................................................................ 2.1-3
2.1.8 Digital Inputs ............................................................................................................ 2.1-3
2.1.9 Trip Outputs ............................................................................................................. 2.1-4
2.1.11 Communications Link............................................................................................... 2.1-5
2.1.1 Power Supply Voltage
DBN Systems have three types of auxiliary power supplies (for the DBC and for DBP type
bay units). Depending on the model, their values are selectable:
24 - 48Vdc (±20%)
110 - 125Vdc (±20%)
220 - 250Vdc (±20%)
Note: In case of power supply failure, a maximum interruption of 100 ms is allowed for 110 Vdc input.
For "V" type (DRV or DCV) current bays, refer to the applicable manual.
2.1.2 Power Supply Burden
DBC
Quiescent 15 W
Maximum 30 W
DBP
Quiescent 4W
Maximum 10 W
2.1.3 Current Analog Inputs
Nominal value In = 5A or 1A (depending on model)

Thermal withstand capability 4 In (continuously)
50 In (for 3s)
100 In (for 1s)
Dynamic limit 240 In
Current circuit burden In = 5A <0.2VA
In = 1A <0.05VA
2.1.4 Voltage Analog Inputs
Phase-Ground voltage nominal value (Un) 110/√3 V, 50 Hz

Thermal withstand capability 2 Un continuously (phases)
3.6 Un for 10 s
Voltage circuit burden Un = 110 V < 0.5 VA
2.1-2
BDBN0901A
2.1 Technical Data
2.1.5 DBP Type Bay Measurement Accuracy
Current (range: from 0.1 In to 4 In) ±2% or <20 mA (the greater)
Voltage (range: from 0.1 Un to 1.2 Un) ±2%
2.1.6 “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay Measurement Accuracy

2.1.7 Repeatability
Operating time 2 % oor25 ms (the greater)
Eight (8) Digital Inputs in the DBP type bay units and seven (7) in the Central Unit. All of them
electrically separate and programmable contacts.
Input Voltage Range (depending on model)

24 - 125 Vdc ±20%
24 - 125 Vdc ±20%
48 - 250 Vdc ±20%
Current Drain <5 mA
Optional expansion modules available provide an additional eight (8) Digital Inputs in the DBP
type bay units and seven (7) in the Central Unit.
2.1-3
BDBN0901A
2.1.9 Trip Outputs
Two relays with two electrically separate trip contacts are provided in both the Central Unit
and each DBP type bay unit with the following limits:
I DC maximum limit (with resistive load) 30 A for 1 s

I DC continuous service (with resistive load) 8A
Close 2500 W
Breaking capability (with resistive load) 150 W -max. 8 A- (48 Vdc)
55 W (80 Vdc - 250 Vdc)
1250 VA
Break (L/R = 0.04 s) 60 W at 125 Vdc
Switching voltage 250 Vdc
Optional expansion modules available provide an additional four (4) Trip Contacts.
Seven (7) Auxiliary Contact Outputs in each DBP type bay unit and six (6) in the Central Unit.
All of them electrically separate contacts with the following limits:
I DC maximum limit (with resistive load) 5 A for 30 s

I DC continuous service (with resistive load) 3A
Close 2000 W
Breaking capability (with resistive load) 75 W -max. 3A- (48 Vdc)
40 W (80 Vdc - 250 Vdc)
1000 VA
Break (L/R = 0.04 s) 20 W at 125 Vdc
Switching voltage 250 Vdc
Optional expansion modules available provide an additional eight (8) Auxiliary Contact
Outputs in the DBP type bay units and six (6) in the Central Unit.
2.1-4
BDBN0901A
2.1 Technical Data
2.1.11 Communications Link
Communications Features
The Central Unit is provided with 32 pairs of GFO connectors (ST) for communications with
peripheral devices, one DB9 connector at the front for the local communications port and
two rear ports for remote communications that can be Fiber Optic (Glass -ST or SMA- or
Plastic), RS232, RS485 or RJ45 for Ethernet, according to model (see 1.4, Model
Selection). In some DBC models, there is an IEC 61850 communications card with two
ports that can be: both RJ45, both ST or one port RJ45 and the other MTRJ.
The DBP type bay units include a DB9 connector on the front for local communications and
a pair of ST type Glass Fiber Optic connectors for communications with the Central Unit.
Glass Fiber Optic maximum recommended length is 250 m (taking into account that for
lengths above 100 m using fiber optic type 62.5/125 is a must minimizing the number of
connections between fibers).
“V” type (DRV or DCV) bay units are provided with a front connector DB9 related only to
local bay communications and their functions (not related to the rest of differential busbar
protection bays).
For more details on communications links to "V" type (DRV or DCV) bays, refer to the
applicable manual.
Glass Fiber Optics (DBC Remote Ports)
Type Multimode
Wavelength 820 nm
Connector ST
Transmitter Minimum Power
50/125 Fiber - 20 dBm
62.5/125 Fiber - 17 dBm
100/140 Fiber - 7dBm
Receiver Sensitivity - 25.4 dBm
Plastic Fiber Optics (1 mm) (DBC Remote Ports)
Wavelength 660 nm
Transmitter Minimum Power - 16 dBm
Receiver Sensitivity - 39 dBm
RS485 Port Signals (DBC Remote Ports)
Used signals Pin 1 - (B) TX+ / RX+

Pin 3 - (A) TX- / RX-
2.1-5
BDBN0901A
RS232C Port Signals
DB-9 (9-pin) Front Port Connector

Pin 5 - GND
Pin 2 - RXD
Pin 3 - TXD
Central Unit Communications

Terminal Address Any
Baud rate Programmable
Bits 8
Stop Bits Programmable
Parity Programmable
DBP Type Bays Communications

Terminal Address Any
Baud rate 4800 bauds
Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Parity Even
“V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bays Communications

Front connector DB9 related only to local bay communications and their functions (not
related to the rest of Bus Differential Protection bays)
For more details on "V" type (DRV or DCV) current bays, refer to the applicable manual.
IRIG-B 123 for DBC

B:100pps
1: Amplitude modulated wave
2: 1kHz / 1ms
3: BCD, SBS
Type BNC connector

Input impedance 50 Ω or 600 Ω (600 Ω by default)
Maximum input voltage 10 V
Glass Fiber Optics (LAN Ports for IEC 61850) for DBC
Type Multimode
Wavelength 1300 nm
Connector MT-RJ
50/125 Fiber - 23.5 dBm
62.5/125 Fiber - 20 dBm
2.1-6
BDBN0901A
2.1 Technical Data
RJ45 Port Signals (DBC Remote Ports and LAN Ports) for DBC
Used signals Pin 1 - TX+

Pin 2 - TX-
Pin 3 - RX+
Pin 4 - N/C
Pin 5 - N/C
Pin 6 - RX-
Pin 7 - N/C
Pin 8 - N/C
Glass Fiber Optics (LAN Ports for IEC 61850) for DBC
Type Multimode
Wavelength 1300 nm
Connector ST
50/125 Fiber - 23.5 dBm
62.5/125 Fiber - 20 dBm
2.1-7
BDBN0901A
2.1-8
BDBN0901A
2.2 Standards and
Type Tests

2.2.1 Insulation .................................................................................................................. 2.2-2
2.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................. 2.2-2
2.2.3 Environmental Test .................................................................................................. 2.2-3
2.2.4 Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 2.2-3
2.2.5 Mechanical Test ....................................................................................................... 2.2-3
The DBC and DBP equipment satisfies the standards indicated below. For "V" type (DRV or
DCV) current bays, refer to the applicable manual. When not specified, the standard is UNE 21-
136 (IEC-255).
2.2.1 Insulation
Insulation Test IEC-255-5

Between all circuit terminals and ground 2 kV, 50 Hz, for 1m
Between all circuit terminals 2 kV, 50 Hz, for 1m
Voltage Impulse Test IEC -255-5 (UNE 21-136-83/ 5)

5 kV; 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J
Surge Immunity Test IEC-1000-4-5 Class IV

4 kV
2.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility
1 MHz Burst Test IEC-255-22-1 Class III

(UNE 21-136-92/22-1)
Common mode 2.5kV
Differential mode 1.0kV
Fast Transient Disturbance Test IEC-255-22-4 Class IV

(UNE 21-136-92/22-4) (IEC 1000-4-4)
4 kV ±10 %
Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance IEC 1000-4-3

Amplitude modulated (EN 50140)10 V/m
Pulse modulated (EN 50204)10 V/m
Conducted Electromagnetic Field Disturbance EN 50141

Amplitude modulated 10 V
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 255-22-2 Class IV

(UNE 21-136-92/22-2) (IEC 1000-4-2)
15 kV ±10 %
50 Hz Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-8 (1993)
Radio Frequency Emissivity EN 55011 (IEC 1000-4-6)
2.2-2
BDBN0901A
2.2 Standards and Type Tests
2.2.3 Environmental Test
Temperature IEC 255-6

Operating range From -10 ºC to +55 ºC
Storage range From -25 ºC to +70 ºC
Humidity 95 % (non-condensing)
2.2.4 Power Supply
Power Supply Interference and Ripple IEC 255-11 / UNE 21-136-83 (11)
< 20 %
2.2.5 Mechanical Test
Vibration (sinusoidal) IEC-255-21-1 Class I

Mechanical Shock and Bump Test IEC-255-21-2 Class I
The DBN models comply with the EEC 89/336 standard of electromagnetic compatibility.
2.2-3
BDBN0901A
2.2-4
BDBN0901A
2.3 Physical
Architecture

2.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 2.3-2
2.3.2 General .................................................................................................................... 2.3-2
2.3.3 Dimensions .............................................................................................................. 2.3-6
2.3.4 Connection Elements ............................................................................................... 2.3-6
2.3.4.a Terminal Blocks .................................................................................................. 2.3-6
2.3.4.b Plug-in Connectors (Non Self-shorting) .............................................................. 2.3-6
2.3.4.c Removing Printed Circuit Boards (Non Self-shorting) ........................................ 2.3-6
2.3.4.d Internal Wiring ..................................................................................................... 2.3-6
2.3.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the DBC Central Unit and DBP type bays. For "V" type
(DRV or DCV) current bays, refer to the applicable manual.
2.3.2 General
DBN Systems are made up of a Central Unit, up to 28 Bay Units and up to 4 Bus Voltage Bay
Units.
• Central Unit (DBC)
The Central Unit it is basically composed of three boards:
• One board housing the following functions:

- Power Supply.
- Digital inputs and outputs: two trip relays, 7 digital inputs, 6 auxiliary outputs and an “in
service” indication output.
- Processing module.
- 2 remote communications ports.
- 4 Communication channels for the Voltage Bays (optional)
- An IRIG-B 123 synchronization interface (optional)
- 14 communication channels for the Line Bays.
This minimum equipment can be expanded with:
• An expansion board with the following elements; two trip relays, 7 digital inputs, 6
auxiliary outputs and an “In Service” indication output.
• A board with another 14 communication channels for the Line Bays.
• An IEC 61850 communications card that includes two ports (optional).
On the front of the Central Unit is the graphic display, the numeric and functional keypads and
the local communication port.
• DBP Type Bay Units
Line Bay Units are made up basically of two boards

- Processing Module.
- Power Supply.
- Analog Inputs; one per phase.
- Digital inputs and outputs; 8 digital inputs, 7 auxiliary outputs and an “In Service”
indication output.
- 2 trip and close outputs (each with 2 contacts): the trip output has two N.O. contacts
and the Lockout signal output has an N.O. contact and an N.C. contact.
The front of the Units has a functional keypad and a local communication port. This
configuration can be expanded by adding a module with 8 inputs, 7 auxiliary outputs and 2 trip
and close outputs, each of them with two N.O. contacts configured by default with the Trip
signal, but one of these outputs can be configured with the Retrip signal through the Retrip
Output Relay setting.
2.3-2
BDBN0901A
• Voltage Bay Units

The Voltage Bay Units have the same architecture as the Line Bay Units. The only difference is
that, in this case, the analog inputs are voltages.
• DBC and DPB External Appearance
Depending on the terminal configuration, all the contact inputs / outputs may be used or some
may remain as spare signals.
Figure 2.3.1 shows the external appearance of the Central Unit and figure 2.3.2 shows the Line
or Bus Voltage Bay Units.
Figure 2.3.1: Front of the Central Unit.
Figure 2.3.2: Front of the Bay Units.
2.3-3
BDBN0901A
• DBC Connectors
The connectors for each of the boards are on the back of the unit.
The number of Central Unit connectors depends on the number of inputs and outputs and on
the number of Bays. The lay-out of the connectors is as shown in Figures 2.3.3 and 2.3.4,
depending on whether it has IRIG-B 123 synchronization or not.
Figure 2.3.3: Rear of the Central Unit.
Figure 2.3.4: Rear of the Central Unit with IRIG-B 123 Synchronization.
2.3-4
BDBN0901A
In DBC Models with an IEC 61850 communications card, the rear of the Central Unit is as
shown in the following figure (in this figure, both ports of this communications card are Glass
Fiber Optics -ST- type).
Figure 2.3.5: Rear of the Central Unit with IEC 61850 Communications Board.
• Connectors of DBP Type Bay Units

The number of Bay Unit connectors depends on the number of digital inputs and outputs. The
lay out of the connectors is as shown in Figure 2.3.5.
Figure 2.3.6: Rear of the Bay Unit.
2.3-5
BDBN0901A
2.3.3 Dimensions
Depending on the model, the units are mounted as follows:
• Central Unit: 19"-rack enclosures, 4-units high.

• DBP type bay units: 19"-rack enclosures, 2-units high.
The equipments are intended to be installed either semi-flush mounted on panels or inside a 19”
rack. They are equipped with a transparent cover which can be sealed for security purposes.
The enclosure is painted graphite gray.
2.3.4 Connection Elements

2.3.4.a Terminal Blocks
The terminal blocks are arranged differently depending on the model
• Central Unit
- Terminal Connectors positioned horizontally.
- Terminals arrangement in rows: 2 rows of 2 Terminal Connectors per row with 20
Terminals each (80 Terminals) for the digital inputs and outputs.
The Terminals can take wire up to #14 AWG. The unit has communications connectors on the
front panel as well as on the back.
• DBP Type Bay Units
- Terminal Connectors positioned horizontally.
- Terminals arrangement in rows: 1 row with 2 Terminal Connectors with 24 Terminals
each (48 Terminals) for the digital inputs and outputs and 1 terminal connector with 10
terminals for metering the CTs and the VTs.
The Current and Voltage Analog Input Terminals accept wire up to #11 AWG. The remaining
circuit terminals permit wire up to #14 AWG.
The unit has communications connectors on the front panel as well as on the back. The rear
connectors are for communicating with the Central Unit. To communicate with the ZiverCom®,
connect through the front port.
2.3.4.b Plug-in Connectors (Non Self-shorting)

The current circuits continuously support 4xIn.
2.3.4.c Removing Printed Circuit Boards (Non Self-shorting)

The IED's printed circuit board can be taken out. WARNING: the current connector is non
self-shorting. Consequently, the CT secondaries must be short-circuited externally
before board removal.
The printed circuit board is attached to the case with self-tapping screws. These screws must
be removed before the board is withdrawn. This operation always requires the protection to be
not in service.
2.3.4.d Internal Wiring

The equipment uses traditional printed circuit board connections and internal buses to minimize
internal wiring.
2.3-6
BDBN0901A
Chapter 3
Functions and
Description of
Operation
Contents
3.1 Trip and Operation Principles

3.2 Protection Functions in the DBN Central Unit
3.3 Current Bay Functions
3.4 Voltage Bay Functions
3.5 DBN Central Unit Logic
3.6 DBN Current Bay Logic
3.7 Configuration Settings
3.8 General Settings
3.9 Change Settings Group
3.10 Event Record
3.11 Oscillographic Recording
3.12 Inputs, Outputs & LED Targets
3.13 Communications
3.14 Alarm Codes
3.1 Trip and Operation
Principles

3.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3.1-2
3.1.2 Trip Logic of one Bus ............................................................................................... 3.1-4
3.1.3 Trip Logic of the Bus by Differential Unit ................................................................. 3.1-5
3.1.3.a Bus Differential Trip Blocking.............................................................................. 3.1-6
3.1.4 Trip Logic of the Bus by Breaker Failure ................................................................. 3.1-7
3.1.4.a Bus Trip Blocking by Breaker Failure ................................................................. 3.1-7
3.1.5 Trip Logic of the Bus by Digital Input ....................................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.5.a Bus Trip Blocking by Digital Input ....................................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.6 Trip Logic of the Current Bay ................................................................................... 3.1-8
3.1.6.a Trip Limit Time (T7) ............................................................................................ 3.1-8
3.1.6.b Trip Reset Time (T5)........................................................................................... 3.1-9
3.1.6.c Issues to be Considered ..................................................................................... 3.1-9
3.1.7 Setting Ranges affecting Current Bay Tripping ..................................................... 3.1-11
3.1.8 Possible HMI Operations ....................................................................................... 3.1-12
3.1.8.a DBN Models 10 and 11..................................................................................... 3.1-12
3.1.8.b DBN Model 12 .................................................................................................. 3.1-12
3.1.9 Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................... 3.1-14
3.1.9.a Digital Inputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking ........................................... 3.1-14
3.1.9.b Digital Inputs of the BF Trip and of the Sealed BF Reset................................. 3.1-14
3.1.9.c Digital Inputs of the Buses Trip ......................................................................... 3.1-15
3.1.9.d Digital Inputs Affecting Current Bay Tripping.................................................... 3.1-15
3.1.10 Auxiliary Outputs and Events................................................................................. 3.1-16
3.1.10.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Buses Trip ............................................... 3.1-16
3.1.10.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking .................. 3.1-17
3.1.10.c Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Supervision .......................................... 3.1-18
3.1.10.d Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the BF Trip and BF Trip Blocking .................. 3.1-19
3.1.10.e Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Bay Trip ................................................... 3.1-20
3.1.1 Introduction
DBN bus protection systems consist of a central unit (DBC) and a given number of current bays
(and, as an option, bus voltage bays).
DBN bus protection systems can protect substations of up to 4 or 5 busbars (depending on

model) with different configurations thanks to their programmable logic and up to 28 current
bays.
The exchange of information required for bus protection is carried out linking each bay to the
DBC through glass fiber optic, so that protection bay numbers are assigned as a function of the
DBC fiber optic connector to which the bay is connected.
Bus protection consists of the following units:
- Percentage Restraint Differential Unit (all busbars).

- Differential Supervision Unit.
- Differential Alarm Unit (all busbars).
- Minimum Bus Voltage Supervision Unit (optional depending on model).
- Breaker Failure Unit (with Retrip Function).
- Current Supervision Unit for bay tripping caused by breaker failure bus trip.
- Current Supervision Unit for bay tripping caused by bus differential trip.
- Tie Blind Spot Unit.
- Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and Remote End Trip Unit.
Bay connection to different busbars is carried out through settings or disconnect switch status
inputs.
Figure 3.1.1 shows schematically the differential bus trip operation. The operation is similar for
all phases. Note that the process starts capturing data measured by current bays (in a
synchronized way in all of them). These data are transferred to the Central Unit. There, all data
measured by all bus current bays are combined and bus differential and restraint current
measurements are obtained. Said currents are bus differential element data that will activate the
element on internal fault condition, tripping the bus if:
- No differential bus blocking occurs and

- the Differential Supervision Unit enables it and
- the bus voltage supervision enables it (optional depending on model).
3.1-2
BDBN0901A
The Differential Supervision Unit controls all busbars, as it considers differential and restraint
currents obtained from the currents measured in all enabled substation bays (excluding links).
Bus undervoltage trip supervision is carried out through bus voltage measured by the Voltage
Bay.
Bus Differential Alarm Unit data are the bus differential and restraint currents. The unit
activation can block the differential bus trip.
In case of activation of the differential trip, the trip generation logic sends the bus trip
(differential trip) signal to all current bays linked to the bus.
A last overcurrent trip supervision (50 supervision of differential trip unit) can be enabled in the
current bay, so that bay tripping only occurs in lines with current flow above the set level.
Figure 3.1.1: Bus Differential Protection Block Diagram.
Figure 3.1.1 shows that every current bay features a Breaker Failure Unit. If a breaker failure is
detected in any bus bay, a signal is sent to the Central Unit, which, through the trip logic, will
send a bus trip signal (by breaker failure) to all bays linked to the applicable busbar. A last
overcurrent trip supervision (50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit) can be enabled in the
current bay, so that bay tripping only occurs in lines with current flow above the set level.
3.1-3
BDBN0901A
3.1.2 Trip Logic of one Bus

Following notation is used in following figures:
- “n”: Current Bay number that may be from 1 to 28.

- “X”: Bus number that may be from 1 to 4 (or 5, depending on the model).
- “m”: Phase (A, B or C).
Trip Logic of the Bus X is represented in figure 3.1.2, the trip being activated by one of three
following signals:
- Bus “X” trip by Digital Input.

- Bus “X” trip by Breaker Failure.
- Bus “X” trip by Differential Unit.
Bus “X” trip by Digital Input is produced when the applicable trip input is activated, provided the
trip blocking of that bus is not active by breaker failure or digital input.
Bus “X” trip by Breaker Failure is produced when failure of a breaker of an enabled bay
connected to the “X” bus is activated, provided the trip blocking of that bus is not active by
breaker failure or digital input.
Bus “X” trip by Differential Unit is produced when the Differential Unit of the applicable bus is
activated, provided the differential trip blocking of that bus is not active.
Figure 3.1.2: Trip Logic of the Bus X.
3.1-4
BDBN0901A
3.1.3 Trip Logic of the Bus by Differential Unit

The Trip Logic of the Bus X by Differential Unit schematic is represented in figure 3.1.3.
Figure 3.1.3: Bus Differential Trip Logic.
As shown in figure 3.1.3, a differential bus trip is produced on the following conditions (at least
in one phase):
- Main Differential Unit activated.

- Differential Supervision Unit activated if the differential bus trip supervision is enabled. If
the differential bus trip supervision is disabled, the Differential Supervision Unit keeps
enabled (signaling always operative) but with no influence in bus tripping.
- If the DBN model features voltage supervision, the applicable bus Undervoltage Unit
must be activated.
- Differential bus trip block deactivated.
3.1-5
BDBN0901A
3.1.3.a Bus Differential Trip Blocking

The Differential Unit Bus Trip may be blocked for a number of reasons:
- When communication between the DBC and an enabled bay (i.e. due to optical fiber
failure) is lost, block of the differential tripping of the four busses occur (signalized as
COM in the Status) and the four busses reduce to a single bus.
- A Bus Differential Trip Blocking occurs when the Differential Alarm of the applicable bus
is activated (labeled ALR in Status) in case the 87 Blocking by Differential Alarm is set
to YES.
- If the Disagreement Blocking is enabled via setting (logic), and the Differential
Supervision Unit is activated, the Main Differential Unit not activating within a time
setting, causes Differential Trip Block by Disagreement activation in the four busbars
(labeled DIS in Status).
- The user may block (and unblock) the Differential Trip of each bus independently from
the other busses via a Digital Input, via a DBC Keyboard Operation or via a
Communications: through local or remote, front or back communication (ENT in the
Status).
- Hardware problems (communication failure between DSPs) will also cause the
activation of the four busses Differential Trip Blocking. (signalized as HDW in the
Status).
- Activation of a closed (or unknown) bypass disconnecting switch in a bay connected to
a bus activates the Differential Trip Blocking of this bus (BYP in the Status)
- In case of Transfer Logic Differential Trip Block (labeled TRN in Status). For more
details, see section transfer bus logic.
Some differential trip blockings reset automatically when trigger conditions reset, whereas other
differential blockings, when activated, remain until they are reset by the user (via keyboard, front
port or remote communications) or via digital input. The following table shows which differential
blockings must be reset by the user and which are reset automatically.
Automatically reset differential blockings User reset differential blockings

(when trigger conditions reset)
TI bypass (BYP) differential blocking Disagreement (DIS) differential blocking
Hardware problem (HDW) differential Communications failure (COM) differential
blocking blocking
Transfer logic (TRN) differential blocking Differential alarm (ALR) differential blocking
Command or digital input (ENT) differential
blocking
3.1-6
BDBN0901A
3.1.4 Trip Logic of the Bus by Breaker Failure

The Trip Logic of the Bus X by Breaker Failure schematic is represented in figure 3.1.4.
Figure 3.1.4: Trip Logic of the Bus by BF.
Breaker failure tripping of a bus X occurs when there is no breaker failure or digital input trip
block of said busbar and the breaker failure output of one bay connected to said busbar
activates provided the bay is enabled and linked to the DBC.
3.1.4.a Bus Trip Blocking by Breaker Failure

Breaker failure bus trip block can only be activated and deactivated by the user. This blocking
can be carried out by a digital input or command through the DBC keyboard or via front or rear
port communications.
Said blocking is linked to digital input bus trip block.
3.1.5 Trip Logic of the Bus by Digital Input

The Trip Logic of the Bus X by Digital Input schematic is represented in figure 3.1.5.
Figure 3.1.5: Trip Logic of the Bus by Digital Input.
Digital input tripping of a bus X occurs when there is no breaker failure or digital input trip block
of said busbar and the user activates the DCB digital input corresponding to the tripping of this
busbar.
3.1.5.a Bus Trip Blocking by Digital Input

Digital input bus trip block can only be activated and deactivated by the user. This block can be
carried out by a digital input or command through the DBC keyboard or via front or rear port
communications.
Said block is linked to breaker failure bus trip block.
3.1-7
BDBN0901A
3.1.6 Trip Logic of the Current Bay

Figure 3.1.6 shows in detail the tripping logic of a DBP type bay “n” linked to the Central Unit
and connected to busbar “X”:
Figure 3.1.6: Trip Logic of the DBP Type Bay.
Similarly, there exists a figure of "V" type (DRV or DCV) bay trip logic in the applicable manual.
Bay tripping cannot occur if the bay tripping block digital input is activated. Nor a disabled bay
can be tripped.
Tripping of a bay connected to busbar X can occur as a result of a bus trip on any of three
possible causes (differential bus element activation, bus breaker failure activation or digital input
bus trip). If bus trip is caused by the Breaker Failure Unit or by the Differential Unit, the bay
tripping can be supervised by the corresponding 50 supervision unit (50 Supervision of BF Trip
and 50 Supervision of 87 Trip, respectively).
The duration of the bay tripping signal varies as a function of the duration of the fault conditions
and the trip Reset Time setting, but can never exceed the set trip limit time.
3.1.6.a Trip Limit Time (T7)

Retrip (RETRIP, RETRIP_R, RETRIP_S, RETRIP_T, RETRIP_RST) and bay tripping (TRIP,
TRIP_DIFF and TRIP_BF) signals cannot be active for a time exceeding the set Trip Limit
Time (see DBC General Settings) and, therefore, they deactivate when this time is reached if
activation conditions remain until then (as a general rule they reset before reaching this limit).
3.1-8
BDBN0901A
3.1.6.b Trip Reset Time (T5)

Retrip and bay tripping signal reset time guarantees a minimum signal activation time.
Retrip and bay tripping signal reset time is only considered if activation conditions disappear
before the Trip Limit Time times out, as if this limit is reached under activation conditions, the
reset is instantaneous.
The reset time of all retrip and bay tripping signals can be set through Trip Reset Time (see
DBC General Settings).
3.1.6.c Issues to be Considered

When communication between a DBC and an enabled Bay (Voltage or Current Bay connected
to a bus or not) is lost, e.g., due to failed optical fiber, Blocking 87 of four busses occurs and
all busses are reduced to a single bus in bus 1, but the breaker failure bus trip is not blocked. If
a breaker failure activation occurs in the bay for which communication with the DBC is lost, this
signal cannot be transmitted to the DBC so that this cannot produce a breaker failure single bus
trip and therefore, the breaker failure trip of the faulted bay is not transmitted to the rest of bays.
But if the breaker failure is produced in a bay with correct communication with a DBC, all bays
will trip (provided they are enabled and connected to any bus, as there is a single bay, the
current of which exceeds the setting of the overcurrent unit for the trip supervision by breaker
failure of a bay), except for bay with no communication with a DBC (in this bay the breaker must
be opened via line protection) and those bays not enabled or are being enabled are not
connected to any bus.
Figure 3.1.7 schematically shows the philosophy of this section, considering that the Breaker
Failure unit is enabled for bays 1 to N and any of these bays may not be ready (shown in Figure
3.1.7 as NO_OP) for a bus Breaker Failure trip on account of any of the following reasons:
- Bay Enable setting.

- Activation of the bay disable digital input
- Activation of the Bay Disable by Dynamic Zone Logic.
- By disconnecting switches status inputs meaning bus disconnection.
Although figure 3.1.7 does not show it (as shown in figure 3.1.6), in case the 50 Supervision of
Breaker Failure Trip Unit is enabled, BF bay tripping can only occur if said element is activated.
Figure 3.1.7 neither shows the bay tripping block input (do consider this input is not activated).
Also, to simplify, figure 3.1.7 neither shows what has been shown in figure 3.1.4, inasmuch as
the BF bus trip can only occur if the BF or digital input bus trip is not blocked.
3.1-9
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.1.7 shows the possibility of SINGLE BUS, which can occur under the following
conditions:
- Line Bay disconnecting switches status in the process of a bay bus changing. Such as
when a double Bus for Bus 1 and 2, change to a single Bus to Bus 1.
- The single Bus via activation of the DBC digital input or command.
- If the single Bus is attained by loss of bay (enabled) communication (shown as F_COM
in figure 3.1.7) with DBC, then the single Bus implies the reduction of all four busses
to bus 1.
Figure 3.1.7: Issues to be Considered.
3.1-10
BDBN0901A
3.1.7 Setting Ranges affecting Current Bay Tripping
DBC General Settings(1 Table)

Setting Range Step By Default
Bay Trip Limit Time 10 - 1000 cycles 1 cycle 1000 cycles
Bay Trip Reset Time 2 - 20 cycles 1 cycle 3 cycles
• DBC General Setting: HMI Access
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - CENTRAL UNIT 0 - GENERAL

1 - OPERATIONS 1 - BAY #1 1 - TRANSFORMER
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - BAY #2 2 - PROTECTION
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - BAY #3 3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING
4 - INFORMATION 4 - BAY #4 4 - LOGIC
5 - BAY #5 5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY
...
0 - GENERAL 0 - IN SERVICE
1 - TRANSFORMER 1 - BUS 1
2 - PROTECTION 2 - BUS 2
3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3 - BUS 3
4 - LOGIC 4 - BUS 4
5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 - RESET TRIP TIME
6 - CURRENT FOR DISABLING
7 - TRIP TIME LIMIT
8 - NOMINAL V *
Note 1: Nominal V setting is only available when Voltage Bays are installed (DBC**B and DBC**D).
Note 2: for DBN model 12, the table above also shows BUS 5.
3.1-11
BDBN0901A
3.1.8 Possible HMI Operations

The following table shows the different operations that can be carried out from the DBC HMI,
just as they are arranged. These operations are the same that can be carried out through the
ZIVercomPlus® command menu and also the same that can be carried out through the control
communications profile with any of the implemented protocols (PROCOME, DNP3.0 or
MODBUS). See chapter 3.12 for more details.
3.1.8.a DBN Models 10 and 11
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - RESET 86
1 - OPERATIONS 1 - BLOCK 87 BUS 1
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 1
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - BLOCK 87 BUS 2
4 - INFORMATION 4 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 2
5 - BLOCK 87 BUS 3
6 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 3
7 - BLOCK 87 BUS 4
9 - BLOCK BF + DI B1
10 - UNBLOCK BF + DI B1
17 - TIE BUSES 1 AND 2
18 - SPLIT BUSES 1 AND 2
29 - RESET BREAKER FAILURE
30 - OSCILLOGRAPHY START
3.1.8.b DBN Model 12
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - BLOCKING OPERATIONS

1 - OPERATIONS 1 - UNBLOCKING OPERATIONS
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - SINGLE BUS OPERATIONS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - MISCELAN. OPERATIONS
4 - INFORMATION
3.1-12
BDBN0901A
0 - BLOCKING OPERATIONS 0 - BLOCK 87 BUS 1

1 - UNBLOCKING OPERATIONS 1 - BLOCK 87 BUS 2
2 - SINGLE BUS OPERATIONS 2 - BLOCK 87 BUS 3
3 - MISCELAN. OPERATIONS 3 - BLOCK 87 BUS 4
4 - BLOCK 87 BUS 5
0 - BLOCKING OPERATIONS 0 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 1

1 - UNBLOCKING OPERATIONS 1 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 2
2 - SINGLE BUS OPERATIONS 2 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 3
3 - MISCELAN. OPERATIONS 3 - UNBLOCK 87 BUS 4
0 - BLOCKING OPERATIONS 0 - TIE BUSES 1 AND 2

1 - UNBLOCKING OPERATIONS 1 - SPLIT BUSES 1 AND 2
2 - SINGLE BUS OPERATIONS 2 - TIE BUSES 1 AND 3
3 - MISCELAN. OPERATIONS 3 - SPLIT BUSES 1 AND 3
0 - BLOCKING OPERATIONS 0 - RESET 86

1 - UNBLOCKING OPERATIONS 1 - RESET BREAKER FAILURE
2 - SINGLE BUS OPERATIONS 2 - OSCILLOGRAPHY START
3 - MISCELAN. OPERATIONS
3.1-13
BDBN0901A

3.1.9.a Digital Inputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking
Table 3.1-1: Digital Inputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking

Name Description Function
BLK_EXT_1 External Block Bus 1 Differential
BLK_EXT_2 External Block Bus 2 Differential Contact inputs that do not
BLK_EXT_3 External Block Bus 3 Differential allow the corresponding
BLK_EXT_4 External Block Bus 4 Differential differential unit to trip the bus.
BLK_EXT_5 (*) External Block Bus 5 Differential (*)
RST_BLK_1 Unblock Bus 1 Differential
RST_BLK_2 Unblock Bus 2 Differential Resets the blocking that was
RST_BLK_3 Unblock Bus 3 Differential keeping the differential units
RST_BLK_4 Unblock Bus 4 Differential from tripping the busses.
RST_BLK_5(*) Unblock Bus 5 Differential (*)
(*) Only for DBN Models 12.
3.1.9.b Digital Inputs of the BF Trip and of the Sealed BF Reset
Table 3.1-2: Digital Inputs of the BF Trip and of the Latched BF Reset
BLK_BF_DI_B1 Bus 1 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input.
BLK_BF_DI_B2 Bus 2 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input. Trip blocking in bus #
generated by the breaker
BLK_BF_DI_B3 Bus 3 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input.
failure unit or by the trip digital
BLK_BF_DI_B4 Bus 4 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input. input from this bus #.
BLK_BF_DI_B5 (*) Bus 5 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input. (*)
RST_BLK_BF_DI_B1 Bus 1 Trip Unblocking by BF or Digital Input.
RST_BLK_BF_DI_B2 Bus 2 Trip Unblocking by BF or Digital Input. Trip unblocking in bus #
generated by the breaker
RST_BLK_BF_DI_B3 Bus 3 Trip Unblocking by BF or Digital Input.
failure unit or by the trip digital
RST_BLK_BF_DI_B4 Bus 4 Trip Unblocking by BF or Digital Input. input from this bus #.
RST_BLK_BF_DI_B5(*) Bus 5 Trip Unblocking by BF or Digital Input. (*)
RST_BF Reset Breaker Failure Level Input to reset the sealed
breaker failure bay signals
(BF_M) and DBC (BF_GLB_M,
TRIP_BF_B1_M,
TRIP_BF_B2_M, TRIP_BF_B3_M
and TRIP_BF_B4_M (and
TRIP_BF_B5M(*)).
3.1-14
BDBN0901A
3.1.9.c Digital Inputs of the Buses Trip
Table 3.1-3: Digital Inputs of the Buses Trip

D_BUS1 Bus 1 Trip
D_BUS2 Bus 2 Trip
Direct trip to corresponding
D_BUS3 Bus 3 Trip
bus.
D_BUS4 Bus 4 Trip
D_BUS5 (*) Bus 5 Trip (*)
3.1.9.d Digital Inputs Affecting Current Bay Tripping

• DBP Type Bay
Table 3.1-4: Digital Inputs Affecting Current Bay Tripping

BAY_TRIP_BLK Bay Trip Block Bay tripping (TRIP, TRIP_BF
and TRIP_DIFF) and
retripping (RETRIP,
RETRIP_R, RETRIP_S,
RETRIP_T, RETRIP_RST)
activation block level input
(applicable when the bay is
transferred owing to breaker
maintenance operations and
there is concern about the
transfer bus causing this
breaker to trip).
• “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay

For "V" type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual (Bay Trip Blocking
Input only blocks the bay trip, not the retrip).
3.1-15
BDBN0901A
3.1.10 Auxiliary Outputs and Events

3.1.10.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Buses Trip
Table 3.1-5: Auxiliary Outputs of the Buses Trip (DBC)

TRIP_BUS1 Bus 1 Protection Trip
TRIP_BUS2 Bus 2 Protection Trip Trip of the corresponding bus.
TRIP_BUS3 Bus 3 Protection Trip Deactivates when trip
TRIP_BUS4 Bus 4 Protection Trip conditions disappear.
TRIP_BUS5 (*) Bus 5 Protection Trip 5 (*)
TRIP Protection Trip At least one bus has tripped.
Table 3.1-6: Events of the Buses Trip (DBC)

Group Description
Bus 1 Trip Activated
Protection, Bus 2 Trip Activated
Blocking and Trip Bus 3 Trip Activated
Units Activation Bus 4 Trip Activated
Bus 5 Trip Activated (*)
Bus 1 Trip Deactivated
Protection, Bus 2 Trip Deactivated
Blocking and Trip Bus 3 Trip Deactivated
Units Deactivation Bus 4 Trip Deactivated
Bus 5 Trip Deactivated (*)
3.1-16
BDBN0901A
3.1.10.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Bus Differential Trip

Blocking
Table 3.1-7: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking

BLK_B1 Bus 1 Differential Unit Blocking
Blocking state of the
Differential units.
BLK_B5 (*) Bus 5 Differential Unit Blocking (*)
BLK_F_COM Block 87 by Communications Failure Shows that all four differential
units are blocked. It activates
when communications
between an enabled bay and
DBC is lost (e.g., a broken
fiber).
BLK_F_HARD Block 87 by hardware Shows that all four differential
units are blocked by hardware
failure.
BLK_F_DISC Block 87 by disagreement Shows that all four differential
units are blocked by
disagreement between the
Supervision Differential Unit
and Main Differential (see
Logic paragraph).
BLK_ALR_B1 Bus 1 Block by Differential Alarm
BLK_ALR_B2 Bus 2 Block by Differential Alarm Indication of the blocking of
the differential unit of bus # by
BLK_ALR_B3 Bus 3 Block by Differential Alarm
differential alarm activation of
BLK_ALR_B4 Bus 4 Block by Differential Alarm corresponding bus #.
BLK_ALR_B5 (*) Bus 5 Block by Differential Alarm (*)
Table 3.1-8: Events of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking

Group Description
Bus 1 Differential (87) blocking activated
Protection, Bus 2 Differential (87) blocking activated
Blocking and Trip Bus 3 Differential (87) blocking activated
Units Activation Bus 4 Differential (87) blocking activated
Bus 5 Differential (87) blocking activated (*)
Bus 1 Differential (87) blocking deactivated
Protection, Bus 2 Differential (87) blocking deactivated
Blocking and Trip Bus 3 Differential (87) blocking deactivated
Units Deactivation Bus 4 Differential (87) blocking deactivated
Bus 5 Differential (87) blocking deactivated (*)
3.1-17
BDBN0901A
3.1.10.c Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Supervision

Only for models with Voltage Bays (DBC**B and DBC**D).
Table 3.1-9: Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Supervision

S_SUBT_R1 Bus 1 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision Unit
S_SUBT_S1 Bus 1 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision Unit
S_SUBT_T1 Bus 1 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision Unit Activation of the undervoltage
S_SUBT_R2 Bus 2 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision Unit units of corresponding phase
S_SUBT_S2 Bus 2 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision Unit and bus. If undervoltage
S_SUBT_T3 Bus 2 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision Unit supervision is enabled and
supervision unit allowed, they
S_SUBT_R3 Bus 3 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision Unit must be activated for the
S_SUBT_S2 Bus 3 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision Unit differential unit to generate
S_SUBT_T3 Bus 3 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision Unit bus trips (see Voltage Bays
S_SUBT_R4 Bus 4 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision Unit Functions).
S_SUBT_S4 Bus 4 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision Unit
S_SUBT_T4 Bus 4 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision Unit
3.1-18
BDBN0901A
3.1.10.d Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the BF Trip and BF Trip

Blocking
Table 3.1-10: Auxiliary Outputs of the BF Trip and BF Trip Blocking

BLK_BF_DI_B1 Bus 1 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input
Indication of the blocking of
BLK_BF_DI_B2 Bus 2 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input the trip in bus # by the
BLK_BF_DI_B3 Bus 3 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input Breaker Failure operation or
BLK_BF_DI_B4 Bus 4 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input of the trip of this bus # by
Digital Input.
BLK_BF_DI_B5 (*) Bus 5 Trip Blocking by BF or Digital Input (*)
TRIP_BF_B1 Bus 1 BF Trip
Signals that indicate the trip of
a bus by Breaker Failure.
TRIP_BF_B5 (*) Bus 5 BF Trip (*)
TRIP_BF_B1_M Bus 1 Breaker Failure Latched Trip Signals that indicate the trip of
TRIP_BF_B2_M Bus 2 Breaker Failure Latched Trip a bus by breaker failure.
These signals remain latched
TRIP_BF_B3_M Bus 3 Breaker Failure Latched Trip
until they are reset by the
TRIP_BF_B4_M Bus 4 Breaker Failure Latched Trip breaker failure signal reset
TRIP_BF_B5_M (*) Bus 5 Breaker Failure Latched Trip (*) command or the activation of
DBC Digital Input: RST_BF.
BF_GLB_M Global Breaker Failure Latched It is an OR of activation of all
latched bus Breaker Failure
trips. This signal remains
sealed until it is reset via the
corresponding command or
via DBC Digital Input
RST_BF.
3.1-19
BDBN0901A
Table 3.1-11:Events of the Trip Blocking by BF and Latched BF Reset

Group Description
Bus 1 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
Single Bus, Bus 4 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
Lockout, Buses Bus 5 Trip Blocking by BF or DI (*)
Trip Blockings and
Unblockings, 87 Bus 1 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
Supervision. Bus 2 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
Bus 3 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
Bus 4 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
Bus 5 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI (*)
Single Bus, Global Breaker Failure Latched Reset
Lockout, Buses
Trip Blockings and
Unblockings, 87
Supervision.
3.1.10.e Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Bay Trip
Table 3.1-12: Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Current Bay Trip
TRIP_BF Trip Breaker Failure Bay trip caused by bus trip on
account of the BF.
TRIP_DIFF Differential Unit Trip Bay trip caused by bus trip on
account of the 87 unit.
TRIP Bay Trip The Bay has tripped due to
Breaker Failure as a result of
Differential Unit action or trip
of a Bus through Digital Input.
Table 3.1-13: Trip Events of the Current Bay (*)

Group Description
Activation of Bay # Trip Activated
protection units.
Deactivation of Bay # Trip Deactivated
protection units.
# = 1 to 28 (in each current bay).

®
(*) Events visualized through the DBN ZIVercomPlus . Also, if bays are "V" type (DRV or DCV), events specific
to that equipment can be retrieved in each of them through the ZIVercomPlus (refer to the applicable manual).
3.1-20
BDBN0901A
3.2 Protection
Functions in the
DBN Central Unit

3.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3.2-2
3.2.2 Main Differential Unit................................................................................................ 3.2-3
3.2.2.a Fault Start Detector............................................................................................. 3.2-4
3.2.2.b External Fault Detector ....................................................................................... 3.2-4
3.2.2.c Directional Blocking ............................................................................................ 3.2-5
3.2.2.d Differential Characteristic with Percentage Restraint ......................................... 3.2-6
3.2.3 Supervision Differential Unit .................................................................................... 3.2-7
3.2.4 Differential Alarm Unit .............................................................................................. 3.2-8
3.2.5 Settings Ranges....................................................................................................... 3.2-9
3.2.6 Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................... 3.2-14
3.2.7.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Main Differential Unit ............................... 3.2-14
3.2.7.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Supervision Differential Unit .................... 3.2-16
3.2.7.c Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Differential Alarm Units ........................... 3.2-16
3.2.8 Units Test ............................................................................................................... 3.2-18
3.2.8.a Main Differential Characteristic Test................................................................. 3.2-18
3.2.8.b Supervision Differential Characteristic Test...................................................... 3.2-20
3.2.8.c Differential Alarm Unit Test ............................................................................... 3.2-22
3.2.1 Introduction
DBC-B (DBN Central Unit) features the following elements, which are described in this section:
- One Main Differential Unit for each bus and phase.

- One Differential Supervision Unit for each phase.
- One Differential Alarm Unit for each busbar and phase.
Element data are the differential and restraint currents, obtained from the appropriate bay
current measurements (from enabled bays connected to the busbar in case of the Main
Differential Unit and Differential Alarm Unit and from all enabled current bays not being links in
case of the Differential Supervision Unit).
Possible C.T. ratio mismatches between the C.T.s of each bay generate a significant differential
current, which may trip the equipment even under normal no-fault load conditions. This
unacceptable behavior is eliminated via the CT Ratio setting corresponding to each bay
because the DBC uses the highest transformer ratio setting. The relative current value for each
line is calculated internally and the relay will carry out the calculations with it. Equipment
calculation for the bay “n” current is represented below:
CTR _ bay _ n
I _ bay _ ni = Is _ bay _ ni ⋅
CTR max
Where:
- I_bay_n: Bay number “n” current considered for calculating the applicable differential
current and restraint current.
- Is_ bay_n: Bay number “n” secondary current.
- CTR_ bay_n: Bay number “n” transformer ratio.
- CTRmax: Reference transformer ratio (the highest).
- n: Represents the number of Current Bay (between 1 and 28).
- i: Sample.
From these like- phase bay currents, differential and restraint currents are figured out by the
equipment:
- The differential current in a given phase, is the magnitude of the N

vector sum of all appropriate like-phase bay currents (calculation
carried out for each sampling).
Idiff i = ∑I
k =1
i ,k
- The restraint current in a given phase is the sum of the absolute N

instantaneous values of the appropriate like-phase bay currents Irest i = ∑I i ,k
(calculation carried out for each sampling). k =1
Where:
- i = sample.
- N = Number of appropriate bays to be considered for the calculation (enabled bays
connected to the busbar in case of the Main Differential Unit and Differential Alarm Unit
and all enabled current bays not being links in case of the Differential Supervision Unit).
3.2-2
BDBN0901A
3.2.2 Main Differential Unit

DBC-B main bus differential unit (each phase) includes the following features:
- Differential Characteristic with Percentage Restraint.

- Fault Start Detector.
- External Fault Detector.
- Directional Blocking.
The figure schematically describes the

operation of this element for one bus
phase (same operation for all bus
phases).
Figure 3.2.1: Logic of the DBC-B Main Differential Unit.
As stated in the introduction, the following abbreviations are defined:
Idiff Differential Current (each bus and phase).

Irest Restraint Current (each bus and phase).
If_amg Damped Restraint Current (each bus and phase).
Bus and phase differential characteristic elements (Fault Start Detector, External Fault Detector
and Directional Blocking), contribute to the correct operation of the main differential unit even
under saturated external faults (which could activate the differential characteristic as a function
of settings), preventing in this way incorrect bus tripping.
There are three independent settings for each bus. The settings are common to each of the
three units of each bus. These settings are: Enable, Sensitivity and Restraint Slope.
3.2-3
BDBN0901A
3.2.2.a Fault Start Detector

The Fault Start Detector activates on:
- Restraint current increase (restraint current must be above K_fault_rest times the
previous cycle restraint current, K_fault_rest being a fixed internal protection parameter)
provided the restraint current exceeds a given current level If_min (internal parameter
that depends on the main differential sensitivity setting).
- Differential current increase (differential current must be above K_fault_diff times the
previous cycle differential current, K_fault_diff being a fixed internal protection
parameter) provided the differential current exceeds a given current level Id_min
(internal parameter that depends on the main differential sensitivity setting).
Said detector considers the fault current interrupted (fault start signal deactivates), when at least
for two cycles there are no fault inception trigger conditions the differential current being below
the main differential sensitivity setting.
The Main Differential Unit can only be activated when a fault presence is detected.
3.2.2.b External Fault Detector

When an external fault in any of the lines linked to
the bus occurs, the resulting differential current is
zero or very small (depending on whether the
phase difference between the different lines is 180º
exactly or not), so that it will not increase or
increase very little, while the restraint current takes
larger values, the same as its increment.
Even in case of saturation of any transformer, a

small or zero increase of the differential current
and large increase of the restraint current will
occur at fault inception when the transformer is not
saturated.
Furthermore, in case of external fault the

directional blocking will be activated (as at least at
fault inception one of the currents will not be in
phase with the rest of the currents of the
corresponding phase and bus).
Figure 3.2.2 shows an example of saturated

external fault currents (phase B). In this example
there are three bays and the fault occurs on bay 3.
Figure 3.2.2: Example of Saturated External

Fault Currents.
3.2-4
BDBN0901A
The External Fault Detector considers all these external fault features and, therefore, its
activation takes into account that, when a current increases as a result of the external fault, the
ratio Idiff / Irest must be smaller than a fixed internal parameter K_int and the directional
blocking is activated.
The External Fault Detector can only be activated on fault detection (fault inception signal
activated).
As shown in figure 3.2.1, the External Fault Detector affects the restraint current taken for the
main differential characteristic: If = f (Irest, F_EXT),
- If the external fault is activated: If = If_amg.

- If the external fault is not activated (under fault condition it implies internal fault): If =
Irest.
In this way the equipment is compliant before saturated internal faults and safe before saturated
external faults.
3.2.2.c Directional Blocking

Sometimes, because of CT saturation, an external fault in which the differential current is very
similar to the restraint current can be considered as an internal fault. This happens when the
saturation is so great that the measurement of the saturated current is practically zero. In order
to avoid undue operations in these cases, the Main Differential Unit is provided with a
Directional Blocking detector.
This detector checks that the samples of the currents that flow through each bus have the same
sign at all times, taking into account only those currents contributing to the fault, namely, the
currents with a RMS value above the corresponding directional blocking Cutoff Current setting.
Considering directional blocking non canceling currents:
- If the currents have the same sign, the fault is considered as internal and the directional
blocking is not activated.
- If, on the contrary, the currents have both signs, the directional blocking would be
activated (the signal will be extended for a given time).
The setting maximum directional blocking Cutoff Current level is for each bay the RMS value
below which the bay current is not considered for directional blocking of the corresponding
phase and bus, provided a differential current increase fault inception occurred (namely, in case
of a possible internal fault).
The purpose of that setting is preventing directional blocking activation due to the uncontrolled
phase difference of the currents not contributing to the internal fault.
In case sufficient differential current is generated for fault detection, namely, in case of possible
internal fault, the directional blocking scheme also considers a directional unblocking function
that activates when bus currents are clearly as a result of an internal fault (in view of their phase
angles) ensuring in this way a fast fault clearance.
The algorithm of the Main Differential Unit checks that conditions exist for the activation of the
percentage restraint characteristic of the unit, but said activation is blocked by the activation of
the corresponding directional blocking (provided the setting Directional Blocking in the HMI
configuration menu is correctly set to YES).
3.2-5
BDBN0901A
3.2.2.d Differential Characteristic with Percentage Restraint

Figure 3.2.3 shows the Differential Characteristic activation zone, tripping when:
[Idiff > S) AND (Idiff > (P x If) + S(1-P)]

Where:
- Idiff: Differential Current

- Irest: restraint current or damped restraint current taken as a function of the external
fault detector. As previously stated,
- if the external fault is not activated (under fault conditions, it implies internal fault):
If = Irest. Example represented with the dashed line in figure 3.2.4.
- if the external fault is activated: If = If_amg. Example represented by the
continuous line in figure 3.2.4.
To calculate this current initiate If_amg = Irest and carry out the following
comparisons:
If Iresti³If_amgi-1 → If_amgi= Iresti
If Iresti<If_amgi-1 → If_amgi= cte x If_amgi-1, where cte is an internal
parameter less than 1..
- S: sensitivity
- P: Restraint Slope. (The setting of the restraint slope may be adjusted between 40%
and 90%, this corresponding to P between 0.4 and 0.9 respectively).
The Differential Characteristic resets for the points below the reset characteristic. The sensitivity
of the reset characteristic is half of the setting value and its restraint slope P - 0.1 (except when
the Slope (P) setting is 0.4, in which case the resetting restraint slope is also 0.4).
Figure 3.2.3: Differential Characteristic Trip Zone. Figure 3.2.4: Damped Restraint Current.
3.2-6
BDBN0901A
3.2.3 Supervision Differential Unit

DBN systems have a Supervision Differential Unit, which consists of an overall unit, whose
inputs are the currents of every current bay comprising the bus or busses of the protected zone
(independently of the bus disconnecting switches status). This unit neither considers the bay
units of the ties nor the disabled bays. On the other hand, the Main Differential Unit of a given
bus takes into account the currents of the enabled bays connected to said bus (by settings or by
the disconnecting switches status contact inputs).
There are three of these Supervision Differential Units (one per phase). Each of these units
continuously calculates the differential current circulating through all the buses and compares
the measured value to the settings.
The Supervision Differential Unit is always enabled (signals always in operation). However, bus
trip differential supervision may be disabled via setting or digital input. This is useful, for
example, in cases where busses are always apart from each other. If the unit is enabled for bus
trip differential supervision, its function is supervising the operation of the Main Differential
Units, so that for a differential bus trip the Supervision Differential Unit must be active. This
allows preventing inappropriate trips upon the activation of the Main Differential Unit, e.g., due
to an error in the secondary image of a current bay disconnecting switches status.
Settings for the Supervision Differential Unit are limited by the settings of the Main Differential
Unit. The Supervision Differential Unit must be set more sensitive than the Main Differential Unit
(same sensitivity threshold and less slope than lower main characteristic is recommended). The
settings for this unit are: Sensitivity and Restraint Slope.
The shape of the percentage restraint characteristic for Supervision Differential Unit activation
and deactivation is similar to the characteristic shown for the Main Differential Unit. The
differential supervision scheme will take If = Irest if at least in one of the considered phase bus,
If = Irest is also taken. In this way, protection compliance is ensured. The Differential
Supervision Unit is activated only under fault conditions (at least one fault inception detector of
the corresponding bus phase must be activated).
The Differential Block by Disagreement could be enabled (see Central Unit Logic paragraph):
upon a situation when the Supervision Differential Unit activates without the activation of the
Main Differential Unit for longer than the time delay setting for this block, the differential trip
blocking of the four busses activates, such as indicated in Operation Principles paragraph.
3.2-7
BDBN0901A
3.2.4 Differential Alarm Unit

DBN systems are provided with a Differential Alarm Unit per phase and for each bus. All
Differential Alarm Units measure the corresponding differential currents all the time.
Each unit is comprised of a sensitive overcurrent element (the pickup value being the sensitivity
setting and the reset value being half of the sensitivity setting). The following settings are global
so every element is adjusted simultaneously: 87 Block by Differential Alarm, Sensitivity and
Time Delay.
The purpose of this unit is to detect situations of significant differential currents (but always
below of the differential unit sensitivities), due to metering or application errors, so. The alarm
unit activates when the differential current remains above its sensitivity threshold setting for
longer than the timeout setting, this way causing the Differential Alarm Unit activation.
Moreover, the activation of this alarm can block the differential trip of the corresponding busbar
(via the applicable Enable setting). The Differential Alarm Unit is always enabled (there is no
element enable setting). The setting 87 Block by Differential Alarm Enable enables Blocking
87 by differential alarm activation. If this setting is set to NO, the differential alarm unit can
activate outputs and events but no blocking 87 is produced in the corresponding busbar.
3.2-8
BDBN0901A
3.2.5 Settings Ranges
Transformation Ratios (Bays)

Current Bay #lb Transformer Ratio: 1 - 3000 1 50 (mod. 10)
1 (mod. 11
and 12)
Voltage Bay #vb Transformer Ratio: 1 - 4000 1 50 (mod. 10)
1 (mod. 11
and 12)
#lb = 1 to 28 (current bay units)

#vb = 29 to 32 (bus voltage bay units)
Bus # Main Differential Characteristic (# = 1 to 4 or 5 depending on model) (3 Groups)

Enable # YES / NO YES
Sensitivity #
DBC-B1 0.10 - 4.00 A 0.01 A 1A
DBC-B2 0.40 - 20.00 A 0.01 A 1A
DBC-B3 0.10 - 20.00 A 0.01 A 1A
Restraint Slope # 40 - 90 % 1% 40%
Note: Note: sensitivity setting is calculated as a result of dividing the primary differential current to be
calibrated by the reference transformation ratio (greater of the ratios set for the current bays).
Directional Blocking: Protection Settings (1 Group)

Bay #lb Cutoff Current
DBC-B1 0.05 - 2 A 0.01 A 1A
DBC-B2 0.20 - 10 A 0.01 A 5A
DBC-B3 0.20 - 10 A 0.01 A 1A
#lb = 1 to 28 or 1 to 14, depending on model (in each current bay)
Directional Blocking: Configuration Settings - Protection Config. (1 Group)

Directional Blocking YES / NO YES
Note: this setting must be set to YES for correct protection operation. It can be set to NO to ease the carrying
out of some main differential characteristic tests.
3.2-9
BDBN0901A
Supervision Differential Characteristic (3 Groups)

87 Supervision Enabled on Bus Trip YES / NO YES
Sensitivity
DBC-B1 0.10 - 4.00 A 0.01 A 1A
DBC-B2 0.40 - 20.00 A 0.01 A 1A
DBC-B3 0.10 - 20.00 A 0.01 A 1A
Restraint Slope 40 - 90 % 1% 40%
Note: Sensitive setting will be calculated as the ratio between primary differential current to be set and
reference ratio (which is the highest set ratio for the current bays).
Differential Alarm Unit (3 Groups)

87 Block by Differential Alarm Enable YES / NO YES
Sensitivity
DBC-B1 0.05 – 1.00 A 0.01 A 0.3 A
DBC-B2 0.10 – 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.5 A
DBC-B3 0.05 – 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.5 A
Time Delay 0.2 - 20 s 0.01 s 10 s
Note: Sensitive setting will be calculated as the ratio between primary differential current to be set and
reference ratio (which is the highest set ratio for the current bays).
3.2-10
BDBN0901A
• Transformation Ratios: HMI Access

...
• Main Differential Unit Protection Settings: HMI Access

...
0 - GENERAL 0- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 1 0- ENABLE

1 - TRANSFORMER 1- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 2 1- SENSITIVITY
2 - PROTECTION 2- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 3 2- RESTRAINT SLOPE
3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 4
4 - LOGIC 4- SUPERVISORY DIFF.
5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5- DIFFERENTIAL ALARM
Note 1: in case of DBN model 12, the table above also shows BUS 5 DIFFERENTIAL settings.
• Directional Blocking Settings: HMI Access

...
0 - GENERAL 0- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 1

1 - TRANSFORMER 1- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 2
2 - PROTECTION 2- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 3
3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 4
4 - LOGIC 4- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 5
5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 6
6- CUTOFF CURRENT BAY 7
(*)
(*) Note: up to 14 or 28 bays, depending on DBN model.
3.2-11
BDBN0901A
Models 10
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - PASSWORDS
1 - OPERATIONS 1 - OPERATION PERMISSION
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - CONFIGURE INPUTS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - CONFIGURE OUTPUTS
4 - INFORMATION 4 - REAR PORT COMM
5 - FRONT PORT COMM
6 - DATE & TIME
7 - PROTECTION CONFIG. 0- DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING
Models 11 and 12
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - CONFIG INPUTS/OUTPUTS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - REAR PORT COMM
4 - INFORMATION 4 - FRONT PORT COMM
5 - DATE & TIME
6 - PROTECTION CONFIG. 0 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING
• Supervision Differential Unit Settings: HMI Access

...
0 - GENERAL 0- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 1 0- SUPERV ENABLED ON TRIP

2 - PROTECTION 2- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 3 2- RESTRAINT SLOPE
3.2-12
BDBN0901A
• Differential Alarm Unit Settings: HMI Access

...
0 - GENERAL 0- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 1 0- ENABLE BLOCK

2 - PROTECTION 2- DIFFERENTIAL BUS 3 2- TIME
3.2-13
BDBN0901A
Table 3.2-1: Digital Inputs of the Supervision Differential Unit (DBC)

TRIP_SUP_DIS Differential Supervision Disabling on Bus Trip Level input to disable bus trip
supervision through the
Supervision Differential Unit.
(This input operates even if
the corresponding enable
setting is enabled).

3.2.7.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Main Differential Unit
Table 3.2-2: Auxiliary Outputs of the Main Differential Units (DBC)

SDP_R1 Bus 1 Phase R Differential Unit
SDP_S1 Bus 1 Phase S Differential Unit
SDP_T1 Bus 1 Phase T Differential Unit
SDP_R3 Bus 3 Phase R Differential Unit Activation of the differential
SDP_S3 Bus 3 Phase S Differential Unit units of the buses in each
SDP_T3 Bus 3 Phase T Differential Unit phase.
SDP_R5 (*) Bus 4 Phase R Differential Unit (*)
SDP_S5 (*) Bus 4 Phase S Differential Unit (*)
SDP_T5 (*) Bus 4 Phase T Differential Unit (*)
3.2-14
BDBN0901A
Table 3.2-3: Events of the Main Differential Units (DBC)

Group Description
Bus 1 Phase R Differential Unit activation
Bus 1 Phase S Differential Unit activation
Bus 1 Phase T Differential Unit activation
Trip, blocking and Bus 3 Phase R Differential Unit activation
protection units Bus 3 Phase S Differential Unit activation
activation. Bus 3 Phase T Differential Unit activation
Bus 4 Phase R Differential Unit activation (*)
Bus 4 Phase S Differential Unit activation (*)
Bus 4 Phase T Differential Unit activation (*)
Bus 1 Phase R Differential Unit deactivation
Bus 1 Phase S Differential Unit deactivation
Bus 1 Phase T Differential Unit deactivation
Trip, blocking and Bus 3 Phase R Differential Unit deactivation
protection units Bus 3 Phase S Differential Unit deactivation
deactivation. Bus 3 Phase T Differential Unit deactivation
Bus 4 Phase R Differential Unit deactivation (*)
Bus 4 Phase S Differential Unit deactivation (*)
Bus 4 Phase T Differential Unit deactivation (*)
3.2-15
BDBN0901A
3.2.7.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Supervision Differential Unit
Table 3.2-4: Auxiliary Outputs of the Supervision Differential Unit (DBC)

SDS_S Phase R Supervision Differential Unit
Activation of the supervision
SDS_R Phase S Supervision Differential Unit
unit of each phase.
SDS_T Phase T Supervision Differential Unit
Table 3.2-5: Events of the Supervision Differential Unit (DBC)

Group Description
Phase R Supervision Differential Unit activation
Single Bus, Phase S Supervision Differential Unit activation
Lockout, Buses Phase T Supervision Differential Unit activation
Trip blocking and
unblocking, 87 Phase R Supervision Differential Unit deactivation
Supervision. Phase S Supervision Differential Unit deactivation
Phase T Supervision Differential Unit deactivation
3.2.7.c Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Differential Alarm Units
Table 3.2-6: Auxiliary Outputs of the Differential Alarm Units (DBC)

ALARMD_R1 Bus 1 Phase R Differential Alarm
ALARMD_S1 Bus 1 Phase S Differential Alarm
ALARMD_T1 Bus 1 Phase T Differential Alarm
ALARMD_R3 Bus 3 Phase R Differential Alarm Activation of the differential
ALARMD_S3 Bus 3 Phase S Differential Alarm alarm units of the buses in
ALARMD_T3 Bus 3 Phase T Differential Alarm each phase.
ALARMD_R5 (*) Bus 5 Phase R Differential Alarm (*)
ALARMD_S5 (*) Bus 5 Phase S Differential Alarm (*)
ALARMD_S5 (*) Bus 5 Phase T Differential Alarm (*)
BLK_ALR_B1 Bus 1 Block 87 by Differential Alarm
BLK_ALR_B2 Bus 2 Block 87 by Differential Alarm Indication of the blocking of
the differential unit of bus # by
BLK_ALR_B3 Bus 3 Block 87 by Differential Alarm
differential alarm activation of
BLK_ALR_B4 Bus 4 Block 87 by Differential Alarm corresponding bus #.
BLK_ALR_B5 (*) Bus 5 Block 87 by Differential Alarm (*)
3.2-16
BDBN0901A
Table 3.2-7: Events of the Differential Alarm Units (DBC)

Group Description
Bus 1 Phase R Differential Alarm activation
Bus 1 Phase S Differential Alarm activation
Bus 1 Phase T Differential Alarm activation
Trip, blocking and Bus 3 Phase R Differential Alarm activation
protection units Bus 3 Phase S Differential Alarm activation
activation. Bus 3 Phase T Differential Alarm activation
Bus 5 Phase R Differential Alarm activation (*)
Bus 5 Phase S Differential Alarm activation (*)
Bus 5 Phase T Differential Alarm activation (*)
Bus 1 Phase R Differential Alarm deactivation
Bus 1 Phase S Differential Alarm deactivation
Bus 1 Phase T Differential Alarm deactivation
Trip, blocking and Bus 3 Phase R Differential Alarm deactivation
protection units Bus 3 Phase S Differential Alarm deactivation
deactivation. Bus 3 Phase T Differential Alarm deactivation
Bus 5 Phase R Differential Alarm deactivation (*)
Bus 5 Phase S Differential Alarm deactivation (*)
Bus 5 Phase T Differential Alarm deactivation (*)
3.2-17
BDBN0901A
3.2.8 Units Test

3.2.8.a Main Differential Characteristic Test
Differential characteristic tests can be carried out statically (increasing the differential current
slowly) or dynamically (applying zero differential current prefault prior to each fault differential
current).
To carry out static tests the Test Mode must be activated (in which the differential element does
not consider the fault inception signal) as follows:
- Press F3 in the HMI.

- This displays: CONFIRM TEST MODE.
- Press F1 in HMI to confirm.
- When the equipment is in test mode, DBC LEDs blink.
After testing, log out the test mode following the steps described to log in.
No Test Mode activation is required for dynamic tests.
Below, two different differential characteristic tests are described. Only one of these tests is
required to check differential element signals. The test for phase A of bus 1 scheme is
described. Repeat the test for every bus phase.
• Main Differential Characteristic Sensitivity Test
Enable DBC setting In Service. Enable bus 1 differential unit. Set all transformation ratios to
one. Only one bay must be put into operation (other bays must be put out of operation, namely,
set the enable setting to NO) and link that bay (by means of the Bus setting or digital inputs) to
bus 1.
Apply current to the phase R input of the enabled bay and check, adjusting the sensitivity of the
Differential Unit under test according to following tables that the LED set as an activation signal
for Bus 1 phase R Supervision Differential Unit (or the corresponding ZIVercomPlus® indicator
of the INFORMATION - STATUS - METERING UNITS display screen) sets to "1", in a stable
fashion, when current reaches a value between I_MIN and I_MAX.
Table 3.2-8: Tests at 5A Rated Current (Main Differential Characteristic)

Sensitivity I_MIN I_MAX
0.5 A 0.485 A 0.515 A
2A 1.94 A 2.06 A
10 A 9.7 A 10.3 A
Table 3.2-9: Tests at 1A Rated Current (Main Differential Characteristic)

0.5 A 0.485 A 0.515 A
1A 0.97 A 1.03 A
2A 1.94 A 2.06 A
3.2-18
BDBN0901A
• Main Differential Characteristic Slope Test

Enable DBC setting In Service. Enable bus 1 differential unit. Set to one all transformation
ratios. Two bays must be put into operation (other bays must be put out of operation, namely,
set the enable setting to NO) and link these two bays (by means of the Bus setting or digital
inputs) to bus 1.
For this test bay currents are applied with opposite phase angles in order to keep the restraint
current constant. Therefore, it is recommended to disable the Directional Blocking setting in
the HMI Configuration menu (otherwise, the directional blocking could prevent the activation of
the differential characteristic if the applied currents are above the directional blocking cancel
current setting level).
Apply current of same value but opposite phase angle to phase A of two enabled bays,
whereupon the differential current obtained is zero and the restraint current doubles the current
applied to each bay. Increase the differential current keeping the restraint current constant, by
increasing one current the same proportion as the other is decreased. Check, setting the
sensitivity and slope of the differential element under test according to the following table, that
the LED configured as activation signal of bus 1 phase A differential element (or corresponding
ZIVercomPlus® or Information - Status – Measurement Unit display screen status indicator)
sets to "1", in a stable way, when the current reaches a value very close to (error less than 3%)
the theoretical activation differential current of the following table.
Table 3.2-10: Slope Tests (Main Differential Characteristic)

S (A) P (p.u) Bay 1 Current Bay 2 Current If Theoretical activation_I_diff
= (P x If) + S(1-P)
(A) (º) (A) (º)
2.5 0.40 2.25 0 7.75 180 10 A 5.5 A
2.5 0.65 2.1875 0 12.8125 180 15 A 10.625 A
2.5 0.90 0.625 0 14.375 180 15 A 13.75 A
After testing it is important to remember that the Directional Blocking setting in the HMI
Configuration (Protection Configuration) menu, must be set to YES for correct protection
operation.
3.2-19
BDBN0901A
3.2.8.b Supervision Differential Characteristic Test

In the same way as for the main differential characteristic test, the differential supervision
scheme test can be performed in static mode (increasing slowly the differential current) or in
dynamic mode (applying zero differential current prefault prior to each fault differential current).
To carry out the static test Test Mode must be activated (whereupon the differential supervision
unit does not consider the fault inception signal) as follows:
- Press F3 in the HMI.

- This displays: CONFIRM TEST MODE.
- Press F1 in HMI to confirm.
- When the equipment is in test mode, DBC LEDs blink.
After testing, log out the test mode following the steps described to log in.
No Test Mode activation is required for dynamic tests.
Below, two different differential characteristic tests are described. Only one of these tests is
required to check differential element signals. The test for phase A of bus 1 scheme is
described. Repeat the test for every bus phase.
• Sensitivity Test of the Differential Supervision Characteristic
Enable DBC setting In Service. Enable bus 1 differential element. Set bus 1 main differential
sensitivity to the minimum value (0.4 A). Set all transformation ratios to one. Only one bay must
be put into operation (other bays must be put out of operation, namely, set the enable setting to
NO) and link that bay (by means of the Bus setting or digital inputs) to bus 1.
Apply current to the phase R input of the enabled bay and check, adjusting the sensitivity of the
Differential Unit under test according to following tables that the LED set as an activation signal
for phase R Supervision Differential Unit (or the corresponding ZIVercomPlus® indicator of the
INFORMATION - STATUS - METERING UNITS display screen) sets to "1", in a stable fashion,
when current reaches a value between I_MIN and I_MAX.
Table 3.2-11: Tests at 5A Rated Current (Differential Supervision Characteristic)

0.5 A 0.485 A 0.515 A
2A 1.94 A 2.06 A
10 A 9.7 A 10.3 A
Table 3.2-12: Tests at 1A Rated Current (Differential Supervision Characteristic)

0.5 A 0.485 A 0.515 A
1A 0.97 A 1.03 A
2A 1.94 A 2.06 A
3.2-20
BDBN0901A
• Differential Supervision Scheme Slope Test

Enable DBC setting In Service. Enable bus 1 differential element. Set to one all transformation
ratios. Two bays must be put into operation (other bays must be put out of operation, namely,
set the enable setting to NO) and link these two bays (by means of the Bus setting or digital
inputs) to bus 1.
For this test bay currents are applied with opposite phase angles in order to keep the restraint
current constant. But it is not required to disable the Directional Blocking setting in the HMI
Configuration menu, as the differential supervision unit does not consider said blocking.
Apply current of same value but opposite phase angle to phase A of two enabled bays,
whereupon the differential current obtained is zero and the restraint current doubles the current
applied to each bay. Increase the differential current keeping the restraint current constant, by
increasing one current the same proportion as the other is decreased. Check, setting the
sensitivity and slope of the differential element under test according to the following table, that
the LED configured as activation signal of phase A differential supervision unit (or
corresponding ZIVercomPlus® or Information - Status - Measurement Unit display screen
status indicator) sets to "1", in a stable way, when the current reaches a value very close to
(error less than 3%) the theoretical activation current in the following table.
Table 3.2-13:Slope Tests (Differential Supervision Characteristic)

S (A) P (p.u) Bay 1 Current Bay 2 Current If Theoretical activation_I_diff
= (P x If) + S(1-P)
(A) (º) (A) (º)
2.5 0.40 2.25 0 7.75 180 10 A 5.5 A
2.5 0.65 2.1875 0 12.8125 180 15 A 10.625 A
2.5 0.90 0.625 0 14.375 180 15 A 13.75 A
3.2-21
BDBN0901A
3.2.8.c Differential Alarm Unit Test

The test is described for phase A of bus 1 characteristic. Repeat the test for each of the used
bus phases.
Enable DBC setting In Service. Disable all elements, except 87 Block by Differential Alarm
enable. Set all transformation ratios to 1. Put a bay unit into service and connect it to any bus
(via Bus settings or via Digital Inputs). Set the sensitivity of the differential alarm to 0.2 amperes
and it’s time to 2.0 seconds.
Apply a current of 0.23 amperes to phase R of the bay unit and check that the unit and the
corresponding bus blocking are activated two seconds later. Repeat the process applying a
current of 0.17 amperes and check that the unit does not activate after the two seconds.
3.2-22
BDBN0901A
3.3 Current Bay
Functions

3.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3.3-2
3.3.2 DBP-B Breaker Failure Unit with Retrip Function .................................................... 3.3-2
3.3.2.a Latched Breaker Failure Output (BF_L) ............................................................. 3.3-6
3.3.2.b Disabling Breaker Failure Function .................................................................... 3.3-6
3.3.2.c Single Phase Breaker Failure ............................................................................. 3.3-7
3.3.2.d Three Phase Breaker Failure (with Overcurrent) ............................................... 3.3-7
3.3.2.e No Load Three Phase Breaker Failure (without Overcurrent) ............................ 3.3-8
3.3.2.f Previously Failed Breaker Failure ....................................................................... 3.3-8
3.3.2.g Breaker Failure by External Activation ............................................................... 3.3-9
3.3.2.h Retrip .................................................................................................................. 3.3-9
3.3.2.i Trip Time Limit (T7) .......................................................................................... 3.3-11
3.3.2.j Reset Trip Time (T5)......................................................................................... 3.3-11
3.3.3 “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay Breaker Failure Unit with Retrip Function ................ 3.3-11
3.3.4 Other Breaker Failure Related Paragraphs ........................................................... 3.3-11
3.3.5 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection ................................................. 3.3-12
3.3.6 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip .................................................................. 3.3-13
3.3.7 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Trip Protection ............................. 3.3-13
3.3.8 Bay Disabling ......................................................................................................... 3.3-18
3.3.8.a Bay Disabling by Setting ................................................................................... 3.3-18
3.3.8.b Bay Disabling by Dynamic Zone ....................................................................... 3.3-18
3.3.8.c Bay Disabling by Digital Input ........................................................................... 3.3-19
3.3.9 Settings Ranges..................................................................................................... 3.3-20
3.3.10 Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................... 3.3-24
3.3.10.a Digital Inputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit ........................................ 3.3-24
3.3.10.b Digital Inputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic ......................................................... 3.3-26
3.3.10.c Digital Inputs of Bay Disabling .......................................................................... 3.3-26
3.3.11.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit .............. 3.3-27
3.3.11.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End
Fault Protection Unit ......................................................................................... 3.3-29
3.3.11.c Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit ............... 3.3-30
3.3.11.d Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Dynamic Zone Logic ............................... 3.3-30
3.3.11.e Auxiliary Outputs and Events of Bay Disabling ................................................ 3.3-31
3.3.12 Units Test ............................................................................................................... 3.3-32
3.3.12.a Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit Test ................................................................ 3.3-32
3.3.12.b 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection Unit Test ............................ 3.3-34
3.3.12.c 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit Test.............................................. 3.3-35
3.3.1 Introduction
DBN Current Bay includes the following elements:
- Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit.

- 50 Supervision Unit for Differential Unit Trip and for Remote Trip Unit.
- 50 Supervision Unit for Breaker Failure Trip.
- Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Protection Unit
3.3.2 DBP-B Breaker Failure Unit with Retrip Function

The Breaker Failure unit detects malfunctions following trip commands and generates a signal
to trip other breakers that may be feeding the fault to clear it, that is, to the breakers of the lines
that are connected to the same protection zone as the line with breaker failure.
The Retrip function can be used to trip the malfunctioning breaker before a breaker failure trip
signal is sent to every breaker in the affected protection zone.
The IED has six current measuring units, two per phase. The six pickup detectors are arranged
in two groups, providing two different settings levels: pickup 1 (single-phase pickup) and pickup
2 (three-phase pickup). The pickup of the breaker failure current measuring units occurs at 1.05
times the setting value.
The key characteristic of the pickup detectors is their fast reset time (5 ms), based on current
instantaneous values. The current RMS value is also considered for reset the same in case of
an exponential current drop after opening the breaker.
The metering unit block diagram of the breaker failure is shown in Figure 3.3.1. The output is
the Breaker Failure Unit Pickup signal.
Figure 3.3.1: Breaker Failure Metering Unit Diagram.
3.3-2
BDBN0901A
Detailing this diagram for each of the phases, figure 3.3.2 is obtained, where:
PHPK_R1, PHPK_S1, PHPK_T1 Phase Unit pickup by pickup setting 1

(Single-phase).
PHPK_R2, PHPK_S2, PHPK_T2 Phase Unit pickup by pickup setting 2
(Three-phase).
Figure 3.3.2: Measuring Unit Block Diagram for each Phase.
3.3-3
BDBN0901A
The Breaker Failure and Retrip functions are dependent on the pickup of the Phase Overcurrent
Units (pickup detectors) combined with several physical contact inputs, as depicted in Figure
3.3.3 (logic diagram for Breaker Failure and Retrip).
Where:
BFIR, BFIS, BFIT Single-Phase Breaker Failure Initiate.

BFI3ph Three-Phase Breaker Failure Initiate.
BFI_NC Three-Phase Breaker Failure No Load Initiate.
BFIPF Previously Failed BF Initiated.
EXT_BFI External BF Initiated.
PF_BF_BLK Previously Failed BF Block.
EXT_BF_BLK External BF Block.
TRIP Bay trip.
52_C Closed breaker.
RST_BF Latched Breaker Failure signal reset.
PICKUP Breaker Failure unit pickup.
BF_INT BF Output by Internal Actuation.
BF_L Latched Breaker Failure output.
BF_PF Previously Failed BF Output.
BF_EXT BF Output by External Actuation.
RETRIP Retrip output activation.
RETRIP_R Phase R retrip output.
RETRIP_S Phase S retrip output.
RETRIP_T Phase T retrip output.
RETRIP_RST Three-phase retrip output.
BAY_TRIP_BLK Bay Trip Blocking Input.
3.3-4
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.3.3: BF and Retrip (enabled) Logic Diagram.
As shown in figure 3.3.3 this unit includes the following functions:
- Single-Phase Breaker Failure

- Three-Phase Breaker Failure.
- No Load Three-Phase Breaker Failure.
- Previously Failed Breaker Failure.
- Retrip (single-phase and three-phase).
- Breaker Failure by External Activation.
As previously stated, figure 3.3.3 considers all unit functions enabled (including retrip). Figure
3.3.4 shows schematically the unit operation as a function of the applicable enable status. Bay
BF activation by externally activated Breaker Failure Initiate, is always enabled. Nevertheless,
to enable the rest of the bay breaker failure element, the element enable setting must be set to
YES and BF and Retrip blocking via DI from DBC or DBP must not be activated via
activation of IN_BF_RT_BLK bay input (affecting only the applicable bay) or via the activation
of DBC: BF_RT_BLK_DBC input.
3.3-5
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.3.4: Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit General Diagram.
Where:
RST_BF Latched Breaker Failure Reset by

Current Bay DI.
RST_BF_L Latched Breaker Failure signal reset from
DBC (Central Unit: by DI or Operation.
3.3.2.a Latched Breaker Failure Output (BF_L)

The BF_L (Latched BF) output may only be activated by the breaker failure unit activation (by
external or internal actuation). BF_L signal disappears via a pulse into the digital input, set up
as the RST_BF input of this bay. Signal BF_L of all current bays (linked with the DBC) may also
be reset via a reset command (through local HMI or front or remote communication port) or
through a pulse into the REP_FI_ED input of the DBN Central Unit.
3.3.2.b Disabling Breaker Failure Function

Disabling the breaker failure function implies that the bay will not activate none of the Breaker
Failure and Retrip logic outputs in figure 3.3.3 (except the BF_EXT signal).
The breaker failure function may be disabled via the Enable setting of the corresponding
Current Bay or via the activation of BF and Retrip Blocking via digital input from DBC or DBP.
Disabling via this setting implies that the bay will activate none of the Breaker Failure and Retrip
logic outputs shown in figure 3.3.3 (except BF_EXT signal).
If enabling is produced via bay input (BF and Retrip Blocking by DI), it affects only to this bay.
Whereas if disabling is produced via DBC input (IN_BF_RT_BLK, BF and Retrip Output
Blocking Activation), the Breaker Failure Unit of all DBC - connected current bays are disabled
(even if the bay is not enabled). Under this situation the DBC’s BF&RET_BLC output and the
output BF and Retrip Blocking by DI from DBC or DBP of all DBC - connected current bays
will be active (even if the bay is disabled).
3.3-6
BDBN0901A
If the bus trip is blocked via Breaker Failure (via an HMI operation command or a DBC digital
input) when breaker failure function is enabled, the Current Bay Breaker Failure and Retrip
outputs will operate according to the logic described previously, but this bus will not trip by the
activation of the breaker failure protection.
3.3.2.c Single Phase Breaker Failure

After single-phase bay protection trip, one or more of the digital inputs associated to single-
phase breaker failure initiate will be active (BFIR, BFIS or BFIT). Since the system is under fault
conditions, the current circulating through the faulted phase will exceed the corresponding
detector unit setting. These conditions will activate the single-phase breaker failure timer T1. If
the timer times out while the breaker failure initiate digital input is active, or the faulted phase
current detector output is active, the output signal showing the activation of the applicable single
phase breaker failure will activate (BF_R, BF_S o BF_T), which at the same time will activate
BF_INT and BF_L outputs, provided three-phase trip conditions are not present, in which case,
said outputs will not be activated by the operation of the single phase breaker failure.
The key characteristic of the current detectors is their fast reset time, which stops the timer as
soon as the breaker opens and the current flow stops to avoid incorrect BF activation. Longer
reset times risk incorrect tripping of breakers outside the protection zone when current flow is no
longer present.
3.3.2.d Three Phase Breaker Failure (with Overcurrent)

Line protection three-phase trips, as a function of the bay protection setup, will only activate the
BFI3ph signal. If any phase current is higher than the corresponding detection unit setting,
breaker failure timer T2 will start counting. The difference with respect to the single-phase trip
operation is that deactivation of all the three current detectors is required to stop the timer. If
any of the detectors is active, meaning that current flows through the phase, the output
signaling the activation of the three phase breaker failure (BF_3PH) will activate, which at the
same time triggers the activation of the BF_INT and BF_L signals, showing breaker failure.
Also, a bay trip (TRIP signal activation), caused by the trip of the bus to which the bay is
connected, will also initiate the three-phase breaker failure process.
3.3-7
BDBN0901A
3.3.2.e No Load Three Phase Breaker Failure (without Overcurrent)

Through a no load three phase breaker failure, there exists the possibility to activate a bay
breaker failure with no need for the supervision of the current through said bay. To this end,
setting up the corresponding breaker status and three phase no load breaker failure (BFI_NC)
inputs is required. This may be used, e.g., in case of the transformer protection by the Buchholz
trip relay.
If BFI_NC input is activated and the breaker remaining closed, conditions for the start of the no
load three phase breaker failure timer T3 are complied. If the system does not detect the
deactivation of the closed breaker status or the deactivation of BFI_NC input before said timer
times out, the output for the activation of the three phase no load breaker failure (BF_3PH_NL)
will activate, which at the same time causes the activation of the BF_INT and BF_L signals, as
in the above cases.
If 52 open status and closed status inputs are used, the breaker status could be unknown, in
which case the 52 closed condition required for the activation of the no load three phase
breaker failure is not complied.
3.3.2.f Previously Failed Breaker Failure

In systems with SF6 insulated breakers, a hazardous situation can occur when gas pressure is
not enough for operation. Under this situation, the breaker blocks and cannot trip in case of
fault. If this breaker blocking activates BFIPF input, when the breaker is blocked by low SF6
pressure, as soon as the bay receives a tripping command, the breaker failure activation (via
any BFIR, BFIS, BFIT, BFI3ph or BFI_NC input, or via the bay tripping itself), will immediately
trip the bus to which this bay is connected.
Via bay input BFIPF, a breaker failure activation time (T6: Previously Failed BF Time setting)
smaller than the three phase and single phase breaker failure setting can be obtained.
As shown in figure 3.3.3:
- The activation of previously failed BF can be blocked via input PF_BF_BLK.

- The activation of the previously failed BF causes the activation of output BF_PF and,
therefore, the activation of output BF_L.
3.3-8
BDBN0901A
3.3.2.g Breaker Failure by External Activation

This function is applied when using breaker failure unit external to the bus differential current
bay, using the DBN communications system for breaker failure tripping of the applicable bus
bays.
Operation of external breaker failure is instantaneous. The activation is carried out via input
EXT_BFI, causing the activation of outputs BF_EXT and BF_L. Moreover, a blocking signal
(EXT_BF_BLK) to prevent the activation of BF_EXT and BF_L is included.
A possible application for using a BF unit external to the DBP will be to enable the DBP-B BF
unit via setting, but disable via the activation of BF and Retrip blocking bay input
(IN_BF_RT_BLK), so that if anomalies in the external equipment are detected, input
IN_BF_RT_BLK is deactivated operating then the DBP-B Breaker Failure Unit (moreover, in
the latter case input EXT_BF_BLK could also be activated preventing in this way any other
incorrect operation of input EXT_BFI).
On the other hand, under breaker maintenance conditions with breaker configuration beside
busbars (bypassed breaker), using the external breaker failure function for fast bus tripping in
case of external fault without waiting for internal breaker failure activation can be of interest. The
bay signal BF_EXT could also be used to speed up the remote trip. As previously stated, under
this situation, activating the input Bay Tripping Blocking to prevent activation of the transferred
bay tripping and retripping (as the breaker is being maintained) can be of interest, but under this
situation the transferred bay breaker failure could even be disabled via digital input, as the
external breaker failure remains always enabled (independent from enable setting and from BF
and Retrip Blocking signals).
3.3.2.h Retrip
The following Retrip outputs exist:
- RETRIP_R, RETRIP_S and RETRIP_T, corresponding to Single-phase Retrip outputs.

- RETRIP_RST, which is the Three-phase Retrip signal. This signal is activated following
a load or no load three phase retrip. In the case of the No Load Three phase Retrip,
Figure 3.3.3 shows that this signal may be activated only if the breaker is closed and
the BFI_NC input signal is activated. Considering the breaker status for retrip activation
has the benefit that in case of the activation of the Buchholz relay trip for transformer
protection (which at the same time activates BFI_NC input), this trip may remain
activated for a long time even if the corresponding breaker has been opened correctly
and, thus, an unnecessary retrip would occur if the breaker status is not considered.
- RETRIP, which activates after the activation of any of the above retrip signals.
3.3-9
BDBN0901A
The retrip function may be used to open the faulted line breaker before the retrip function is sent
to the whole protection zone via activation of the corresponding breaker failure. To this end, the
breaker failure timer must be set higher than the retrip function timer. For example, in the case
there is a problem in the opening of a bay breaker upon a line fault (fault external to bus
differential), the following situations may be given:
1. DBP-B of the faulted line receives a breaker failure initiate signal (input activated via
line protection trip).
2. Breaker failure and retrip function timers start counting.
3. If Retrip activation conditions are maintained during the time count another trip is
attempted by the corresponding breaker via the selected retrip output (see Note).
3.a If the breaker opens via the retrip signal, breaker failure timers reset (because if it
were a line fault, the current that initiated the breaker failure would have
disappeared).
3.b If under these conditions the breaker failure conditions are not reset within the
breaker failure time setting, the breaker failure signal will activate, which will cause
the fault to clear (at this end, as it is a line fault) via a trip command of those
breakers connected to this protection zone.
Note: as shown in external connection drawings (see applicable Annex),the Current Bay includes additional
single-phase and three-phase retrip outputs, which allow for setting up bay operation outputs as shown in the
following table, as a function of “Retrip type” setting. Retrip function may also be disabled through this setting.
Table 3.3-1: Operation Outputs as a Function of Retrip Type Setting

DBP-B Operation Setting: Retrip Type
Outputs Single-Phase With Retrip Relay Without Retrip Relay
SP1 (board 1) TRIP+RETRIP_R+RETRIP_RST TRIP TRIP
SP3 (board 1) Lockout (86) Lockout (86) Lockout (86)
SP2 (board 2) TRIP+RETRIP_S+ RETRIP_RST TRIP TRIP
SP4 (board 2) TRIP+RETRIP_T+ RETRIP_RST RETRIP TRIP
3.3-10
BDBN0901A
3.3.2.i Trip Time Limit (T7)

Bay Retrip (RETRIP, RETRIP_R, RETRIP_S, RETRIP_T, RETRIP_RST) and trip (TRIP,
TRIP_87 and TRIP_BF) signals may not be active for longer than the Trip Time Limit setting
(see General Settings for Central Unit), thus, signals deactivate when this limit is exceeded
provided the activation conditions remain (reset being normal before this time is reached).
3.3.2.j Reset Trip Time (T5)

Retrip and bay tripping signal reset time ensures a minimum signal activation time.
Bay Retrip and Trip signals reset time only consider if the activation of these signals disappears
before the Trip Time Limit times out, as if this time is reached under activation conditions, reset
is instantaneous. Reset time of all retrip and trip signals may be set up through the Reset Trip
Time setting (see General Settings of DBC).
3.3.3 “V” Type (DRV or DCV) Bay Breaker Failure Unit with Retrip
Function
For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual.
3.3.4 Other Breaker Failure Related Paragraphs

For more details of breaker failure unit and breaker failure tripping see sections:
- Breaker failure bus tripping logic.

- Current bay tripping logic.
- Faults between breaker and CT.
- Considerations on current bay “Connection” and “Enable”.
3.3-11
BDBN0901A
3.3.5 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection

This overcurrent element can be enabled for bay tripping supervision via differential protection
or supervision of remote end tripping via communications signal activation. The overcurrent
element enables just when either of said functions is enabled.
DBN Current Bays are provided with three overcurrent units (one per phase) with a common
pickup setting. Each unit is comprised of an instantaneous overcurrent element.
When one of the described enable functions is set to YES, the overcurrent supervision element
activates when the RMS exceeds the pickup setting value. Element resets at 0.95 times the
setting value.
If the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip Enable setting is set to YES, bay tripping by activation of the
bus differential protection (to which the bay is connected) occurs only if the bay current
activates this overcurrent element. See bay tripping logic section.
If the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip Enable setting is set to NO, bay tripping by activation of the
bus differential protection (to which the bay is connected) occurs no matter the current flow.
If the Remote End Trip setting is set to YES, the remote end trip via communications signal
can be activated (to this end the overcurrent supervision element must activate and the dynamic
zone logic must be activated). See dynamic zone logic section.
If the Remote End Trip setting is set to NO, the remote end trip via communications signal
cannot be activated.
3.3-12
BDBN0901A
3.3.6 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip

DBN Current Bays are also provided with three overcurrent units (one per phase in each current
bay unit) to supervise Breaker Failure trips. Each unit is comprised of an instantaneous
overcurrent element with the following settings: Enable and Pickup.
When this overcurrent units are disabled, breaker failure trip commands received from the
central unit are executed without supervision. When the units are enabled, for the Central Unit
signal to activate the bay tripping, the Supervision Unit must operate (RMS exceeds the pickup
setting value). Element resets at 0.95 times the setting value. (See bay tripping logic section).
3.3.7 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic and End Fault Trip Protection
The dynamic protection zone logic (detailed in figure 3.3.5 for DBP type bay and detailed
similarly for "V" type -DRV or DCV- current bays in the applicable manual), disables the bay
when it has no influence over the protection zone (i.e., open breaker). When the bay is disabled,
it is not taken into account for bus tripping (neither via the differential nor via the breaker failure
protection). The disabled bay currents are removed from the bus protection calculations. The
bay must be enabled before it regains influence over the protection zone. To activated a
disabled bay by the dynamic protection zone, the status contact input 52 Close must be
activated before current flows through the breaker (due to breaker manual closing or due to
recloser automatic closing). This input will enable the bay and its currents will be included in the
bus protection calculations.
Figure 3.3.5: Dynamic Protection Zone Logic Scheme.
3.3-13
BDBN0901A
In particular, for model DBC-C***, there is an additional time setting (T) to delay the disabling of
any bay unit caused by the activation of the dynamic zone unit. This feature is highly convenient
for those applications working with automatic closing of the breaker performed by the recloser
(see figure 3.3.6 for the DBP type bay and see similar figure for "V" type (DRV or DCV) current
bays in the applicable manual).
Figure 3.3.6: Dynamic Protection Zone Logic Scheme with Time Setting.
The signaling of disabled bays via the dynamic protection zone (or digital input) for all the
Current Bays, is on the ZIVercomPlus® Status screen and on the HMI screen: Information -
Status - Disabling.
On the other hand, if any bay has been disabled via the dynamic protection zone (or digital
input), Some Bay IED disabled by Digital Input or by Dynamic Zone digital output of the
DBN Central Unit is activated.
3.3-14
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.3.7 shows the way to set up

the CT Location setting, as a function
of the different locations schematically
shown on the same line and also
shows the status of digital inputs to be
considered for the dynamic protection
logic, as a function of the CT location.
Figure 3.3.7: Scheme of Possible Locations of CT (for

Dynamic Zone).
When the bay is disabled via the Dynamic Zone, the purpose of the End Fault Trip Protection is
detecting fault currents (higher than the pickup setting shared with the overcurrent unit for the
supervision of a differential unit trip, which activates SUP_87/EFP_RST output), activating a bay
output (EFP output), which may be sent to trip the remote end breaker of this line.
Figure 3.3.8: End Fault Trip Unit Logic.
The following information is contained in the two tables below:
- The first table shows Zone Logic characteristics as a function of the CT location;
- The second table shows the way to set up the Dynamic Zone Logic, which will be a
function of CT location as has been shown in figure 3.3.7.
3.3-15
BDBN0901A
Table 3.3-2: Dynamic Zone Characteristics as a Function of CT Location

Actual CT Dynamic Zone Application
Location
CT on the Bus Dynamic Zone = f(52) Î In this case the Dynamic Zone logic depends only on the breaker status.
Side, towards
Bus Usually, the bus differential protected zone is defined by the location of the current transformers.
Dynamic Zone logic allows for an extension of the protection zone up to the breaker since bays are
disabled when the breaker is open. In case of a fault between the CT and the breaker, the
differential protection sends a fast bus trip command to clear the fault. If the Dynamic Zone logic is
disabled the bays with open breakers are enabled. In this case, a fault between the C.T. and the
breaker is considered external to the bus differential protection. The line protection will trip for this
fault without clearing, and the fault will be cleared when breaker failure protection activates.
CT Bus Side, Dynamic Zone = f(52). If the bay is disabled via the
towards 89-LIN Dynamic Zone, and a fault occurs
In this case, the Dynamic Zone logic depends only on the in this line such that current flows
breaker status, so that if the breaker is opened the bay is through the bay CT, this current is
disabled via the Dynamic Zone. not taken into account for the bus
protection.
CT Bus Side, Dynamic Zone = f(52,89-LIN) Î In this case the Dynamic
towards Line Zone logic is a function of the breaker status and the line
disconnecting switch status. Furthermore, if the “Remote End
Trip Unit via communication
channel” is enabled (via the
The bay disabling via the Dynamic Zone occurs when the applicable setting), the bay
breaker is open or the line disconnecting switch is open. The communication channel output will
transfer disconnecting switch (89-TR) status is not to be activate, which may be sent for
considered (if it exists), therefore, the 89-TR Supervision tripping the remote end breaker
must be set to NO. thus expediting a fault clearance.
CT Line Side Dynamic Zone = f(52,89-LIN,89-TR)Î In this case, the
Dynamic Zone logic is a function of the breaker status, line
If the Remote End Trip Unit via the
disconnecting switch status and transfer disconnecting switch
communication channel is
status.
disabled, the fault will have to be
cleared by the remote end distance
The bay disabling via the Dynamic Zone occurs when the protection in the second zone time.
breaker is open or when the line disconnecting switch is
open, provided the transfer disconnecting switch is open. The
Dynamic Zone logic will not activate (bay will not disable) if
the transfer disconnecting switch is closed.
CT in Bus Tie If the bay is a bus tie, the Dynamic Zone logic will only consider the breaker status.
Using the Dynamic Zone in a tie is an advantage when a fault occurs between the CT and the 52
(Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit), the breaker being open. Under this situation, if the Dynamic Zone logic is
enabled, the faulted bus differential protection trips the bus quickly, clearing the fault, whereas if
the Dynamic Zone logic is disabled, the no-fault bus differential protection trips and the fault is not
cleared, and will have to be cleared by the faulted bus trip via the breaker failure activation or via
the Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit.
3.3-16
BDBN0901A
Table 3.3-3: Dynamic Zone Settings as a Function of CT Location

Actual CT Setting: CT 89-LIN 89-TR digital Setting:89-TR Remarks
location location digital inputs inputs set Supervision
set up? up? Enable
CT bus CT NO YES NO Dynamic Zone = f (52). For the
side between (if required for (this setting is Dynamic Zone logic operation, set up
towards 89-LIN and transfer bus) not considered) of the line disconnecting switch (89-
bus bus LIN) digital inputs is not required,
NO NO
although there is no problem if they
(if no transfer (this setting is are configured (e.g., to know the
or bus exists) not considered) disconnecting switch status).
C. bus
side, The (89-TR) transfer disconnecting
towards switch digital inputs are only
89-LIN necessary if the setup with the transfer
bus so requires. In this case the 89-TR
Supervision Enable is not
considered.
CT bus CT YES YES NO Dynamic Zone = f (52, 89-LIN). In this
side, between (if required for case, the Dynamic Zone logic is a
towards 89-LIN and transfer bus) function of the (89-LIN) line
line line disconnecting switch status, but if the
user is not willing to set up these
NO NO
digital inputs, the (89-TR)
(if there is no (this setting is Supervision Enable must be set to
transfer bus) not considered) NO, and the Dynamic Zone will only
be a function of the breaker status.
The (89-TR) transfer disconnecting

switch digital inputs will only be
required if setup with the transfer bus
so requires. If these inputs are set up,
the 89-TR Supervision Enable must
be set to NO. Whereas if these inputs
are not set up, the 89-TR Supervision
Enable setting has no influence in this
case.
CT line CT YES YES YES Dynamic Zone = f (52, 89-LIN, 89-
side between (if required for TR). For the Dynamic Zone setting
89-LIN and transfer bus) bear in mind that if the 89-TR inputs
line are set up, the 89-TR Supervision
NO NO
Enable must be set to YES so that the
(if there is no (this setting is Dynamic Zone may only be activated
transfer bus) not considered) when the 89-TR is open.
CT in a bus This setting NO YES NO Dynamic Zone = f (52). In this case,
tie is not (if required for (this setting is the Dynamic Zone logic depends only
considered transfer bus) not considered) on the breaker status. Set up of the
no matter 89-TR inputs is not required (unless
NO
how it is set they are essential as in the case of a
up). (if there is no Combined Coupling).
transfer bus)
3.3-17
BDBN0901A
3.3.8 Bay Disabling

A bay is taken into account for bus protection purposes (differential and breaker failure) only if it
is enabled.
For the Current Bay to be enabled, the bay Enable setting must be set to YES (necessary but
not a sufficient condition), the bay not being disabled by digital input neither by Dynamic Zone.
Figure 3.3.9: Bay Enable Logic for Bus Protection.
3.3.8.a Bay Disabling by Setting

For a bay to be enabled the bay enable General setting must be set to YES.
If a DBC-connected bay is disabled via setting, the HMI menu Information - Status - Alarms -
shows said bay status.
3.3.8.b Bay Disabling by Dynamic Zone

A bay enabled via setting can be disabled via Dynamic Zone Logic Activation, as shown in the
Dynamic Zone Logic section.
3.3-18
BDBN0901A
3.3.8.c Bay Disabling by Digital Input

For the Current Bay to be disabled via digital input, bay input Current Bay Disabling must be
activated provided current in this bay is not present (if current is present, no effect will be
produced by the activation of this input). After bay has been disabled via digital input, the effect
remains even when a current is present, until said input is deactivated. This behavior is
schematically shown in Figure 3.3.10.
Figure 3.3.10: Disabling Logic by Digital Input.
In order to consider current is not present in the bay, the DBN takes Current to Disable setting
as a reference (included in Central Unit General Settings) and considers there is no current if all
three current phases RMS value measured by the bay is below this value.
If the Bay is disabled by Digital Input:
- The In Service output from this Bay is not affected.

- The metering is active but not included in any Bus Differential Protection Unit
calculations, allowing for maintenance testing.
- If communications are lost between this Bay and the DBC due, for example, to a break
in the optic fiber, the protection differential blocking does not apply (since, at this time,
this Bay is not taken into account for bus protection).
- The Bay protection units continue operational (the relevant outputs occur in the Bay),
but they no longer trip the bus to which this bay is connected.
3.3-19
BDBN0901A
The following steps to carry out bay maintenance tests can be followed through bay disabling
via digital input (with no need for changing settings, namely, keeping the bay enable setting):
- Open the line breaker.

- Activate the Current Bay Disabling input (check such activation via ZIVercomPlus® or
the Information menu on the HMI: Information - Status - Disabling).
- Perform the test. You can power down the Bay.
- Confirm (via ZIVercomPlus® or the Information menu on the HMI: Information - Status
- Presences) that the Bay communicates properly with the DBN Central Unit.
- Deactivating the Current Bay Disabling input (before the current circulates through the
bay, so that this current is taken into account for protection purposes).
- Check the Bay activation (via ZIVercomPlus® or the Information menu on the HMI:
Information - Status - Disabling).
- Close the line breaker.
DBP-B Settings: Breaker Failure Unit (3 Groups)

Enable YES / NO NO
Single-Phase BF Pickup 0.1 - 12 A 0,01 A 1A
Three-Phase BF Pickup 0.1 - 12 A 0.01 A 1A
Single-Phase BF Time Delay 0.00 - 5.00 s 0.01 s 0.5 s
Three-Phase BF Time Delay 0.00 - 5.00 s 0.01 s 0.5 s
Three-Phase No Load Time Delay 0.00 - 5.00 s 0.01 s 0.5 s
Retrip Time Delay 0.00 - 5.00 s 0.01 s 0.5 s
Previously Failed BF Time Delay 0.00 - 5.00 s 0.01 s 0.5 s
Retrip Type Retrip Disabled 0 - Retrip
(see Note) One Pole Disabled
With Retrip Output Relay
Without Retrip Output Relay
Note: as shown in external connection drawings (see applicable Annex), the DBP-B type current bay includes
single phase and three phase retripping outputs that make possible to configure the operation outputs as
shown in the following table, as a function of the Retrip Type setting. The retrip function can be disabled also
via this setting. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual (there is no Retrip Type
setting).
DBC General Settings (1 Group)

Trip Time Limit 10 - 1000 cycles 1 cycle 1000 cycles
Reset Trip Time 2 - 20 cycles 1 cycle 3 cycles
Current for Disabling 0.05 – 2.00 A 0.01 A 0.15 A
3.3-20
BDBN0901A
Bay Settings: 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection (3 Groups)

50 Supervision of 87 Trip Enable YES / NO - YES
End Fault Protection Enable YES / NO - YES
50 Supervision and End Fault Protection Pickup 0.1 - 100 A 0.01 A 2A
Bay Settings: 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip (3 Groups)

Enable YES / NO - YES
Pickup 0.1 - 100 A 0.01 A 2A
Bay Settings: Dynamic Zone (3 Groups)

Enable YES / NO - NO
Time Delay 0 - 60 s. 0.01 s 0s
89TR Supervision Enable YES / NO - NO
CT Location 0: Between 89-LIN and Bus - Between 89-LIN
1: Between 89-LIN and Line and Bus
Bay General Settings (1 Group)

Enabled YES / NO - NO
• DBC General Settings: HMI Access

6 - BAY #6
7 - BAY #7
…
4 - LOGIC 4 - BUS 4
... 6 - CURRENT FOR DISABLING
7 - TRIP TIME LIMIT
3.3-21
BDBN0901A
• Breaker Failure Settings (Bay): HMI Access

1 - OPERATIONS 1 - BAY # 1 1 - PROTECTION
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - BAY # 2 2 - LOGIC
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - BAY # 3
4 - INFORMATION 4 - BAY # 4
5 - BAY # 5
6 - BAY # 6
7 - BAY # 7
...
0 - GENERAL 0 - 87 SUPERVISION 0 - ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1 - BF SUPERVISION 1 - 1PHASE 50BF PICKUP
2 - LOGIC 2 - BREAKER FAILURE 2 - 3PHASE 50BF PICKUP
3 - DYNAMIC ZONE 3 - 1PHASE 50BF TIME
4 - END FAULT PROTECTION 4 - 3PHASE 50BF TIME
5 - NO LOAD 50BF TIME
6 - RETRIP MODE
7 - RETRIP TIME
8 - TIME PREV. FAILED BF
• 50 Supervision of 87 Trip Settings: HMI Access

5 - BAY # 5
6 - BAY # 6
7 - BAY # 7
...
0 - GENERAL 0 - 87 SUPERVISION 0 - ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1 - BF SUPERVISION 1 - PICKUP
2 - LOGIC 2 - BREAKER FAILURE
3 - DYNAMIC ZONE
4 - END FAULT PROTECTION
3.3-22
BDBN0901A
• End Fault Protection Unit Settings: HMI Access

5 - BAY # 5
6 - BAY # 6
7 - BAY # 7
...
0 - GENERAL 0 - 87 SUPERVISION 0- ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1 - BF SUPERVISION
2 - LOGIC 2 - BREAKER FAILURE
3 - DYNAMIC ZONE
4- END FAULT PROTECTION
• 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Settings: HMI Access

5 - BAY # 5
6 - BAY # 6
7 - BAY # 7
...
0 - GENERAL 0- 87 SUPERVISION 0 - ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1- BF SUPERVISION 1 - PICKUP
2 - LOGIC 2- BREAKER FAILURE
3- DYNAMIC ZONE
• Dynamic Zone Logic Settings: HMI Access

5 - BAY # 5
6 - BAY # 6
7 - BAY # 7
...
3.3-23
BDBN0901A
0 - GENERAL 0- 87 SUPERVISION 0 - ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1- BF SUPERVISION 1 - DYNAMIC Z.DELAY TIME
2 - LOGIC 2- BREAKER FAILURE 2 - 89TR SUPERVISION
3- DYNAMIC ZONE 3 - LOCATION CT - 89L

3.3.10.a Digital Inputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit
Table 3.3-4: Digital Inputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit
(In the ZIVercomPlus® communicating with the DBN)
52_O Breaker Open Status (DBP-B) Digital inputs to represent the
52_C Breaker Close Status (DBP-B) bay breaker status (see Note).
BFIR External BF Activation - Phase R (DBP-B) Single phase breaker failure
BFIS External BF Activation - Phase S (DBP-B) initiate, which will be
supervised by single phase
BFIT External BF Activation - Phase T (DBP-B)
overcurrent elements before
the single phase timer starts
counting.
BFI3ph External BF Activation - 3-Phase (DBP-B) Three phase breaker failure
initiate, which will be
supervised by three phase
the three phase timer starts
counting.
BFI_NC External BF Activation - No Load 3-Phase (DBP-B) Three phase breaker failure
initiate, which will progress if
the breaker is closed.
BFIPF Previously Failed BF Initiated (DBP-B) Active input when the breaker
is blocked on low SF6
pressure.
BF_PF_BLK Previously Failed BF Block (DBP-B) Blocks progress of previously
failed breaker failure.
EXT_BFI External BF Initiated (DBP-B) Activates breaker failure
instantaneously.
EXT_BF_BLK External BF Block (DBP-B) Blocks external breaker failure
activation.
RST_BF Breaker Failure Reset (DBP-B) Level Input to reset the
latched Breaker Failure bay
signal (BF_L).
3.3-24
BDBN0901A
Table 3.3-4: Digital Inputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit
IN_BF_RT_BLK Breaker Failure and Retrip Outputs Block Activation of this signal
Activated (DBP-B) disables the element, blocking
all outputs, except the external
breaker failure.
BAY_TRIP_BLK Bay Trip Block (DBP-B) Level input to block bay
tripping (TRIP, TRIP_BF and
TRIP_DIFF) and retripping
(RETRIP, RETRIP_R,
RETRIP_S, RETRIP_T,
RETRIP_RST) activation
(applicable when the bay is
transferred for breaker
maintenance operations and
breaker tripping on transfer
bus tripping is not desired).
RST_BF Breaker Failure Reset (DBC) Level Input to reset the sealed
breaker failure bay signals
(BF_L) and DBC (BF_GLB_M,
TRIP_BF_B1_M,
TRIP_BF_B2_M, TRIP_BF_B3_M
and TRIP_BF_B4_M (and
TRIP_BF_B5M(*)).
DI_ACT_BL_BF&RETRIP Breaker Failure and Retrip Outputs Block Pulse digital signal to activate
Activated (DBC) blocking signal “BF and Retrip
by DI from DBC or DBP” of all
DBC connected bays.
DI_DEACT_BL_BF&RETRIP Breaker Failure and Retrip Outputs Block Pulse digital signal to
Deactivated (DBC) deactivate blocking signal “BF
and Retrip by DI from DBC or
DBP” of all DBC connected
bays.
Note: In DBP-B the following input configurations to show breaker status can be used:
a. configure only input “52_O” (activated input means open breaker, deactivated input means closed
breaker).
b. configure only input “52_C” (activated input means closed breaker, deactivated input means open
breaker).
c. configure inputs “52_O” and “52_C”, in which case the breaker status is shown in the following table:
“52_O” Input “52_C” Input 52 Status considered by the DBN

Activated Deactivated Open
Deactivated Activated Close
Activated Activated Unknown
Deactivated Deactivated Unknown
For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual (digital inputs are similar
to DBP-B inputs, except that they must be configured through the link with "V" type bay
ZIVercomPlus®).
3.3-25
BDBN0901A
3.3.10.b Digital Inputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic
Table 3.3-5: Digital Inputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic (DBP-B)

52 Closed DZ 52 Close for Dynamic Zone Resets Dynamic Zone
activation, when this has
occurred by open breaker.
52_O Breaker Open Status
Digital inputs representing the
52_C Breaker Close Status bay breaker status (see Note).
89-LIN_O Line Disconnecting Switch Close Both inputs are required to
represent the line
89-LIN_C Line Disconnecting Switch Open disconnecting switch status.
89-TR_O Transfer Disconnecting Switch Close Both inputs are required to
represent the transfer
89-TR_C Transfer Disconnecting Switch Open disconnecting switch status.
This status is necessary for
transfer bus logic in which
combined couplers are
involved (logic 1).
Note: In DBP-B the following input configurations to show breaker status can be used:
d. configure only input “52_O” (activated input means open breaker, deactivated input means closed
breaker).
e. configure only input “52_C” (activated input means closed breaker, deactivated input means open
breaker).
f. configure inputs “52_O” and “52_C”, in which case the breaker status is shown in the following table:
“52_O” Input “52_C” Input 52 Status considered by the DBN

ZIVercomPlus®).
3.3.10.c Digital Inputs of Bay Disabling
Table 3.3-6: Digital Inputs of Bay Disabling

DIS_BAY Current Bay Disabling Input to disable the current
bay when no current flows in
the same.
ZIVercomPlus®).
3.3-26
BDBN0901A

3.3.11.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit
Table 3.3-7:Auxiliary Outputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit

BF&RET_BLC BF and Retrip Outputs Block (DBC) Shows that the DBC is
transmitting BF and Retrip
output blocking signals to all
bays to which it is connected
(even if the bay is not
enabled).
BF_A Phase R Breaker Failure (DBP-B)
BF_B Phase S Breaker Failure (DBP-B)
BF_C Phase T Breaker Failure (DBP-B)
BF_3PH Three-Phase Breaker Failure (DBP-B) Activation of the
BF_3PH_NL No load Three-Phase Breaker Failure (DBP-B) corresponding breaker failure.
BF_INT BF by Internal Actuation (DBP-B)
BF_PF Previously Failed BF Activation (DBP-B)
BF_EXT BF by External Activation (DBP-B)
BF_L BF Trip Seal (DBP-B) Activation of the latched
breaker until it resets via
digital input (DBC’s or bay’s)
or via command.
RETRIP_R Phase R Retrip (DBP-B) Retrip outputs. Can be
RETRIP_S Phase S Retrip (DBP-B) configured in auxiliary outputs
and bay contact outputs
RETRIP_T Phase T Retrip (DBP-B)
through setting “Retrip Type”
RETRIP_RST Three Phase Retrip (DBP-B) (see Note).
RETRIP Retrip (DBP-B)
BF_Coupler_1 Coupler 1 BF Activated (DBP-B) If the bay is transferred, it can
BF_Coupler_2 Coupler 2 BF Activated (DBP-B) be of interest, depending on
the application, to speed up
BF_Coupler_3 Coupler 3 BF Activated (DBP-B)
the remote end trip in case of
BF_Coupler_4 Coupler 4 BF Activated (DBP-B) coupler breaker failure (see
transfer bus logic section).
PKUP BF Pickup (DBP-B) General internal Breaker
Failure pickup (single phase,
three phase, no load three
phase). The External BF is not
taken into account.
BF&RET_BLC BF and Retrip Outputs Block by DI from DBC or If the signal is active in the
DBP(DBP-B) bay, breaker failure and retrip
unit of this bay is disabled.
Note: as shown in external connection drawings (see applicable Annex), the current bay incorporates single
phase and three phase retrip outputs to be able to configure their operate outputs as shown in the Table 3.3-8,
as a function of the setting “Retrip Type”. The retrip function can also be disabled through this setting.
For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual (auxiliary outputs are
similar to DBP-B outputs, except that they must be configured through the link with "V" type bay
ZIVercomPlus®).
3.3-27
BDBN0901A
Table 3.3-8: Events of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit

Group Description
Single Bus, General Sealing BF Reset (Belongs to DBC)
Lockout, Buses
Trips Blockings
and Unblockings,
87 Supervision.
Bay #lb Phase R Breaker Failure Activated
Bay #lb Phase S Breaker Failure Activated
Bay #lb Phase T Breaker Failure Activated
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb Three-Phase Breaker Failure Activated
Units Activated. Bay #lb Three-Phase No Load Breaker Failure Activated
Bay #lb Previously Failed Breaker Failure Activated
Bay #lb External Breaker Failure Activated
Bay #lb Retrip Activated
Bay #lb Phase R Breaker Failure Deactivated
Bay #lb Phase S Breaker Failure Deactivated
Bay #lb Phase T Breaker Failure Deactivated
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb Three-Phase Breaker Failure Deactivated
Units Deactivated Bay #lb Three-Phase No Load Breaker Failure Deactivated
Bay #lb Previously Failed Breaker Failure Deactivated
Bay #lb External Breaker Failure Deactivated
Bay #lb Retrip Deactivated
#lb = 1 to 28 (in each current bay)

®
Note: in the ZIVercomPlus linked to “V” type (DRV or DCV) bay, only events specific to the bay can be
visualized (refer to the applicable manual).
3.3-28
BDBN0901A
3.3.11.b Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or

End Fault Protection Unit
Table 3.3-9:Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or

End Fault Protection Unit
SUP50_87 / EFP_R 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Trip Phase overcurrent pickups.
Protection Phase R (DBP-B)
SUP50_87 / EFP_S 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Trip
Protection Phase S (DBP-B)
SUP50_87 / EFP_T 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Trip
Protection Phase T (DBP-B)
SUP50_87 / EFP_RST 50 Supervision 87 Trip or End Fault Trip Phase overcurrent pickup.
Protection OR Phase RST (DBP-B) The activation of this bay
signal allows for trip 87 and
trip via communications
(should the applicable
permission be enabled).
EFP End Fault Trip Protection Activation (DBP-B) The remote end trip via
communications activates
when supervision is enabled,
the overcurrent element
picked up and dynamic zone
signal activated. (See
Dynamic Zone and trip via
communications logic
section).
ZIVercomPlus®).
Table 3.3-10: Events of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection Unit
Group Description
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb End Fault Trip Activated
Units Activated.
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb End Fault Trip Deactivated
Units Deactivated.
3.3-29
BDBN0901A
3.3.11.c Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure

Trip Unit
Table 3.3-11: Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit
SUP_50_BF_R 50 Supervision of BF by Phase R Phase overcurrent pickups.
SUP_50_BF_S 50 Supervision of BF by Phase S
SUP_50_BF_T 50 Supervision of BF by Phase T
SUP_50_BF_RST 50 Supervision of BF OR Phases RST Any phase overcurrent pickup.
The activation of this bay
signal (only possible if the
element is enabled) allows
tripping via BF.
ZIVercomPlus®).
3.3.11.d Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Dynamic Zone Logic
Table 3.3-12: Auxiliary Outputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic

DZ Dynamic Zone Logic Activated (DBP-B) Shows bay Dynamic Zone
element activation.
Bay_Disbld_DI_DZ Bay IED Disabled by Digital Input or by Dynamic Shows bay is disabled via
Zone (DBP-B) Digital Input or Dynamic Zone.
Bay_Disbld_DI_DZ Some Bay IED Disabled by DI or DZ (DBC) This output shows if any of the
bays linked to DBC is disabled
via the digital input or dynamic
zone (no matter if it is or is not
enabled by setting).
ZIVercomPlus®).
Table 3.3-13: Events of the Dynamic Zone Logic

Group Description
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb Disabling by Digital Input or by Dynamic Zone
Units Activated.
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb Disabling by Digital Input or by Dynamic Zone Deactivated
Units Deactivated.
Note: see trip via communications element event in 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection section.
3.3-30
BDBN0901A
3.3.11.e Auxiliary Outputs and Events of Bay Disabling
Table 3.3-14: Auxiliary Outputs of Bay Disabling

Bay_Disbld_Setting Bay IED Disabled by Setting Activated output when bay
enable setting is set to NO.
Bay_Disbld_DI_DZ Bay IED Disabled by Digital Input or by Dynamic Shows bay is disabled via
Zone (DBP-B) Digital Input or Dynamic Zone.
Bay_Disbld_DI_DZ Some Bay IED Disabled by DI or DZ (DBC) This output shows if any of the
bays linked to DBC is disabled
via the digital input or dynamic
zone (no matter if it is or is not
enabled by setting).
ZIVercomPlus®).
Table 3.3-15: Events of Bay Disabling

Group Description
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb Disabling by Digital Input or by Dynamic Zone
Units Activated.
Bay #lb Protection Bay #lb Disabling by Digital Input or by Dynamic Zone Deactivated
Units Deactivated.
3.3-31
BDBN0901A
3.3.12 Units Test

3.3.12.a Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit Test
To check this unit, configure the auxiliary outputs for the Breaker Failure function R, S and T,
Three-Phase Breaker Failure and No Load Three-Phase Breaker Failure. Disable all the units
except the Breaker Failure Unit. Also set the digital inputs corresponding to breaker status and
External Three-Phase and Three-Phase No Load Breaker Failure Pickup of phase R, S and T.
Configure also the second LED as latched breaker failure and one DI for Latched Breaker
Failure Reset. Check after each test the activation of said LED and its reset via bay or DBC
reset input or via the applicable operation.
• Three-Phase Breaker Failure
Set the reset levels of the Three-Phase Breaker Failure units to 0.7 A and their time to 0.5 s.
Apply a 1A current by phases and maintain the current. Activate the External Three-Phase
Breaker Failure input; the Breaker Failure Unit will activate in a period of time between 0.485 s
and 0.515 s.
• Single-Phase Breaker Failure
Set the reset levels of the Single-Phase Breaker Failure units to 0.7 A and their time to 0.5 s.
Apply a 1A current through phase R and activate the digital input for External Breaker Failure
Pickup of phase R. Maintain the current. The Breaker Failure Unit will activate in a period of
time between 0.485 s and 0.515 s. Then repeat the test for phases S and T.
• Three-Phase no Load Breaker Failure
Set its timing to 0.5 s. Activate the digital input for External Three-Phase No Load Breaker
Failure Pickup (with closed breaker status). The Breaker Failure Unit will activate in a period of
time between 0.485 s and 0.515 s.
• Previously Failed Breaker Failure
Configure the Previously Failed Breaker Failure output. Configure also Previously Failed
Breaker Failure Initiate and Previously Failed Breaker Failure Blocking signals in two DIs.
Set Previously Failed BF timer to 0.5s and No Load Three Phase Breaker Failure timer to 2 s.
Activate the No Load Three Phase Breaker Failure External Pickup input (with close breaker
status); the Breaker Failure (previously failed) element will activate after 0.485 to 0.515 s.
Check Latched Breaker Failure signal activation and reset.
Activate the Previously Failed Breaker Failure Blocking DI, repeat the test and check that the
Breaker Failure does not activate.
3.3-32
BDBN0901A
• Breaker Failure by External Activation

Configure the Breaker Failure by External Actuation output. Configure External Breaker Failure
Initiate and External Breaker Failure Blocking signal (IFI_EXT) in two DIs.
Activate input EXT_BFI and check instantaneous activation of Latched Breaker Failure signal.
Disable the element, repeat the test and check that the Latched Breaker Failure activates.
Activate the External Breaker Failure Blocking DI, repeat the test and check that the Latched
Breaker Failure does not activate.
• DBP-B Retrip Function
Configure the Retrip output (RETRIP) in one of the auxiliary outputs, set Retrip Type in
Without Retrip Output Relay (therefore enabled) and set timer to 0.5 s. Set single phase
Breaker Failure Reset level to 0.7 A. Apply 1 A through phase A and activate phase A Breaker
Failure External Pickup input. The Retrip output (RETRIP) activates in 0.485 s to 0.515 s.
If the bay features 2 input and output boards, repeat the above test setting With Retrip Output
Relay in Retrip Type. Check that when retrip output activates, second bay board SP4 contacts
close.
Repeat the above test setting One Pole in Retrip Type. Check that when Retrip output
activates, first bay board SP1 contacts close.
• “V” Type Bay Retrip Function
The test could be done in the same way as for the DBP-B, but taking into account that for the
“V” type bay there is no Retrip Type setting and therefore checking the SP contacts does not
apply.
3.3-33
BDBN0901A
3.3.12.b 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection Unit Test

Run this test on each of the Line Bay Units.
For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual. Type test for DBP-B
type bays is described below.
Apply current in the phase R input and, with the settings as in the followings tables (Table 3.3-
16 for DBP-B of 5 A rated current and Table 3.3-17 for DBP-B of 1 A rated current), check that
the phase R pickup status indicator of this unit (through the corresponding auxiliary output or
corresponding indicator in the ZIVercomPlus® bay status screen) goes to "1" and remains
stable when the current reaches a value between VA_MIN and VA_MAX.
Check that the pickup indicator resets for current values between VR_MIN and VR_MAX.
Table 3.3-16: Test for 5A rated current (50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection
Unit)
SETTING VA_MIN VA_MAX VR_MIN VR_MAX
0.5 0.485 0.515 0.461 0.489
2 1.94 2.06 1.843 1.957
10 9.7 10.3 9.215 9.785
Table 3.3-17: Test for 1A rated current (50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection
Unit)
0.3 0.291 0.309 0.276 0.294
1 0.97 1.03 0.9215 0.9785
5 4.85 5.15 4.607 4.892
Check Tables for the S and T phases considering the corresponding pickup indicators.
3.3-34
BDBN0901A
3.3.12.c 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit Test

Run this test on each of the Line Bay Units.
For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current bays refer to the applicable manual. Type test for DBP-B
type bays is described below.
Apply current in the phase R input and, with the settings as in the followings tables (Table 3.3-
18 for DBP-B of 5 A rated current and Table 3.3-19 for DBP-B of 1 A rated current), check that
the phase R pickup status indicator of this unit (SUP_50_BF_R) goes to "1" and remains stable
when the current reaches a value between VA_MIN and VA_MAX.
Check that the pickup indicator resets for current values between VR_MIN and VR_MAX.
Table 3.3-18: Test for 5A rated current (50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit)
0.5 0.485 0.515 0.461 0.489
2 1.94 2.06 1.843 1.957
10 9.7 10.3 9.215 9.785
Table 3.3-19: Test for 1A rated current (50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit)
0.3 0.291 0.309 0.276 0.294
1 0.97 1.03 0.9215 0.9785
5 4.85 5.15 4.607 4.892
Check preceding tables for the S and T phases considering the corresponding outputs
(SUP_50_BF_R and SUP_50_BF_T).
3.3-35
BDBN0901A
3.3-36
BDBN0901A
3.4 Voltage Bay
Functions

3.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3.4-2
3.4.2 Voltage Bay Connection to Bus ............................................................................... 3.4-2
3.4.3 Undervoltage Supervision Units for Bus Trip ........................................................... 3.4-2
3.4.4 Settings Ranges....................................................................................................... 3.4-3
3.4.5 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Supervision by Undervoltage ......................... 3.4-4
3.4.6 Supervision by Undervoltage Unit Test ................................................................... 3.4-5
3.4.1 Introduction
DBP-A (optional use DBN voltage bay) features one undervoltage element per phase for
differential trip supervision of the bus to which it is assigned (see bus differential trip logic
section). Therefore, if a DBN model with voltage supervision is used, as many voltage bays as
substation buses are required (up to a maximum of four voltage bays, as it is not applicable to
DBN model 12).
3.4.2 Voltage Bay Connection to Bus

To properly connect a Voltage Bay to its corresponding bus (1 - 4), the correct central unit
communications port must be used. The Central Unit communications ports (fiber optic
connector pairs) used to connect the Voltage Bays are labeled from 29 to 32. Connector 29
corresponds to bus 1, connector 30 corresponds to bus 2, connector 31 corresponds to bus 3,
and connector 32 corresponds to bus 4.
If voltage bays are present, phase and bay voltage measurements are shown in the applicable
ZIVercomPlus® status screen and the HMI information screen.
For voltage measurements to be shown as primary values, transformation ratio settings are
provided for all voltage bays.
3.4.3 Undervoltage Supervision Units for Bus Trip

DBN Voltage Bays include three undervoltage units (one per phase) for bus trip undervoltage
supervision.
The Undervoltage Supervision Unit for Bus Trip consists of an instantaneous undervoltage
element (with·Enable and Pickup settings).
When the Bay Voltage and the Undervoltage Unit are enabled, the activation or deactivation of
the unit is sent to the Central Unit. When the unit is disabled, the Voltage Bay always sends a
signal to the Central Unit indicating undervoltage conditions. The Central Unit checks for
undervoltage conditions before sending trip commands to the current bays. With the
undervoltage unit disabled, the Central Unit is always permitted to trip. Figure 3.4.1 depicts the
logic diagram of an undervoltage unit.
3.4-2
BDBN0901A
The undervoltage elements are based on the RMS Calculation of the measured voltage. Pickup
occurs when the measured value falls below the setting value. Reset occurs when the
measured value exceeds 1.05 times the setting value.
Figure 3.4.1: Undervoltage Unit Diagram.
Transformer Ratios (1 Group) - DBC

Voltage Bay #vb Transformer Ratio 1 - 4000 1 50
Supervision by Undervoltage (3 Groups) - DBP-B

Unit Enable in #vb YES / NO 1 YES
Pickup 20 - 220 V 0.01 V 40 V
#VB = 29 to 32 (Bus Voltage Bay Units)
3.4-3
BDBN0901A
3.4.5 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Supervision by

Undervoltage
Table 3.4-1: Auxiliary Outputs of the Supervision by Undervoltage Unit (DBP-B)

SUI_R Phase R Undervoltage
Activation of the undervoltage
SUI_S Phase S Undervoltage
units of each phase.
SUI_T Phase T Undervoltage
SUI_RST Undervoltage - OR phases RST Show the activation of any
phase undervoltage element.
Table 3.4-2: Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Trip Supervision (DBC)

S_SUBT_R1 Bus 1 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision
S_SUBT_S1 Bus 1 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision Activation of the undervoltage
S_SUBT_T1 Bus 1 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision units of each phase and Bus.
S_SUBT_R2 Bus 2 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision
S_SUBT_S2 Bus 2 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision If Voltage bay is enabled and
S_SUBT_T2 Bus 2 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision undervoltage supervision is
S_SUBT_R3 Bus 3 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision allowed, the supervision by
undervoltage must be activated
S_SUBT_S3 Bus 3 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision for the differential unit to
S_SUBT_T3 Bus 3 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision generate bus trips (see Bus
S_SUBT_R4 Bus 4 Phase R Undervoltage Supervision Differential Trip Logic
S_SUBT_S4 Bus 4 Phase S Undervoltage Supervision paragraph).
S_SUBT_T4 Bus 4 Phase T Undervoltage Supervision
Table 3.4-3: Events of the Supervision by Undervoltage Unit (DBP-A)

Group Description
Bay #vb Phase R Undervoltage Unit Activated
Bay #vb Protection
Bay #vb Phase S Undervoltage Unit Activated
Units Activated.
Bay #vb Phase T Undervoltage Unit Activated
Bay #vb Phase R Undervoltage Unit Deactivated
Bay #vb Protection
Bay #vb Phase S Undervoltage Unit Deactivated
Units Deactivated.
Bay #vb Phase T Undervoltage Unit Deactivated
#vb = 29 to 32 (in each voltage bay)
3.4-4
BDBN0901A
3.4.6 Supervision by Undervoltage Unit Test

Apply voltage in a phase input and, for the settings of Table 3.4-4, check that the pickup status
indicator of the undervoltage unit goes to "1" and remains stable when the voltage reaches a
value between VA_MIN and VA_MAX.
Remember that, to check the pickup of an undervoltage unit, you must start with a higher
maximum voltage than the one that you want to measure.
Table 3.4-4: Undervoltage Unit Pickups

SETTING VA_MIN VA_MAX
20 18.3 19.57
75 69.11 73.39
Check, in each case, that the reset occurs for values above 100% of the pickup value.
3.4-5
BDBN0901A
3.4-6
BDBN0901A
3.5 DBN Central Unit
Logic

3.5.1 DBN Central Unit Logic ............................................................................................ 3.5-2
3.5.2 Lockout (86) and Bus Latched Trip Unit .................................................................. 3.5-2
3.5.3 87 Block by Disagreement ....................................................................................... 3.5-4
3.5.4 Tie Blind Spot Unit ................................................................................................... 3.5-4
3.5.5 Bus Coupler ............................................................................................................. 3.5-5
3.5.5.a Buses Coupler Examples ................................................................................... 3.5-6
3.5.6 Logic of Transfer Bus with Combined Coupler ...................................................... 3.5-11
3.5.6.a Differential Unit Blocking due to Transfer Logic ............................................... 3.5-12
3.5.6.b Example of the Application of this Logic ........................................................... 3.5-14
3.5.7 Settings Ranges..................................................................................................... 3.5-18
3.5.8 Digital Inputs of the Central Unit Logic .................................................................. 3.5-21
3.5.9 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Central Unit Logic ......................................... 3.5-23
3.5.10 Central Unit Logic Tests ........................................................................................ 3.5-26
3.5.10.a Lockout and Bus Latched Trip Test .................................................................. 3.5-26
3.5.10.b 87 Block by Disagreement Test ........................................................................ 3.5-26
3.5.10.c Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit Test ............................................................................. 3.5-28
3.5.1 DBN Central Unit Logic

DBC Logic includes the following points:
• Lockout (86) and Bus Latched Trip.

• 87 Block by Disagreement.
• Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit.
• Bus Coupler.
• Transfer Bus Logic.
Below is a detailed description of all points.
3.5.2 Lockout (86) and Bus Latched Trip Unit

Bus trips can activate the Lockout function (via the corresponding enable setting). This function
generates a logic output that blocks the closing contact. The lockout stays active and can be
reset manually via the HMI, digital inputs, or local or remote communications. The lockout is
stored in non-volatile memory.
Lockout may be caused by bus tripping upon the operation of a Differential Unit, operation of a
Breaker Failure Unit or activation of a Bus Trip Digital Input. The operations which will active the
Lockout can be selected by 3 different settings. By Configuration settings (Operation
Permission) can be chosen the way to reset the lockout (keyboard, front port, remote port or
digital input).
The logic described in next figure is applicable only in case the lockout has any setting
permission as YES. When the signal TRIP (Protection Trip) is activated, the signal LOCKOUT
will be activated (Lockout signal) and will remain so even if the signal TRIP drops. The DBC
(Central Unit) Lockout signal occurs upon a protection trip of any bus, whereas the current bay
Lockout signal occurs in all bays connected to the tripped bus.
Once the TRIP (Protection Trip) signal is deactivated, the LOCKOUT output will reset upon
receiving any of the reset commands via HMI or communication channels (RST_LOCKOUT1)
or via DBC digital input (RST_LOCKOUT2) provided resets are allowed via these channels.
Reset may be done only after a TRIP signal reset.
3.5-2
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.5.1: Logic Diagram of the Lockout (86) Function.
On the other hand, Central Unit output signals showing a bus trip may be latched until lockout
reset (outputs TRIP_LOCKOUT1, TRIP_LOCKOUT 2, TRIP_LOCKOUT 3 and
TRIP_LOCKOUT 4), provided the corresponding lockout is enabled. The Latched Trip Logic of
the Bus “X” is shown in figure 3.5.2.
Figure 3.5.2: Latched Trip Logic of the Bus “X”.
3.5-3
BDBN0901A
3.5.3 87 Block by Disagreement

As stated in the Differential Supervision Unit section, Differential Block By Disagreement enable
is possible. In this way if the Differential Supervision Unit is activated with the Main Differential
Unit not activating before the block timer setting, the differential trip is blocked in the four buses
(tagged DIS in the status screen), as described in the operation principle section.
Blocking by disagreement could be activated on saturated external fault condition producing a

differential current above the differential supervision characteristic but not activating the Main
Differential Unit owing to the nature of the external fault, this situation being maintained for a
time above the disagreement block setting.
Note: as a general rule the user opts to disable this blocking as the differential alarm will also activate under
this type of situation blocking only the differential element of the affected bus.
3.5.4 Tie Blind Spot Unit

The Tie Blind Spot Unit is applied for fault clearance in case of saturated faults between CT and
Tie 52 (as shown in the following figure).
Figure 3.5.3: Fault in the Tie Blind Spot.
Under the situation in the figure the fault occurrence trips bus 2 differential, so that breakers of
bays 2 and 3 open, but the fault is still fed through bus 1. Then, if the Tie Blind Spot element is
enabled, when the tie bay receives open breaker information, the tie blind spot timer starts
counting. When the timer times out, the DBN considers the tie current zero and, therefore, bus
1 differential trip activates, and the fault clears.
3.5-4
BDBN0901A
3.5.5 Bus Coupler

DBC logic can include up to four bays set as bus ties. Each of these four ties can be of different
type. In this way the DBN can be applied to substations with many varied configurations.
When a Current Bay is to be used as a bus coupler, the General setting of connection to the
Bus must be set to 0.
DBN systems are provided with up to four possible bus couplers. The following setups may be
introduced for every coupler:
• Bay Number selected for ties functions (any Current Bay may be selected to perform
ties functions).
• Tie Type:
- No Tie, in which case this bay will not be used as a tie.
- With a Current Transformer, which means the coupler only collects a single
current measurement, which the DBN adds to one bus, keeping the sign and
changing the sign when added to the other bus. The bus to which the current is
added, keeping its sign is the bus selected as the setting Direct Bus of # Tie. The
bus to which the current is added with the opposite sign is the bus selected as the
setting Reverse Bus of # Tie.
- With Two Current Transformers, which means two Current Bays are required for
the tie, one bay for each bus. In this case, each bay used as a tie collects the
measurement and adds it to the bus selected as the setting Direct Bus of # Tie.
The other bus which the tie is connected to must be selected as the setting
Reverse Bus of # Tie, as this setting is used in case busses are reduced to a
single bus or in case of a tie breaker failure.
• Buses (Direct and Reverse) to be connected through this coupler.
- Buses 1 to 4 (or 5, depending on the model) may be set for the settings Direct Bus
and Reverse Bus of the # Tie. In this case, bays to be used as ties must NOT have
any Disconnecting Switch status input set up.
- If 0 is selected in one of the coupler busses (Direct or Reverse), the selected bus
will be given by the status of the Disconnecting Switch set up in the bay. In this
case, Disconnecting Switch status inputs MUST be set up.
- If it comes to a longitudinal-transversal tie, one bus must be set as 0L and the other
as 0. Bus 0L is given by the status of special disconnecting switches for the long-trv
tie. Whereas bus 0 is given by the status of normal bus disconnecting switches.
• The bus tie Logic setting is used for combined coupling cases and longitudinal
transversal tie cases. This setting can take the following values:
- No: no special logic for this coupler.
- Logic 1: a Combined Coupler logic for transfer bus. The operation of this coupler is
explained in the transfer bus logic section.
- Long-Transv.: a Longitudinal-Transversal Coupler, i.e., a coupler connected both
to the direct and reverse bus via the bus connection Disconnecting Switches status
inputs. In this case, settings of connection to the Direct and Reverse Bus include
option 0L in ZIVercomPlus® (option 5 in HMI for 4 Buses models or option 6 in HMI
for models 12 -5 Buses-) to indicate the special Disconnecting Switches connection
side for the Longitudinal-Transversal Coupler.
• Setting Bus Connected to 89-bypass, is used in cases of combined coupling. States
the bus (1 to 4 or 5 depending on model) to which the combined coupling bypass
disconnecting switch is connected (see examples below). This setting must be 0 when it
does not come to a combined coupling (with “logic 1”) with 89-bypass.
3.5-5
BDBN0901A
3.5.5.a Buses Coupler Examples

Example 1: Coupler 1 configuration: 1 current transformer, Bay 2, Direct Bus 1 and Reverse
Bus 2. This means that the bay 2 measurement will be added with its polarity to bus 1 and will
be added with the reverse polarity to bus 2. In this case, bay 2 MUST NOT have any input set
up as Disconnecting Switch status.
Example 2: Coupler 1 configuration: 1 current transformer, Bay 6, Direct Bus 0 and Reverse
Bus 3. This means that the bay 6 measurement will be added with its polarity to bus indicated
by Disconnecting Switch inputs and will be added with reverse polarity to bus 3.
Example 3: Setting 2 current transformers in couplers 1 and 2.

Coupler 1 configuration: Bay 6, Direct Bus 1 and Reverse Bus 2. This means that the bay 6
measurement will be added with its polarity to the bus 1.
Coupler 2 configuration: Bay 4, Direct Bar 2 and Reverse Bar 1. This means that the bay 4
measurement will be added with its polarity to bus 2.
Different types of ties and their corresponding settings are shown next. In order for equipment to
be properly set up, the polarity of all line bay current transformers must be the same. In case
polarity of one of the line bays should be incorrectly wired or should be opposite to the rest of
bays, the bay current polarity of every phase may be inverted via the Reverse Polarity setting
(see General Bay Settings). The following figures show tie polarity settings according to line bay
polarity taken as reference (L1).
3.5-6
BDBN0901A
• Ties with one C.T. (No Special Logics)
Figure 3.5.4: Ties with one CT.
TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4

General Setting: Bus 0 0 0 0
Logic Tie Type One CT One CT One CT One CT
Settings Direct Bus 2 1 0 3
Reverse Bus 1 2 3 0
Disconnecting Switches Status Not configured Not configured Set up for bus 1 Set up for bus 1
Inputs and 2 and 2
In the four tie types in the figure above, tie settings Logic and Bus 89-Bypass are not
applicable and must therefore be set to NO and 0 respectively.
3.5-7
BDBN0901A
• Ties with two C.T.s (No Special Logics)
Figure 3.5.5: Ties with two CTs.
TYPE 1 TYPE 2
TIE 1 TIE 2 TIE 3 TIE 4
General Setting: Bus 0 0 0 0
Logic Tie Type Two CTs Two CTs Two CTs Two CTs
Settings Direct Bus 2 1 0 3
Reverse Bus 1 2 3 0
Disconnecting Switches Status Not configured Configured for Disconnecting
Inputs Switches at bus 1 and 2
In the four tie types in the figure above, tie settings Logic and Bus 89-Bypass are not
applicable and must therefore be set to NO and 0 respectively.
3.5-8
BDBN0901A
• Longitudinal-Transversal Coupler
Figure 3.5.6: Example of Longitudinal-Transversal Coupler.
Settings of Longitudinal-Transversal Coupler in Figure

3.5.6
General Setting: Bus 0
Logic Tie Type With 1 CT
Settings Direct Bus 0L
Reverse Bus 0
Tie Logic Long.-Trv.
Bus Connected to 89-Bypass 0
Disconnecting In side 0 DI_89B1_C
Switch Status DI_89B1_O
Inputs DI_89B2_C
DI_89B2_O
In side 0L DI_89-B1L_C
DI_89-B1L_O
DI_89-B3L_C
DI_89-B3L_O
3.5-9
BDBN0901A
• Combined Coupler (with Logic 1)
Figure 3.5.7: Example of Combined Coupler.
Settings of Combined Coupler in Figure 3.5.7

General Setting: Bus 0
Logic Tie Type With 1 CT
Settings Direct Bus 0
Reverse Bus 2
Tie Logic Logic 1
Bus Connected to 89-Bypass 2
Disconnecting Switch Status Inputs DI_89B1_C
DI_89B1_O
DI_89B2_C
DI_89B2_O
DI_89-TR_C
DI_89-TR_O
DI_89-Bypass_C
DI_89-Bypass_O
Logic Setting: Transfer Bus Number 3 (for example)
For more details see section 3.5.6, Logic of Transfer Bus with Combined Coupler.
3.5-10
BDBN0901A
3.5.6 Logic of Transfer Bus with Combined Coupler

The Combined Coupler (Tie Logic 1) is used in setups with a transfer bus, when the coupler
needs sometimes being considered as a normal bay (not a tie). Although the “normal settings”
for the operation of this coupler are the settings introduced by the user, these settings are
automatically modified in the equipment as a function of the logic shown in the following figure.
Figure 3.5.8: Combined Coupler (Tie Logic 1).
3.5-11
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.5.9: Logic for Activating Condition 1 (Part of 1 Logic).
The applicable combined coupler will have different settings as a function of the status inside
logic 1, as shown in the following table.
Coupler “Normal Coupler Transferred Settings 1 Coupler Transferred Settings 2

Settings”(Coupler Settings Set
by the User)
Tie between “normal” busses Tie between a “normal” bus The coupler is not a “real” tie,
(not transferred). and the transfer bus. but operates as a line bay
connected to the corresponding
bus as a function of
disconnecting switch status.
For Logic 1 to work properly, the location of all bays CT, comprised in the substation, must be
correctly shown through the General Bay setting Location of CT relative to 89-TR (may be set
as CT Line Side or Bus Side), considering the location of the CT with respect to the connection
point between the line and the 89-TR, as shown in figure 3.5.11.
3.5.6.a Differential Unit Blocking due to Transfer Logic

• Differential Unit Blocking due to Combined Coupler Disconnecting Switches
Status
In case of failure or conflicting information in the combined coupler, when coupler 89-TR and
89-BYP are both closed or in unknown status (see next Figure), the following automatic
operation is performed:
- The blocking of the Differential Unit of the bus to which the 89-BYP of the combined
coupler is connected. The reason for this blocking is that the current that might be
flowing through the 89-BYP of the coupler is not being measured by the coupler CT,
therefore, the differential current and the restraint current measurements will not be
correct for the bus to which the disconnecting switch is connected.
- The single bus between the transfer bus and the bus to which the 89-BYP of the
combined coupler is connected.
Figure 3.5.10: Blocking 87 and Single Bus Due to Combined Coupler Disconnecting Switch Status.
3.5-12
BDBN0901A
• Differential Unit Blocking due to Transfer Disconnecting Switches Status of

the Bays
Figure 3.5.8 shows that in the hypothetical case of closed status in the 89-TR of two bays, when
one of these bays has the CT on the bus side and the other on the line side, the transfer logic
considers blocking the transfer bus differential element, as in this case, even under load
conditions, incorrect bus differential current may occur.
• Display of Differential Unit Blocking due to Transfer Logic
The activation of bus differential blocking by one of the two causes described in the transfer
logic displays bus blocking through:
- Activation of the applicable digital output (BL87_B1_Byp_CC, BL87_B2_Byp_CC,

BL87_B3_Byp_CC, BL87_B4_Byp_CC, BL87_B5_Byp_CC).
- Activation of signal Bus X Blocking by Combined Coupling Bypass (TRN) (where X
is bus number) in ZivercomPlus® status screen (see section 3.13).
- TRN display in the HMI information menu (see section 1.3.5).
Figure 3.5.11: Location of CT Relative to 89-TR (Setting).
3.5-13
BDBN0901A
3.5.6.b Example of the Application of this Logic

The example in next Figure shows the operation of the Logic 1 Combined Coupler in
substations with a transfer bus.
Figure 3.5.12: Example of Configuration with a Transfer Bus and a Combined Coupler.
In the example the configuration is double bus with one transfer bus and with three bay types:
- Combined Coupler (Bay 1).

- Bays with the CT in the Bus Side (Bay 2).
- Bays with the CT in the Line Side (Bay 3).
Settings for Bus connection of any of three Bays must be set to 0.
3.5-14
BDBN0901A
Logic Settings relative to Transfer Bus Logic to be used in this example are shown in the table
below.
Logic Settings Value in the Example

Transfer Bus Number 3
Tie 1: with 1 CT
Logic Logic 1
Bus 89-Bypass 1
Direct Bus 0
Reverse Bus 1
Tie 2: No Tie
Logic NO
Bus 89-Bypass 0
Tie 3: No Tie
Logic NO
Bus 89-Bypass 0
Tie 4: No Tie
Logic NO
Bus 89-Bypass 0
Digital inputs used in this example are as follows:
Input Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

1 DI_89-B1_O DI_89-B1_O DI_89-B1_O
2 DI_89-B1_C DI_89-B1_C DI_89-B1_C
3 DI_89-B2_O DI_89-B2_O DI_89-B2_O
4 DI_89-B2_C DI_89-B2_C DI_89-B2_C
5 DI_89-TR_O DI_89-TR_O DI_89-TR_O
DI_89-B3_O
6 DI_89-TR_C DI_89-TR_C DI_89-TR_C
DI_89-B3_C
7 DI_89-Bypass_O DI_89-LIN_O DI_89-LIN_O
8 DI_89-Bypass_C DI_89-LIN_C DI_89-LIN_C
9 DI_52_O DI_52_O DI_52_O
10 DI_52_C DI_52_C DI_52_C
11 52_manual_c 52_manual_c 52_manual_c
Inputs shown in italics in the table have been set up in such a way that the Dynamic Zone may
be considered enabled in all bays of the example. Although the 89-LIN inputs are not necessary
in bay 2, they have been set up in order that the disconnecting switch status may be displayed.
3.5-15
BDBN0901A
The Combined Coupler of the example will have different settings as a function of the status
inside Logic 1, as shown in the following table.
Coupler Normal Settings Coupler Transferred Settings 1 Coupler Transferred Settings 2

Tie with one CT Tie with one CT No Tie
Direct Bus = 0 Direct Bus = 0 Line Bay connected to Bus by
Reverse Bus = 1 Reverse Bus = Bus Connection Disconnecting
Switches Status Input
Transfer Bus Number = 3
The operation of the transfer logic of this example is described below (following the logic of
Figure 3.5.8):
• Under normal conditions (when there is no intention to transfer any bay), the combined
coupler will operate with Normal Settings (set up by the user).
• When the Transfer Process begins, the 89-TR of the coupler is closed and the coupler
breaker is open, and then condition 1 is activated. As there are still no bays transferred
(there are no line bays with a closed 89-TR) the coupler automatically switches to
operation with Transferred Settings 1, that is, it is a tie between the transfer bus and a
normal bus (to which the tie is connected through bus disconnecting switch inputs).
• Once the coupler is with Transferred Settings 1, it will remain with these settings until
one of the following conditions are complied with:
- Situation 1: 89-TR closed only in a line bay with the CT on the Bus Side. This way
coupler adopts Transferred Settings 2.
- Situation 2: 89-BYP of coupler is in a closed or unknown status and 89-TR of
coupler is in open status. This way the coupler adopts again the Normal Settings,
as the line bay transfer process has been completed.
• When the coupler with Transferred Settings 1, (before connecting a bay to the transfer
bus) by closing the coupler breaker a fault in the transfer bus may be detected, and
then the differential trip of this bus occurs (tripping the coupler).
3.5-16
BDBN0901A
• When a line bay is connected to the transfer bus (through 89-TR), the coupler will adopt
the corresponding transferred settings as a function of the bay CT location:
- If the CT 89-TR Location = CT Line Side, the coupler remains with Transferred
Settings 1, that is, it’s still is a tie between the normal bus and the transferred bus.
When the transferred bay opens the breaker, the bay is not disabled via the
Dynamic Zone, therefore, the current keeps being measured and is considered in
the bus to which the bay is connected. Once the 89-B1 and 89-B2 of the transferred
bay are open, the bay is connected only to bus 3 (through 89-B3). If a fault in bus 3
(transfer bus) occurs under this situation, the bus differential protection will operate
by tripping the transferred bay and the coupler. Also, in this case the line bay
remote end trip could be accelerated via an output activated when the 89-TR of this
bay is closed and a trip of this bay occurs.
- If The CT 89-TR Location = C.T. Bus Side, the coupler operates with Transferred
Settings 2, that is, it changes into a line bay (to substitute the transferred bay when
the latter opens the breaker). When the transferred bay opens the breaker the bay
disables via the Dynamic Zone, therefore, the bay current is not considered for
protection of buses to which the bay is connected (bus 1 or bus 2). Once the
transferred bay is disabled via the Dynamic Zone, faults after the transferred bay
breaker, are considered as faults external to the bus protection, and furthermore,
faults occurred between the CT and the transferred bay breaker create an
overcurrent in the transferred bay, which may activate the End Fault Protection
output (EFP) (if this unit is enabled), which could be sent in order to accelerate the
transferred line remote end trip.
• The combined coupler with transferred settings (transferred 1 or transferred 2), the 89-
TR being closed or unknown in a bay with the CT on the Line Side and in another bay
with the CT on the bus side, the coupler will automatically set to Transferred Settings 1
and the transfer bus differential unit will be blocked (bus 3 in this case), as for this
location, the possible differential and restraint currents in this bus could not be correctly
measured.
• When the transfer process is over, the Coupler returns to Normal Settings, that is, a tie
between bus 1 and the bus defined by the disconnecting switches status (normally bus
2), when the 89-BYP of the coupler is closed or unknown and the 89-TR of the coupler
is open.
For bays which may be transferred, setting up one output that activates when the bay 89-TR is
closed and the coupler BF activation occurs (Coupler 1 BF output), for cases when, for
example, a fault occurs in bus 1 (to which the coupler is connected) and a breaker failure occurs
in this coupler, as by means of this output the remote end trip of the transferred bay may be
accelerated.
3.5-17
BDBN0901A
Lockout Settings - 1 or 3 Groups*

Lockout Permission by Differential Trip YES / NO YES
Lockout Permission by Contact Input Trip YES / NO YES
Lockout Permission by Breaker Failure Trip YES / NO YES
87 Block by Disagreement Settings - 1 or 3 Groups*

Enabled YES / NO YES
Time Delay 0.20 - 20.00 s 0.01 s 10 s
Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit Settings - 1 or 3 Groups*

Enabled YES / NO YES
Time Delay 0-5s 0.01 s 0.5 s
Bus Coupler Settings - 1 or 3 Groups*

Settings (Coupler 1 to 4) Range Step By Default
Coupler Type 0 - No Tie No Tie
1 - With one CT
2 - With two CTs
Bay IED Number 1 - 28 1 1
Direct Bus 0-5 1 1
0 - 6 (mod. 12). Note 1
Inverse Bus 0-5 1 1
0 - 6 (mod. 12). Note 1
Logic 0 - No No
1 - Logic 1
2 - Long-Trv
Bus 89-Bypass 0-4 1 0
0 - 5 (mod. 12). Note 2
Note 1: below the meaning of each setting is explained, taking into account the differences as a function of the
DBN model (4 bus or 5 bus).
4 Buses DBN Models:·

Selecting 0: tie connected to bus defined by the Bus Disconnecting Switches Status.·
Selecting 1, 2, 3 or 4: tie connected to corresponding bus.·
Selecting 5 (in HMI) = 0L (in ZIVercomPlus): tie connected to bus defined by the status of special
disconnecting switches for Longitudinal – Transversal tie. This setting may only be used for these type of
couplers.
5 Buses DBN Models (Model 12):·

Selecting 0: tie connected to bus defined by the Bus Disconnecting Switches Status.·
Selecting 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5: tie connected to corresponding bus.·
Selecting 6 (in HMI) = 0L (in ZIVercomPlus): tie connected to bus defined by the status of special
disconnecting switches for Longitudinal – Transversal tie. This setting may only be used for these type of
couplers.
Note 3: 0 selection indicates that it is not about a combined coupler (with “logic 1”) with 89-Bypass, otherwise
it states the bus which the combined coupler 89-Bypass is connected to (1 to 4 or 1 to 5, depending on the DBN
model).
3.5-18
BDBN0901A
Transfer Bus Setting - 1 or 3 Groups*

Setting (Coupler 1 to 4) Range Step By Default
Transfer Bus Number 0-4 1 0
0 - 5 (mod. 12)
(*) There are three selectable settings tables, except for DBC model 12 with HW Rev. 2 (DBCC*****x12**, where x
= 6,7, 8 or 9) in which there is only one settings table.
• Central Unit Logic Settings: HMI Access

…
0 - GENERAL 0 - ENABLE 86 FUNCTION

1 - TRANSFORMER 1 - BUS COUPLER 1
2 - PROTECTION 2 - BUS COUPLER 2
3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3 - BUS COUPLER 3
4- LOGIC 4 - BUS COUPLER 4
5- OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 - TIE BLIND POINT
6 - 87 BLK BY DISAGREEMENT
7 - LOGIC
0 - GENERAL 0 - ENABLE 86 FUNCTION 0 - BUS COUPLER TYPE

1 - TRANSFORMER 1 - BUS COUPLER 1 1 - BAY
2 - PROTECTION 2 - BUS COUPLER 2 2 - DIRECT BUS
3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING 3 - BUS COUPLER 3 3 - INVERSE BUS
4 - LOGIC 4 - BUS COUPLER 4 4 - LOGIC
5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 - TIE BLIND POINT 5 - BUS CONNECTED TO 89BYP
7 - LOGIC
0 - GENERAL 0 - ENABLE 86 FUNCTION 0 - BLIND POINT ENABLE

1 - TRANSFORMER 1 - BUS COUPLER 1 1 - BLIND POINT TIME
4 - LOGIC 4 - BUS COUPLER 4
5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 - TIE BLIND POINT
7 - LOGIC
3.5-19
BDBN0901A

5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 - TIE BLIND POINT 0- ENABLE BLOCK
6 - 87 BLK BY DISAGREEMENT 1- TIME
7 - LOGIC

5 - OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 - TIE BLIND POINT
7 - LOGIC 0 - TRANSFER BUS NUMBER
3.5-20
BDBN0901A
3.5.8 Digital Inputs of the Central Unit Logic
Table 3.5-1: Digital Inputs of the Lockout (86) in the DBC

RST_BLK2 Reset Lockout (86) Resets the lockout and the
lockout-latched bus trips.
Table 3.5-2:Digital Inputs used for the DBP-B Bay Bus Tie Blind Spot (DBP-B)*
52_O Open Breaker Status 52 status when both digital
inputs are configured.
52_C Close Breaker Status
®
(*) DBP-B inputs visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current
®
bays, inputs are similar but visualized trough the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable
manual).
Note: In current bay the following input configurations to show breaker status can be used:
breaker).
breaker).
c. configure inputs “52_O” and “52_C”, in which case the breaker status is shown in the following table:
52 Status when the two DI are configured

“52_O” Input “52_C” Input 52 status considered by the DBN
The DBN considers the unknown circuit breaker status as CLOSED, with the exception of the no load three
phase breaker failure element, which considers the unknown status as OPEN.
Table 3.5-3:Digital Inputs of the Bus Couplers (DBP-B)*

DI_89-B1_C Bus 1 Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input Both inputs are necessary to
represent the status of the bus
1 connection disconnecting
DI_89-B1_O Bus 1 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input
switch.
DI_89-B2_O Bus 2 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input
switch.
DI_89-B3_O Bus 3 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input 3 connection disconnecting
switch.
DI_89-B4_O Bus 4 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input 4 connection disconnecting
switch.
3.5-21
BDBN0901A
Table 3.5-3: Digital Inputs of the Bus Couplers (DBP-B)

Bus 5 Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input Both inputs are necessary to
DI_89-B5_C
(DBN Models 12) represent the status of the bus
Bus 5 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input 5 connection disconnecting
DI_89-B5_O switch.
(DBN Models 12)
DI_89-BYP_C Bypass Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input CT bypass disconnecting
switch status inputs. Only one
DI_89-BYP_O Bypass Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input or both inputs can be
configured. See Note 1.
Both inputs are necessary to
DI_89-TR_C Transfer Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input represent the transfer
This status is required for
DI_89-TR_O Transfer Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input combined couplers are involved
(logic 1).
Long-Transv Coupler 89-Bus1 Close Status Both inputs are necessary to
DI_89-B1L_C
Input represent the connecting bus 1
disconnecting switch status in
Long-Transv Coupler 89-Bus1 Open Status side 0L of longitudinal
DI_89-B1L_O
Input transverse coupling.
DI_89-B2L_C
DI_89-B2L_O
DI_89-B3L_C
DI_89-B3L_O
DI_89-B4L_C
DI_89-B4L_O
DI_89-B5L_C
Input (DBN Models 12) represent the connecting bus 5
DI_89-B5L_O
Input (DBN Models 12) transverse coupling.
®
(*) DBP-B inputs visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current
®
bays, inputs are similar but visualized trough the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable
manual).
Note: Inputs of bypass disconnecting switch status operate differently depending on whether the bay is a tie
bay or line bay.
1. If the bay is not a tie bay and the CT bypass disconnecting switch is closed or unknown, the
applicable bus (to which the bay is connected) differential element blocks.
2. If the bay is a tie bay, the bypass disconnecting switch is only of application in the combined coupling
and in this case (no matter whether it has normal or transferred settings) only one bus differential is
blocked under the conditions described in section “Transfer bus logic”).
3.5-22
BDBN0901A
In the current bay the following input configurations can be used to show the status of this disconnecting
switch:
- Configure only input “DI_89-BYP_O” (activated input means open disconnecting switch, deactivated
input means closed disconnecting switch).
- Configure only input “DI_89-BYP_C” (activated input means closed disconnecting switch, deactivated
input means open disconnecting switch).
- Configure inputs “DI_89-BYP_O” and “DI_89-BYP_C”, in which case the disconnecting switch status
is shown in the following table:
89-BYP Status if both Digital Inputs are Configured

“DI_89-BYP_O” Input “DI_89-BYP_C” Input Status of 89-BYP considered by the DBN
For the rest of disconnecting switch types open and closed status inputs are required and, therefore, the
disconnecting switch status is represented by a table similar to the table above.
3.5.9 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Central Unit Logic
Table 3.5-4:Auxiliary Outputs of the Lockout (86)

The Bay has activated the
BLK_CLOSURE Lockout (DBP-B)
lockout output.
Activation of the breaker
BLK_CLOSURE Lockout (DBC) lockout. (BLK_86_DIF +
BLK_86_ED + BLK_86_BF)
Shows the activation of 52
BLK_86_DIFF 86 - Lockout by Differential Trip (DBC) lockout caused by bus trip via
Differential Unit.
BLK_86_DI 86 - Lockout by Digital Input (DBC) lockout caused by bus trip via
Digital Input.
BLK_86_BF 86 - Lockout by Breaker Failure (DBC) lockout caused by bus trip via
Breaker Failure.
Table 3.5-5: Events of the Lockout (86) en el DBC

Group Event
Single Bus,
Lockout, Bus Lockout
Blockings and
Unblockings, 87 Lockout Reset
Supervision.
3.5-23
BDBN0901A
Table 3.5-6: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bus Latched Trip in the DBC
TRIP_BLK1 Bus 1 Trip Sealing
TRIP_BLK2 Bus 2 Trip Sealing Sealing Trip of the
corresponding Bus. It stays
TRIP_BLK3 Bus 3 Trip Sealing
sealed until lockout reset is
TRIP_BLK4 Bus 4 Trip Sealing received.
TRIP_BLK5 Bus 5 Trip Sealing (DBN Models 12)
Table 3.5-7: Auxiliary Outputs of the 87 Block by Disagreement (DBC)

Shows that all four differential
units are blocked by
BLK_F_DISC Block 87 by Disagreement disagreement between the
Supervision Differential unit and
a main differential.
Table 3.5-8: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bus Couplers (DBP-B)*

BUS1 Bay Connected to Bus 1 Signals that indicate the bus to
BUS2 Bay Connected to Bus 2 which a Bay is connected. In
case of ties, it is only applicable
BUS3 Bay Connected to Bus 3
if the connection is made
BUS4 Bay Connected to Bus 4 through disconnecting
BUS5 Bay Connected to Bus 5 (DBN Models 12) switches.
®
(*) DBP-B outputs visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current
®
bays, outputs are similar but visualized trough the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable
manual).
Events of the Bus Couplers

Bus bay connection and disconnection, unknown 52 status and unknown 89 status (see Current
Bay Events in Disconnecting Switch Status Logic section -Cap. 3.6-).
3.5-24
BDBN0901A
Table 3.5-9: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay (for Transfer Logic)*

BF_Coupler_1 Coupler 1 Breaker Failure Activated Outputs to show the bus to
BF_Coupler_2 Coupler 2 Breaker Failure Activated which the bay is connected. In
case of ties, it is only applicable
BF_Coupler_3 Coupler 3 Breaker Failure Activated
if the connection is made
BF_Coupler_4 Coupler 4 Breaker Failure Activated through disconnecting
switches.
®
(*) DBP-B outputs visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) current
®
bays, outputs are similar but visualized trough the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable
manual).
Table 3.5-10: Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC (for Transfer Logic)

Coup1_Transf2 Coupler 1 - Transfer Settings 2
Coup4_Transf2 Coupler 4 - Transfer Settings 2 Shows the type of settings of
the Combined Coupler in the
Coup1_Transf1 Coupler 1 - Transfer Settings 1 Transfer Bus Logic.
Bus 1 87 Trip Blocked by Combined Coupler
BL87_B1_Byp_CC
Bypass
BL87_B2_Byp_CC Blocking of the differential unit
Bypass
because of the combined
BL87_B3_Byp_CC couplers disconnecting switch
Bypass
status or bays 89-TR status (in
Bus 4 87 Trip Blocked by Combined Coupler transfer bus logic).
BL87_B4_Byp_CC
Bypass
BL87_B5_Byp_CC
Bypass (DBN Models 12)
Table 3.5-11: Events of the Central Unit (for Transfer Logic)

Group Event
Coupler 1 with Transfer Settings 2
Combined Coupler 2 with Transfer Settings 1
Couplers Settings. Coupler 3 with Transfer Settings 1
Coupler 1 with Normal Settings
3.5-25
BDBN0901A
3.5.10 Central Unit Logic Tests

3.5.10.a Lockout and Bus Latched Trip Test
Enable DBC setting In Service. Set the Lockout via differential trip to YES. Set all
transformation ratios to one (1). Put into operation and connect (through Bus setting or digital
inputs) one bay to bus 1. Enable the Bus 1 Differential Unit and set the sensitivity to 1 A.
Apply a current of at least 2 A to one phase of the enabled bay for less time than trip time limit
setting (DBC General Settings) and check that during the time the current is applied the bus 1
trips (DBC SP1 contacts closed) and the bay operates consequently: the trip contact and the
Lockout contact activate.
Remove the current and check that the bay trip contact deactivates (when the trip reset time
times out) but the Lockout contact remains activated. Also, bus 1 latched trip remains activated
(SP1 contacts of DBC).
By means of a programmed input, or through communications, issue a Lockout Reset

command. Check that the Lockout contact deactivates. DBC SP1 contacts, namely, busbar 1
latched trip, also open.
Set Lockout to NO. Apply a current of 2 A at least to one phase of the enabled bay for a time
less the trip time limit setting (DBC General setting) and check that while the current is applied
bus 1 trips (DBC SP1 contacts) and bay tripping output contacts close, but bay Lockout signal
contact remains deactivated.
Remove the current and check that the Bus 1 trip (DBC SP1 contacts) and bay trip disappear
(bay trip contacts open when the corresponding reset time times out)
3.5.10.b 87 Block by Disagreement Test

The following settings are used to carry out this test:
- Enable DBC setting In Service.

- Enable Disagreement Differential Blocking and set timer to 5 s.
- Enable bus 1 differential unit. Set bus 1 main differential sensitivity and differential
supervision sensitivity to 1 A. Set differential supervision slope to 40% and bus 1 main
differential slope to 65%.
- Put two bays into operation (all other bays must be out of operation, namely, with the
enable setting set to NO) and connect the two bays (via the Bus setting or via digital
inputs) to bus 1.
- Set all transformation ratios to one (1) except the transformation ratio of one of the
enabled bays that must be set to 10.
- Set the maximum directional blocking Cutoff Current level to 5A for all bays.
3.5-26
BDBN0901A
For easy testing, apply sinusoidal currents with a phase difference of 180º, such that the
Differential Supervision Element is activated and Bus 1 Main Differential Element not activated
(with activated directional blocking in the applicable bus 1 phase).
Apply 7 A to phase A of both bays but in opposite phase, such that the differential current is 6.3
A and the restraint current is 7.7 A, the theoretical differential current for the activation of the
main differential characteristic under this situation being:
• Activation I_if_theoretical = (P x If) + S(1-P)= (0.65 x 7.7) + 1 (1-0.65)= 5.355 A
And the theoretical differential current for the activation of the differential supervision
characteristic being:
• Activation I_if_theoretical = (P x If) + S(1-P)= (0.40 x 7.7) + 1 (1-0.4)= 3.68 A
Therefore, in this situation, phase A Differential Supervision Element is activated whereas

phase A Bus 1 Main Differential Element is not activated (directional blocking activated in bus 1
phase A). Check that 5 seconds after the activation of the Differential Supervision Element, the
differential elements of the four buses activate (disagreement blocking activated).
3.5-27
BDBN0901A
3.5.10.c Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit Test

This element will be tested according to the configuration in the figure with the following
settings.
Figure 3.5.13: Fault in the Tie Blind Spot.
• Enable DBC setting In Service.

• Enable Bus 1 and 2 Differential Elements. Set bus 1 and 2 main differential sensitivity
and differential supervision sensitivity to 1 A. Set differential supervision slope and bus
1 and 2 main differential slope to 40%.
• Put three bays into operation (all other bays must be out of operation, namely, with the
enable setting set to NO) and connect these bays as per figure, namely:
- Bay 1 connected to bus 1 (via setting or disconnecting switch digital input).
- Bay 2 connected to bus 2 (via setting or disconnecting switch digital input).
- Bay 3 connected to bus 0 (do not configure disconnecting switch inputs) and setting
bay 3, in the DBC logic tie 1, as tie with one CT, direct bus 2 and reverse bus 1.
• Set all transformation ratios to one (1).
• Set the maximum directional blocking Cutoff Current level to 5A for all bays.
• Enable the Tie Blind Spot Unit and set the timer to 0.3 s.
• Configure 52_open input only for bay 3.
For easy testing consider only tie 52 status. With 52 closed in bay 3 (52_open input not
activated), apply 10A (0º) to phase A of all bays. These will trip bus 2 by differential element.
Stop applying current only to bay 2 (keep applying current to bays 1 and 3). Open 52 of bay 3
(activate 52_open input). Check that 0.3 s after 52 opens, bus 1 differential and restraint
currents consider only the current apply to bay 1, this causing the activation of bus 1 differential
trip.
3.5-28
BDBN0901A
3.6 DBN Current Bay
Logic

3.6.1 DBN Current Bay Logic ........................................................................................... 3.6-2
3.6.2 Bus Disconnecting Switch Status and Bus Connection Logic. Reduction
to Single Bus ............................................................................................................ 3.6-2
3.6.3 Bypass Disconnecting Switch Status Logic ............................................................. 3.6-3
3.6.4 Transfer Disconnecting Switch Status Logic ........................................................... 3.6-3
3.6.5 Line Disconnecting Switch Status Logic .................................................................. 3.6-3
3.6.6 Logic of Special Bus Connection Disconnecting Switch Status for
Longitudinal Transversal Coupling .......................................................................... 3.6-3
3.6.7 Breaker Status Logic................................................................................................ 3.6-3
3.6.8 Faults between the Breaker and the Current Transformer ...................................... 3.6-4
3.6.8.a Faults in Bus Tie ................................................................................................. 3.6-4
3.6.8.b Faults in a Line ................................................................................................... 3.6-5
3.6.9 Issues regarding Current Bay Connection and Enable ........................................... 3.6-6
3.6.10 Settings Ranges....................................................................................................... 3.6-8
3.6.11 Digital Inputs of the Current Bay Logic .................................................................... 3.6-9
3.6.12 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Current Bay Logic......................................... 3.6-12
3.6.1 DBN Current Bay Logic

Current Bay logic includes the following settings: Disconnector #lb Travel Time and Breaker
#lb Travel Time. These settings are related to disconnect status logic and breaker status logic.
Status logic of breaker and each disconnect type is described below.
3.6.2 Bus Disconnecting Switch Status and Bus Connection Logic.

Reduction to Single Bus
Current bay unit connections to each bus (four bus maximum, except DBN model 12 with 5
buses), is carried out via general setting Bus (if tied to a single bus) or via disconnecting
switches (if tied to more than one bus, for example with double bus configuration).
If bay connection to buses is carried out via bus disconnecting switches logic, the setting Bus
must be set to 0. In this case, if the bay is enabled, the DBN Central Unit considers this bay
connected to the bus defined by bus disconnecting switches inputs. In this way, the relay adapts
at any time to the substation topology. The figure below shows an example of current bay
connection (enabled) to a double bus (considering the bay might be connected to bus 1 or bus
2).
Figure 3.6.1: Status of the Connection in a Double Bus Configuration.
3.6-2
BDBN0901A
As shown in the figure above, when the bus disconnecting switch status is unknown and the
other bus disconnecting switch is closed or if the other bus disconnecting switch is closed or
unknown, the busbars involved turn into single bus (bus with the smaller number).
If a bus disconnecting switch fails during operation without completing its travel, when setting
Disconnector Travel Time times out, current bay unknown disconnecting switch output
ALR_89 and DBC output ALRSECC activate. DBC status shows bus disconnecting switch
status without taking into account Disconnector Travel Time.
During the time needed to change a bay to a different bus, the algorithm of the differential
protection will consider both busses to be a Single Bus, preventing these way undue operations.
For the DBN to function properly, the secondary image of disconnecting switches must be the
appropriate one during the process of changing busses. Therefore, before closing the first
disconnecting switch in the primary, its secondary image should be closed, while the process
must be just the opposite for opening the second disconnecting switch. That is, before opening
the image of the disconnecting switch, it must first be open (before opening the disconnecting
switch in secondary its primary disconnecting switch should be opened).
If a bay bus disconnecting switch status is unknown and the other bus disconnecting switch is
open, DBC considers the bay is connected to the bus with the unknown status breaker. This is
because if the bay is actually connected to that bus, the operation is correct, whereas if it is not
actually connected to any bus, current is not measured, and therefore it does not contribute
whatsoever to the differential and the operation will also be correct.
3.6.3 Bypass Disconnecting Switch Status Logic

This bay element sends information of the bypass disconnecting switch status to the DBC.
3.6.4 Transfer Disconnecting Switch Status Logic

This bay element sends information of the transfer disconnecting switch status to the DBC.
3.6.5 Line Disconnecting Switch Status Logic

This bay element sends information of the line disconnecting switch status to the DBC. On the
other hand, the line disconnecting switch status is also considered by the dynamic zone logic
element.
3.6.6 Logic of Special Bus Connection Disconnecting Switch Status

for Longitudinal Transversal Coupling
This current bay element sends information on the special bus connection disconnecting switch
status (0L side) to the DBC for longitudinal transversal coupling.
3.6.7 Breaker Status Logic

This bay element sends information of the bay breaker status to the DBC.
On the other side, the breaker status is also considered by other bay and DBC elements (in
Dynamic Zone Logic, in Breaker Failure Unit, in Tie Blind Spot Element and in Combined
Coupling Transfer Logic).
3.6-3
BDBN0901A
3.6.8 Faults between the Breaker and the Current Transformer

Shown below is the DBN logic to clear faults located between bay 52 and CT for a tie bay and a
line bay.
3.6.8.a Faults in Bus Tie

• Trip by Three-Phase Breaker Failure
Assuming the fault occurs between the Breaker and the Tie CT as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3.6.2: Tie-Transferred Trip.
In this case the fault triggers a bus 2 differential trip, and therefore the bay 2 and 3 breakers
open, but the fault keeps being fed through bus 1. If the bay 3 Breaker Failure Unit (tie with 1
CT) is enabled, the bus 1 will be tripped by the activation of its three-phase breaker failure and
the fault will be cleared.
• Differential Trip through Bus Tie Blind Spot Unit
As shown in DBN Central Unit Logic (Chapter 3.5), the fault located between tie 52 and CT can
be cleared by the bay Tie Blind Spot element (3.5.4).
• Faulted Bus Differential Trip (without tripping the other Bus). Dynamic Zone
Logic
If the Dynamic Zone Logic is enabled in the Bay Tie, when the tie breaker status is open and no
current flows through any phase, the tie stays disabled via the Dynamic Zone activation.
Therefore, if the fault in Figure 3.6.2 occurs after the tie has been disabled on account of the
open breaker, only the faulted bus differential trip is operated (bus 1).
3.6-4
BDBN0901A
3.6.8.b Faults in a Line

• CT on the Bus Side
If the CT is located between the breaker and the bus, and a fault occurs between the breaker
(closed) and the CT, then it is considered as a fault external to the bus differential that will be
cleared by means of an external protection, opening the breaker of this line, with current still
flowing through the same way, therefore, the three-phase breaker failure of this bay will be
activated, which will cause all bus bays to trip due to breaker failure, this way clearing the fault.
If the bay was disabled via the dynamic zone due to the open breaker, when the fault occurs
between the breaker and the CT of this bay, a bus differential trips, this way clearing the fault. In
a similar situation but without the use of the dynamic zone logic, the fault clearance procedure
would be through the bay breaker failure, tripping the corresponding bus.
• Breaker on the Bus Side
If the breaker is between the CT and the bus, and a fault occurs between the breaker (closed)
and the CT, this is deemed as a fault internal to the bus differential protection, therefore, the bus
to which this bay is connected will trip but current will still flow through the applicable CT until
the remote end breaker opens (therefore, if current flows through the bay for a time exceeding
the three phase BF time setting, the bay Breaker Failure element will activate). In order to
speed up the line remote end trip with fault between CT and 52, a bay output can be configured
as AND for Breaker Failure activation (or Retrip function) and for bay tripping signal activation.
If, prior to the fault, the bay was disabled by Dynamic Zone owing to open breaker, when a fault
occurs between bay breaker and CT, its current is not taken into account for bus protection, but
detected conditions being of internal fault, the fault at this line end is cleared by bus differential
trip. In order to speed up the line remote end trip, the output signal Remote End Trip can be
sent (if this element is enabled).
3.6-5
BDBN0901A
3.6.9 Issues regarding Current Bay Connection and Enable

As shown in Connection to Bus section, each current bay can be connected to one or several of
possible buses via settings (in case it is rigidly joined to one bus) or via disconnecting switches
status contact inputs. In the latter case, depending on the input status of a disconnecting
switches of a bay enabled via settings, a single bus situation may be attained: if the bay is not
enabled via settings, a single bus may not be attained via the disconnecting switches status;
nevertheless, if a bay has been enabled via settings but disabled via the digital input or via
dynamic zone, a single bus may be attained via the disconnecting switches status.
A bay is taken into account for the protection of a bus (differential unit and bus breaker failure)
to which said bay is connected, only if the bay is enabled.
If the bay is disabled, bay protection units keep in operation (applicable bay outputs take place),
but the bay has no effect over the bus protection.
As previously stated, the Supervision Differential Unit considers the currents of all enabled lines
no matter what the status of the disconnecting switches of these lines is. This prevents against
inappropriate trips, which could occur on account of undue main differential activation, e.g.,
because of an error in the secondary image of a current bay disconnecting switches status (as
the main differential unit of a given bus considers only the currents of bays connected to that
bus).
Thus, for example, upon a fault external to the bus for which the image of disconnecting
switches of an enabled bay has been erroneously considered (by considering this bay
disconnected from all busses, when there is actually current flowing through it), the main
differential of the bus, to which said bay is connected to the primary, may be activated, but the
Supervision Differential Unit would remain deactivated, this way preventing an incorrect trip (if
the trip differential supervision is enabled). Furthermore, if the differential alarm is enabled, in
case this exceptional situation occurs for longer than the time set in the differential alarm unit,
the differential alarm of the erroneously considered bus will be activated, producing the 87
blocking of this bus.
On the other hand, the bay being enabled but not connected to any bus, if this bay breaker
failure activates, no bus will be tripped via breaker failure, neither will trip the bay trip. A
necessary but not sufficient condition to trip a bay is that the bay must be enabled and
connected to at least to one bus.
3.6-6
BDBN0901A
The following table schematically shows what has been explained in this section:
Bay X ENABLED Bay X CONNECTED Bay X considered Bay X considered in Is Bay Trip Do Bay Is Bus Y
at least to one Bus in the Main Supervision possible via Bus Protection Units tripped via
(Bus Y) Differential Unit of Differential Unit Y Trip? operate? activation of
Bus Y Bay BF?
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
YES NO NO YES NO YES NO
NO YES NO NO NO YES NO
NO NO NO NO NO YES NO
In the case of a Tie Bay, the current through this bay is never considered in the Supervision
Differential Unit.
On the other hand, if a tie is enabled and rigidly joined to bus 3 and connected to bus 1 or 2
through disconnecting switches status inputs, the following situations may exist:
TIE ENABLED TIE TIE Tie considered in Is Bay Trip possible? May Busses be Is any Bus
CONNECTED to CONNECTED to Supervision Differential reduced to a Tripped via the
Bus 1 through Bus 2 through Unit Single Bus? activation of Tie
Disconnecting Disconnecting BF?
Switch Switch
YES YES NO NO YES NO YES
(on tripping bus 1 or 3) (bus 1 and 3)
YES YES YES NO YES YES YES
or or (when bus 1, 2 or 3 trips (bus 1 and 2 (bus 1 and 3)
unknown unknown as there is single bus 1 reduce to single
and 2 on 1) bus 1)
YES NO NO NO YES NO YES
(on tripping bus 3) (bus 3)
YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
(on tripping bus 2 or 3) (bus 2 and 3)
In case tie disconnecting switches “mislead” the secondary, showing the tie is disconnected
from busses 1 and 2, when in fact the tie is connected to at least to one bus, a differential
current will flow through the bus with the error even under normal load conditions, so that the
differential unit of this bus may be activated, the Supervision Differential Unit being deactivated,
this way preventing an incorrect trip (provided the differential trip supervision is enabled).
Furthermore, if the differential alarm is enabled, and should this exceptional situation remain for
longer than the differential alarm unit time setting, the differential alarm of the bus considered
erroneous would activate, and the 87 of this bus would block.
3.6-7
BDBN0901A
Current Bay Logic Settings (3 Groups)

#lb Disconnector Travel Time 1.00 - 120.00 s 0.01 s 10 s
#lb Breaker Travel Time 0.02 - 2.00 s 0.01 s 0.20 s
#lb = 1 to 28 (in each current bay).
Bus Connection Logic Settings (General Settings)

Bus Number Connection 0-4 1 0
0 - 5 (*)
• Current Bay Logic: HMI Access

1 - OPERATIONS 1 - BAY #1 1 - PROTECTION
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - BAY #2 2 - LOGIC
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - BAY #3
4 - INFORMATION 4 - BAY #4
5 - BAY #5
…
0 - GENERAL
1 - PROTECTION 0 - DISCONN. TRAVEL TIME
2 - LOGIC 1 - BREAKER TRAVEL TIME
• Bus Connection Logic: HMI Access

5 - BAY #5
…
0 - GENERAL 0 - BAY ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1 - BUS
2 - LOGIC 2 - INVERT POLARITY
3 - LOCATION CT - 89TR
3.6-8
BDBN0901A
3.6.11 Digital Inputs of the Current Bay Logic
Table 3.6-1: Digital Inputs of the Bus Disconnecting Switches (DBP-B)*

DI_89-B1_C Bus 1 Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input represent the status of the bus
DI_89-B1_O Bus 1 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input switch.
Bus 5 Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input Both inputs are necessary to
DI_89-B5_C
(DBN Models 12) represent the status of the bus
Bus 5 Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input 5 connection disconnecting
DI_89-B5_O switch.
(DBN Models 12)
®
(*) DBP-B inputs visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays, inputs
®
are similar but visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable manual).
Table 3.6-2: Digital Inputs of the DBC Bus Connection Logic

1_2_BU_1 Busses 1 and 2 Connected as Single Bus 1
(DBN Models 12) The activation of these inputs
2_3_BU_2 Busses 2 and 3 Connected as Single Bus 2 makes that the 2 buses are
2_4_BU_2 Busses 2 and 4 Connected as Single Bus 2 going to be joined into one.
2_5_BU_2 Busses 2 and 5 Connected as Single Bus 2 From this point in time on all
(DBN Models 12) the bays associated to both
buses are in a single one.
(DBN Models 12)
(DBN Models 12)
3.6-9
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-3: Digital Inputs of the Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic (DBP-B)*
DI_89-BYP_C Bypass Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input CT bypass disconnecting
switch status inputs. Only one
or both inputs can be
DI_89-BYP_O Bypass Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input configured. See Note 1.
®
®
Note: Inputs of bypass disconnecting switch status operate differently depending on whether the bay is a tie
bay or line bay.
1. If the bay is not a tie bay and the CT bypass disconnecting switch is closed or unknown, the
applicable bus (to which the bay is connected) differential element blocks.
i. If the bay is a tie bay, the bypass disconnecting switch is only of application in the combined coupling
and in this case (no matter whether it has normal or transferred settings) only one bus differential is
blocked under the conditions described in section “Transfer bus logic”).
In the current bay the following input configurations can be used to show the status of this disconnecting
switch:
- Configure only input “DI_89-BYP_O” (activated input means open disconnecting switch, deactivated
input means closed disconnecting switch).
- Configure only input “DI_89-BYP_C” (activated input means closed disconnecting switch, deactivated
input means open disconnecting switch).
- Configure inputs “DI_89-BYP_O” and “DI_89-BYP_C”, in which case the disconnecting switch status
is shown in the following table:
89-BYP Status if both Digital Inputs are Configured

“DI_89-BYP_O” Input “DI_89-BYP_C” Input Status of 89-BYP considered by the DBN
Table 3.6-4: Digital Inputs of the 89-TR Logic (DBP-B)*

DI_89-TR_O Transfer Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input Both inputs are necessary to
represent the transfer
DI_89-TR_C Transfer Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input This status is required for
combined couplers are
involved (logic 1).
®
®
Table 3.6-5: Digital Inputs of the 89-LIN Logic (DBP-B)*

DI_89-LIN_O Line Disconnecting Switch Close Status Input
Both inputs are required to
represent line disconnecting
DI_89-LIN_C Line Disconnecting Switch Open Status Input switch status.
®
®
3.6-10
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-6: Digital Inputs of the 89-Long-Transv. Logic (DBP-B)*

Long-Transv Coupler 89-Bus1 Close Status Both inputs are required to
DI_89-B1L_C
Input represent bus 1 connection
DI_89-B1L_O
Input transversal coupling.
DI_89-B2L_C
DI_89-B2L_O
DI_89-B3L_C
DI_89-B3L_O
DI_89-B4L_C
DI_89-B4L_O
DI_89-B5L_C (*)
Input (DBN Models 12) represent bus 5 connection
DI_89-B5L_O (*)
Input (DBN Models 12) transversal coupling.
®
®
Table 3.6-7: Digital Inputs used for the Bus Tie Blind Spot (DBP-B)*
52_O Open Breaker Status 52 status when both digital
inputs are configured. See
52_C Close Breaker Status Note 2.
®
®
Note: In current bay the following input configurations to show breaker status can be used:
breaker).
breaker).
c. configure inputs “52_O” and “52_C”, in which case the breaker status is shown in the following
table:
52 Status when the two DI are configured

“52_O” Input “52_C” Input 52 status considered by the DBN
The DBN considers the unknown circuit breaker status as CLOSED, with the exception of the no load three
phase breaker failure element, which considers the unknown status as OPEN.
3.6-11
BDBN0901A
3.6.12 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Current Bay Logic
Table 3.6-8: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the Bus Connection Logic*
Signals that indicate the bus to
which a Bay is connected.
BUS5 Bay Connected to Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
ALR_89 Unknown 89 Status Shows the status of any
disconnecting switch of this
bay is unknown for longer than
the corresponding
Disconnector Travel Time.
®
(*) DBP-B outputs visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays,
®
outputs are similar but visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable manual),
except that the 89 Unknown status output is split into different unknown disconnect outputs (one per bus).
Table 3.6-9: Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC Bus Connection Logic

ALRSECC Unknown Disconnecting Switch Status Shows that the status of any
bay disconnecting switch is
unknown (bay enabled by
setting) for longer than the
corresponding disconnecting
switch travel time. (Also
considering bays disabled via
Digital Input or Dynamic
Zone).
B_SING Single Bus Conditions Shows that at least two
busses are tied together.
1_2_BU_1 Tie buses 1 and 2 in bus 1
1_5_BU_1 Tie buses 1 and 5 in bus 1 (DBN Models 12) Displays that two busbars
2_3_BU_2 Tie buses 2 and 3 in bus 2 merge (via disconnecting
switch inputs, DBC digital
2_4_BU_2 Tie buses 2 and 4 in bus 2 input activation or command
2_5_BU_2 Tie buses 2 and 5 in bus 2 (DBN Models 12) execution).
3_5_BU_3 Tie buses 3 and 5 in bus 3 (DBN Models 12)
4_5_BU_4 Tie buses 4 and 5 in bus 4 (DBN Models 12)
B_UNICA_SIN_PCAM Single Bus Conditions with Bus Change Disabled Displays single bus activation
without its previous activation
via single bus conversion
digital inputs and without the
execution of any single bus
conversion commands.
3.6-12
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-10: Events of the Bus Connection Logic (Bay)*

Group Event
Bay # Logic Units Bay # Unknown 89 Status Activated

Activated and
Deactivated. Bay # Unknown 89 Status Deactivated
®
(*) Bay events visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN
Table 3.6-11: Events of the Bus Connection Logic (DBC)

Group Event
Buses 1 and 2 Tied as Single Bus
Buses 1 and 5 Tied as Single Bus (DBN Models 12)
Buses 2 and 5 Tied as Single Bus (DBN Models 12)
Single Bus, Buses 3 and 5 Tied as Single Bus (DBN Models 12)
Lockout, Bus Buses 4 and 5 Tied as Single Bus (DBN Models 12)
Blockings and
Unblockings,87 Buses 1 and 2 Split from Single Bus
Supervision. Buses 1 and 3 Split from Single Bus
Buses 1 and 4 Split from Single Bus
Buses 1 and 5 Split from Single Bus (DBN Models 12)
Bay 1 Connected to Bus 1
Bays Connected to Bay 5 Connected to Bus 1
Bus 1. Bay 6 Connected to Bus 1
3.6-13
BDBN0901A

Group Event
Bay 1 Disconnected from Bus 1
Bays Bay 14 Disconnected from Bus 1
Disconnected from
Bus 1. Bay 15 Disconnected from Bus 1
3.6-14
BDBN0901A

Group Event
3.6-15
BDBN0901A

Group Event
Disconnected from
3.6-16
BDBN0901A

Group Event
3.6-17
BDBN0901A

Group Event
Disconnected from
3.6-18
BDBN0901A

Group Event
3.6-19
BDBN0901A

Group Event
Disconnected from
3.6-20
BDBN0901A

Group Event
Bay 1 Connected to Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
Bays Connected to Bay 14 Connected to Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
Bus 5 Bay 15 Connected to Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
3.6-21
BDBN0901A

Group Event
Bay 1 Disconnected from Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
Bays Bay 14 Disconnected from Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
Disconnected from
Bus 5 Bay 15 Disconnected from Bus 5 (DBN Models 12)
Table 3.6-12: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic*
the corresponding
disconnecting switch travel
time. Therefore, it is also
activated if the bypass
disconnecting switch status is
unknown during this time.
®
(*) DBP-B outputs visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays
®
outputs are similar but visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable manual),
except that the 89 Unknown status output is split into different unknown disconnect outputs (one per
disconnect switch).
3.6-22
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-13: Events of the Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic (DBP-B)*

Group Event
Activated and
®
(*) Bay events visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN
Table 3.6-14: Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic
Zone).
BLK_B2 Bus 2 Differential Unit Blocking If CT bypass bay is enabled,
block 87 of the bus to which
said bay is connected
BLK_B4 Bus 4 Differential Unit Blocking activates.
BLK_B5 (*) Bus 5 Differential Unit Blocking (DBN Models 12)
Table 3.6-15: Events of the DBC Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic

Group Event
Bus 1 Differential Trip Block Activated
Protection Units, Bus 2 Differential Trip Block Activated
Trips and Blocks Bus 3 Differential Trip Block Activated
Activated. Bus 4 Differential Trip Block Activated
Bus 5 Differential Trip Block Activated (DBN Models 12)
Bus 1 Differential Trip Block Deactivated
Protection Units, Bus 2 Differential Trip Block Deactivated
Trips and Blocks Bus 3 Differential Trip Block Deactivated
Deactivated. Bus 4 Differential Trip Block Deactivated
Bus 5 Differential Trip Block Deactivated (DBN Models 12)
When a bus block 87 activates owing to CT bypass of a bay connected to this bus, the DBC
status shows BYP. Also, block 87 event of the applicable bus is shown.
3.6-23
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-16: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the 89-TR Logic and 89-LIN Logic*
the corresponding
disconnecting switch travel
time. Therefore, it is also
activated if the transfer
disconnecting switch status is
unknown during this time.
®
(*) DBP-B outputs visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays
®
outputs are similar but visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable manual),
except that the 89 Unknown status output is split into different unknown disconnect outputs (one per
disconnect switch).
Table 3.6-17: Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC for the 89-TR Logic and 89-LIN Logic
Zone).
Table 3.6-18: Events of the 89-TR Logic and 89-LIN Logic (Bay)*
Group Event
Activated and
®
(*) Bay events visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN.
3.6-24
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-19: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the 89-Long-Transv. Logic*
ALR89_acop-long-trans Long-Transv. Coupler Unknown 89 Status Shows that any bus
disconnecting switch in side
0L of the longitudinal
transversal coupling is in
unknown status during a time
longer than the applicable
disconnector travel time.
®
(*) DBP-B output visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays, the
®
output is the same but visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable manual).
Table 3.6-20: Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC for the 89-Long-Transv. Logic
Zone).
3.6-25
BDBN0901A
Table 3.6-21: Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the 52 Logic*

ALR_52 Unknown 52 Status Shows that the status of the
breaker of this bay is unknown
for longer than the
corresponding breaker travel
time.
®
(*) DBP-B output visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN. For “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays, the
®
output is the same but visualized through the ZIVercomPlus linked to the bay (refer to the applicable manual).
Table 3.6-22: Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC for the 52 Logic

ALR_52 Some Unknown 52 Status Shows that the status of any
bay breaker is unknown (bay
enabled by setting) for longer
than the corresponding
breaker travel time. (Also
Zone).
Table 3.6-23: Events of the Bay for the 52 Logic*

Group Event
Bay # Logic Units Bay # Unknown 52 Status Deactivated
Activated and
Deactivated. Bay # Unknown 52 Status Activated
®
(*) Bay events visualized through ZIVercomPlus linked to the DBN.
3.6-26
BDBN0901A
3.7 Configuration
Settings

3.7.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3.7-2
3.7.2 Passwords ............................................................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.3 Operation Enable ..................................................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.4 Inputs and Outputs Configuration (Auxiliary Contacts and LEDs) ........................... 3.7-4
3.7.5 Rear Port Communication (DBC) ............................................................................ 3.7-4
3.7.6 Protocols .................................................................................................................. 3.7-5
3.7.6.a IEC-61850 Protocol Settings .............................................................................. 3.7-5
3.7.6.b TCP/IP Protocol Settings .................................................................................... 3.7-5
3.7.6.c Specific P Protocol Settings................................................................................ 3.7-5
3.7.7 Front Port Communication (DBC) ............................................................................ 3.7-6
3.7.8 Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 3.7-6
3.7.8.a Local Time Zone Setting ..................................................................................... 3.7-6
3.7.8.b Summer Time / Winter Time Change ................................................................. 3.7-6
3.7.9 Protection Configuration .......................................................................................... 3.7-7
3.7.10 IRIG-B Type: UTC / Local Time Configuration ........................................................ 3.7-7
3.7.11 Ethernet Port (RJ45) ................................................................................................ 3.7-7
3.7.12 Configuration Settings.............................................................................................. 3.7-8
3.7.1 Introduction
DBN Configuration settings (table 1) can only be accessed through the DBC HMI (DBN
Central Unit), except some rear port communications settings (Communications password
enable, Communications password and Communications password timeout) which can
also be configured through the communications program ZIVercomPlus®.
In DBC models with HW Rev. 2 (see 1.4, Model Selection: DBC******x****, where x = 6, 7, 8 or
9) there are the following configuration settings that can also be edited through the
ZIVercomPlus® program: Date and Time settings (Summer / Winter), IRIG-B Type and
Protocols (the latter only exists in IEC 61850 models).
The system's various options are available from the main menu. Once you have selected the
configuration option, enter the password (2140, by default). If you enter an incorrect password,
you will see: INCORRECT PASSWORD - ACCESS DENIED - PRESS ANY KEY. When you
have entered the correct password, you will see a menu with the following options: Passwords,
Operation Permission, Configure Inputs and Outputs, Protocols (only in IEC 61850
Models), Rear Port Communications, Front Port Communications, Date and Time (include
Summer / Winter settings in DBC models with HW Rev. 2), Protection Configuration, IRIG-B
Type (in DBC models with HW Rev. 2) and Ethernet Port (depending on the model).
3.7.2 Passwords
The first option of the configuration menu, Passwords, allows you to change the access
password for the Configuration, Operations and Settings options.
The Configuration option brings up the screen shown on the right. From this screen, you can
change the access password for the options of the configuration group.
The corresponding settings for changing the

access password for the Operations and
modify Settings options are similar.
The first row of each screen identifies the

setting option selected. The second is the
operational setting value. You can edit a
new setting with the intermittent cursor in the
third line. The last row specifies the range
for the setting.
3.7.3 Operation Enable

The Blocking / Unblocking, 86 by
Differential Trip Reset and 86 by others
Trip Reset options allow you to enable
operations by means of the keypad, the front
port (of the central unit or of any bay IED),
the remote ports and the digital inputs. In
these three cases, the screen presented is
the one shown on the right.
3.7-2
BDBN0901A
The Block / unblock option is used to enable:
• Blockings:
- Bus 1 Differential Blocking
- Bus 5 Differential Blocking (Models 12)
- Bus 1 Trip Blocking by Breaker Failure or Digital Input
• Unblockings:
- Bus 1 Differential Unblocking
- Bus 5 Differential Unblocking (Models 12)
- Bus 1 Trip Unblocking by Breaker Failure or Digital Input
• Single Bus:
- Tie Buses 1 and 2
- Tie Buses 1 and 3
- Tie Buses 1 and 4
- Tie Buses 1 and 5 (Models 12)
- Tie Buses 2 and 3
- Tie Buses 2 and 4
- Tie Buses 3 and 4
- Split Buses 1 and 2
- Split Buses 1 and 5 (Models 12)
The Unlock 86 by Diff and Unlock 86 by Others options allow lockout resets depending on
the cause that activated them: a Differential Unit or another action (Digital Input or Breaker
Failure).
The Remote Settings option is for enabling (or disabling) the permission to make changes in
settings groups through: Remote Port (communications and keypad) or Digital Inputs (only
through digital inputs).
The Oscillography Trigger and Breaker Failure Reset operations are always possible by
means of the keypad, of the front port (of the Central Unit or of any Bay Unit), of the remote
ports and through the by digital inputs.
3.7-3
BDBN0901A
3.7.4 Inputs and Outputs Configuration (Auxiliary Contacts and LEDs)

The configuration option Digital Inputs or Digital Outputs, presents the message TO
CHANGE ACCESS THROUGH THE LOCAL PORT. When you want to make changes in the
configuration of the digital inputs or outputs (configurable only through the front remote serial
port and by means of the ZIVercomPlus® program), you need this screen.
Digital inputs are sent from the input/output configuration screen (or input configuration screen
for model 10) in the HMI Configuration menu.
Digital outputs (and LEDs) are sent from the input/output configuration screen (or output
configuration screen for model 10) in the HMI Configuration menu.
3.7.5 Rear Port Communication (DBC)

Selecting the Rear Port Communications option brings up a menu composed of the settings:
Terminal Address, Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Enable Comm. Password, Comm.
Password Timeout and Communications Password. All these screens are similar. The
differences lie in the first line, which identifies the setting, and the last line, which presents the
range available for that setting. The operation mode is the one specified in section 1.3, Local
Interface.
The setting Equipment Number allows the substation central unit to identify each substation
equipment.
The Enable Comm. Password setting allows enabling the password access function to
establish communication with the unit via the rear port. In this type of setting, key 1 activates the
enable (YES) and key 0 deactivates it (NO).
The Comm. Password Timeout setting allows establishing a period of time for activating a
blocking of communications with the unit (whenever communication is via the rear port). If the
set time elapses with no activity taking place in the communications program, the system blocks
itself in this state. Consequently, it will be necessary to restart the communication.
The Communications Password setting makes it possible to establish a password for

communicating with the unit through the rear port. This password must have at least 8
characters, which are entered using the numerical keys and the point (·) key.
3.7-4
BDBN0901A
3.7.6 Protocols
3.7.6.a IEC-61850 Protocol Settings
IEC-61850 protocol configuration settings include the definition of:
• Goose Channel (LAN 1 - LAN 2): it selects the Goose message transmission channel in
IEC-61850. This setting does not exist in models with “P” protocol, that is, with “Bonding”
redundancy. Refer to IEC61850 Annex.
• Output Goose.
o Goose Out Enable (YES / NO): it enables output Gooses.
3.7.6.b TCP/IP Protocol Settings

TCP/IP protocol configuration settings include the definition of:
• LAN 1. The following settings are available within the channel:

- IP Address (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- DHCP Enable (YES/ NO).
- Default Gateway (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- Network Mask (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- DNS Address (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
• LAN 2. The following settings are available within the channel:
- IP Address (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- DHCP Enable (YES/ NO).
- Default Gateway (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- Network Mask (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- DNS Address (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
• SNTP. The following settings are available within SNTP:
- SNTP enable (YES / NO)
- Broadcast Synchronization Enable (YES / NO)
- Unicast Synchronization Enable (YES / NO)
- IP address of Primary SNTP Server (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- IP address of Slave SNTP Server (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd).
- Unicast Validity Timer (10 - 1000000)
- Unicast Error Timer (10 - 1000000)
- Number of Connection Retries (1 - 10)
- Tuning period (10 - 1000000)
- Retry Period (10 - 1000000)
- Broadcast validity Timer (0 - 1000000)
- Broadcast Error Timer (0 - 1000000)
- Maximum Synchronism Time Delay (0 - 1000000)
- Ignore Synchronization Leap Indicator (YES / NO)
- Synchronism State Calculation (Timing / Leap Indicator)
LAN 2 settings do not exist in models with “P” protocol, that is, with “Bonding” redundancy.
Refer to IEC61850 Annex.
3.7.6.c Specific P Protocol Settings

The setting Mean Presence Detection Time exists only for this type of protocol (with “Bonding”
redundancy). Refer to IEC61850 Annex.
3.7-5
BDBN0901A
3.7.7 Front Port Communication (DBC)

The Front Port Communication option provides the following setting options: Baud Rate,
Stop Bits and Parity. These settings are similar to those described in the preceding point.
Selecting Date and Time from the Configuration menu accesses this setting with the following
screen.
The keys ¾ and ½ move the arrow » to

select the option for changing the date or the
time. With the date option selected, press
ENT. The blinking cursor appears under the
indication of the day (DD) and starts
changing the value of the date.
When you have entered the day, the cursor moves to the indication of the month (MM) and
lastly, the year (YY). Then pressing ENT the new date value is set. The procedure for setting
the time is the same as for the date: first the hour (HH), then the minutes (mm) and lastly the
seconds (ss). Pressing ENT establishes the new time value. To return to a higher level press
ESC.
If the Date and Time screen is accessed while the unit is being synchronized by IRIG-B and the
time is changed, the unit will not save this time, but rather the time updated by IRIG-B. The
same happens with the date, except for with the year, which cannot synchronized by IRIG-B.
When you have concluded the configuration setting cycle, press ESC to return to the main
menu. If you have made changes, the HMI will request confirmation of them before you get to
the main menu screen. Pressing F1 confirms the changes and the edited values become
operational. With F4 the changes are not confirmed.
3.7.8 Date and Time

Selecting date and time in the Configuration menu displays this setting to configure relay date
and time.
Also, in DBC models with HW Rev. 2, there are Summer / Winter settings, through which
access can be gained to the settings described below.
3.7.8.a Local Time Zone Setting

If Time Zone IRIG-B is set to UTC, a time correction must be introduced to adapt the relay to
the local time zone. Setting Local Time Zone allows putting UTC time forward or back as
required.
3.7.8.b Summer Time / Winter Time Change

Relay allows configuring the dates when summer time / winter time change takes place. In the
first case the relay clock is put one hour forward (+1 Hour). In the second case the relay clock is
put one hour back (-1 Hour) for the winter season.
3.7-6
BDBN0901A
To configure a change of season the following must be specified:
- Begin Time: time when change of season takes place. Range 0 to 23 h.

- Begin Day Type: type of day when change of season takes place. It can take the
following values First Sunday, Second Sunday, Third Sunday, Fourth Sunday, Last
Sunday of the month and Specific Day.
- Begin Day: in case Specific Day is selected, state in which specific day of the month the
change of season takes place.
- Begin Month: state the month in which the change of season takes place.
These settings are independent for the summer and winter seasons.
The change of season function can be activated or deactivated through Summer Time / Winter
Time Change Enable setting.
3.7.9 Protection Configuration

Setting Directional Blocking Enable is included into Configure Protection section. This
blocking must always be enabled for proper main differential protection operation (therefore, is
set to YES by default). It is only disabled for some tests of the main differential characteristic
(see Main Differential Characteristic Test section).
3.7.10 IRIG-B Type: UTC / Local Time Configuration

Only for DBC models with HW Rev. 2 there is IRIG-B Time setting, through which it can be
determined whether the time received through connector BNC corresponds to Universal Time
(UTC) or a given Time Zone (Local).
In the first case, a correction must be introduced to adapt the UTC time to the time zone of the
relay site. The Local Time Zone setting within the Date and Time settings group is used for
this purpose, which allows putting UTC time forward or back as required.
In the second case, the relay receives the time signal already adapted to the local time zone
and no correction is needed. In this case local Local Time Zone has no effect.
3.7.11 Ethernet Port (RJ45)

In DBC models with Ethernet port (PROCOME protocol), there are the following settings (only
editable through the HMI):
1) IP address (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd): number that identifies a device in Ethernet.

2) Network mask (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd): number that tells a device which part of the IP
address is the network number and which part corresponds to the device.
3) Port number (0 - 65535): number which tells the destination device the routing of the
received data.
4) Keepalive: Maximum time between TCP Messages (0 - 65 s.): number of seconds
between Keepalive packets: if it is zero, Keepalive packets are not sent. These packets
allow the server to know if a client is still present in the Ethernet Network.
3.7-7
BDBN0901A
3.7.12 Configuration Settings
Passwords
The factory-specified access password (full access) is 2140. Nevertheless, you can change the
password to access the following options with the keypad: Configuration, Operations and Settings
Settings Range Step By Default
Configuration 0-9999 1 2140
Operations 0-9999 1 2140
Settings 0-9999 1 2140
Operations Permission
Blocking / Unblocking (of the Differential Unit)
Keypad YES / NO YES
Local Port YES / NO YES
Remote Port YES / NO NO
Digital Inputs YES / NO YES
86 by Differential Trip Reset
Keypad YES / NO YES
86 by others Reset (due to trip by Breaker
Failure o Digital Input)
Keypad YES / NO YES
Remote Setting
Remote Port YES / NO YES
Digital Inputs YES / NO NO
Configure Inputs and Configure Outputs (and LEDs)

The unit is supplied with the factory default configuration for inputs, outputs and LEDs. Inputs,outputs,
and LEDs can be redefined or reallocated via the local communication port using the ZIVercomPlus®
communications program. User definedconfigurations can also be loaded at the factory prior to delivery.
3.7-8
BDBN0901A
Rear Port Communications (DBC)

Terminal Address 0-254 1 0
Baud Rate 300 - 19200 Bauds 9600 Bauds
(mod. 10)
300 - 38400 Bauds
(mod. 11 and 12)
Stop Bits 1 or 2 - 1
Parity 1 (even) or 0 (odd) - 1
0 - only for
DBC Models
with G
Protocol
Communications Password Enable YES / NO - NO
Communications Password Timeout 1- 1440 min - 10 min
Communications Password 8 characters maximum -
Front Port Communications (del DBC)

Baud Rate 300 - 19200 Bauds 4800 Bauds
(mod. 10)
300 - 38400 Bauds
(mod. 11 y 12)
Stop Bits 1 or 2 - 1
Parity 1 (even) or 0 (odd) - 1
0 - only for
DBC Models
with G
Protocol
Date and Time

Modify from DBC keypad
Protection Configuration
Directional Blocking YES / NO - YES
3.7-9
BDBN0901A
Date and Time: Summer / Winter (DBC Models 12 with HW Rev. 2)

Local Time Zone GMT+(0, 1, 2, 3, 3:30, 4, GMT+01:00
4:30, 5, 5:30, 5:45, 6, 6:30,
7, 8, 9, 9:30, 10 ,11, 12)
GMT-(1, 2, 3, 3:30, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9, 9:30, 10 ,11)
Summer Time / Winter Time Change Enable YES / NO NO
Summer Begin Time 0 - 23 Hours 1 2
Summer Begin Day Type 0 = Specific day Specific day
1 = First Sunday of the month
2 = Second Sunday of the month
3 = Third Sunday of the month
4 = Fourth Sunday of the month
5 = Last Sunday of the month
Summer Begin Day 1 - 31 1 20
Summer Begin Month c 1 October
Winter Begin Time 0 - 23 Hours 1 2
Winter Begin Day Type 0 = Specific day Specific day
1 = First Sunday of the month
2 = Second Sunday of the month
3 = Third Sunday of the month
4 = Fourth Sunday of the month
5 = Last Sunday of the month
Winter Begin Day 1 - 31 1 20
Winter Begin Month January, February, March… 1 March
IRIG-B Type (DBC Models 12 with HW Rev. 2)

IRIG-B Time 0 = Time Zone (Local). 1 0
1 = Universal Time (UTC)
Ethernet Port - PROCOME Protocol (DBC Models 12 with HW Rev. 2)

IP Address ddd. ddd. ddd. ddd 192.168.1.151
Network Mask ddd. ddd. ddd. ddd 255.255.255.0
Port Number 0 - 65535 1 20000
Keepalive: Maximum time between TCP 0 - 65 s. 1 9s
Messages
3.7-10
BDBN0901A
Protocols (DBC Models with IEC 61850)

IEC-61850 Settings Range Step By Default
Goose Channel LAN 1 LAN 2
LAN 2
Goose Out Enable YES / NO NO
TCP/IP Settings Range Step By Default
LAN 1
IP Address ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 192.168.1.81
DHCP Enable YES/ NO NO
Default Gateway ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 192.168.1.1
Network Mask ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 255.255.0.0
DNS Address ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 192.168.1.1
LAN 2
IP Address ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 192.168.1.91
DHCP Enable YES/ NO NO
Default Gateway ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 192.168.1.1
Network Mask ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 255.255.0.0
DNS Address ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 192.168.1.1
SNTP
SNTP enable YES / NO NO
Broadcast Synchronization Enable YES / NO NO
Unicast Synchronization Enable YES / NO NO
IP address of Primary SNTP Server ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 128.127.160.159
IP address of Slave SNTP Server ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd 128.127.160.160
Unicast Validity Timer 10 - 1000000 1 30
Unicast Error Timer 10 - 1000000 1 30
Number of Connection Retries 1 - 10 1 3
Tuning period 10 - 1000000 1 10
Retry Period 10 - 1000000 1 10
Broadcast validity Timer 0 - 1000000 1 0
Broadcast Error Timer 0 - 1000000 1 0
Maximum Synchronism Time Delay 0 - 1000000 1 0
Ignore Synchronization Leap Indicator YES / NO NO
Synchronism State Calculation Timing / Timing
Leap Indicator
Specific P Protocol Settings Range Step By Default
(see IEC61850 Annex)
Mean Presence Detection Time 0.03- 1 0.01 0.1
3.7-11
BDBN0901A
• Configuration Settings: HMI Access

DBC Model 10 (previous to DBC Models with HW Rev. 2)
5 - FRONT PORT COMM
6 - DATE & TIME
7 - PROTECTION CONFIG.
DBC Models 11 and 12 (previous to DBC Models with HW Rev. 2)

5 - DATE & TIME
DBC Models with HW Rev. 2 without IEC 61850

5 - DATE & TIME
7- IRIG-B TYPE
8- ETHERNET PORT (*)
DBC Models with HW Rev. 2 and IEC 61850

5 - FRONT PORT COMM
6 - DATE & TIME
8- IRIG-B TYPE
9- ETHERNET PORT (*)
(*) Depending on the model.
Note: if the DBC model contains a “P” protocol (IEC61850 with “Bonding” redundancy), the option PORT will be
displayed just before PROTOCOLS in the figure above. The setting Mean Presence Detection Time is within
PORT.
3.7-12
BDBN0901A
Passwords
0 - CONFIGURATION 0- PASSWORDS 0 - CONFIGURATION
1 - OPERATIONS ... 1 - OPERATIONS
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - SETTINGS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS
4 - INFORMATION
Operation Enable
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - PASSWORDS 0 - BLOCK/UNBLOCK
1 - OPERATIONS 1 - OPERATION PERMISSION 1 - 86 BY DIFF RESET
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP ... 2 - 86 BY OTHERS RESET
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - REMOTE SETTING
4 - INFORMATION
Inputs and Outputs Configuration

DBC Model 10
4 - INFORMATION ...
DBC Models 11 and 12

3 - CHANGE SETTINGS ...
4 - INFORMATION
3.7-13
BDBN0901A
Rear Port Communications

DBC Model 10 and Models with IEC 61850
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - PASSWORDS 0 - TERMINAL ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS 1 - OPERATION PERMISSION 1 - BAUD RATE
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - CONFIGURE INPUTS 2 - STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - CONFIGURE OUTPUTS 3 - PARITY
4 - INFORMATION 4 - REAR PORT COMM 4 - COMMS PASSWORD ENABLE
... 5 - COMMS PWD TIMEOUT
6 - COMMS PASSWORD
DBC Models 11 and 12 without IEC 61850

0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - PASSWORDS 0- TERMINAL ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS 1 - OPERATION PERMISSION 1- BAUD RATE
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP … 2- STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3- REAR PORT COMM 3- PARITY
4 - INFORMATION ... 4- COMMS PASSWORD ENABLE
5- COMMS PWD TIMEOUT
6- COMMS PASSWORD
DBC Model 10 and Models with MODBUS Protocol

0 - CONFIGURATION 0- PASSWORDS 0- TERMINAL ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS … 1- BAUD RATE
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 4- REAR PORT COMM 2- STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS … 3- PARITY
4 - INFORMATION 4- COMMS PASSWORD ENABLE
6- COMMS PASSWORD
7- MODBUS PORT
8- DBC OUTPUTS BY MODBUS
DBC Models 11 and 12 and Models with MODBUS Protocol

6- COMMS PASSWORD
7- MODBUS PORT
8- DBC OUTPUTS BY MODBUS
3.7-14
BDBN0901A
DBC Model 10 and Models with Protocol for CPT with IEC61850
6- COMMS PASSWORD
7- IEC PORT
DBC Models 11 and 12 and Models with Protocol for CPT with IEC61850
6- COMMS PASSWORD
7- IEC PORT
Front Port Communications

0 - CONFIGURATION 0- PASSWORDS
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 5- FRONT PORT COMM 1- STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS ... 2- PARITY
4 - INFORMATION

2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 4- FRONT PORT COMM 1- STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS ... 2- PARITY
4 - INFORMATION
3.7-15
BDBN0901A
Date and Time

1 - OPERATIONS … 0- DATE & TIME
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 6- DATE & TIME 1- SUMMER / WINTER*
4 - INFORMATION

1 - OPERATIONS … 0- DATE & TIME
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 5- DATE & TIME 1- SUMMER / WINTER*
4 - INFORMATION
0- PASSWORDS 0- LOCAL TIME ZONE

… 0- DATE & TIME 1- SUM/WIN CHANGE ENABLE
x- DATE & TIME 1- SUMMER / WINTER* 2- SUMMER STARTING HOUR
3- SUMMER STARTING TYPE
4- SUMMER STARTING DAY
5- SUMMER STARTING MONTH
6- WINTER STARTING HOUR
7- WINTER STARTING TYPE
8- WINTER STARTING DAY
9- WINTER STARTING MONTH
(*) Summer / Winter settings are only available for DBC models with HW Rev. 2.
Configure Protection
1 - OPERATIONS …
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 7- PROTECTION CONFIG. 0- DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING
4 - INFORMATION

1 - OPERATIONS …
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 6- PROTECTION CONFIG. 0- DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING
4 - INFORMATION
3.7-16
BDBN0901A
IRIG-B Type
0 - CONFIGURACION 0- PASSWORDS
1 - OPERATIONS …
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 8- IRIG-B TYPE 0- IRIG-B TIME TYPE
4 - INFORMATION

0 - CONFIGURACION 0- PASSWORDS
1 - OPERATIONS …
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 7- IRIG-B TYPE 0- IRIG-B TIME TYPE
4 - INFORMATION
Ethernet Port
0 - CONFIGURACION 0- PASSWORDS 0- IP ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS … 1- NETWORK MASK
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 9- ETHERNET PORT* 2- PORT NUMBER
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3- KEEPALIVE
4 - INFORMATION

0 - CONFIGURACION 0- PASSWORDS 0- IP ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS … 1- NETWORK MASK
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 8- ETHERNET PORT* 2- PORT NUMBER
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3- KEEPALIVE
4 - INFORMATION
(*) Depending on the model.
3.7-17
BDBN0901A
3.7-18
BDBN0901A
3.8 General
Settings

3.8.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 3.8-2
3.8.2 DBC General Settings (Central Unit) ....................................................................... 3.8-2
3.8.2.a Relay “In Service” Output ................................................................................... 3.8-2
3.8.2.b Substation Name ................................................................................................ 3.8-2
3.8.2.c Bus # Enable ...................................................................................................... 3.8-2
3.8.2.d Bus # Name ........................................................................................................ 3.8-2
3.8.2.e Trip Time Limit .................................................................................................... 3.8-3
3.8.2.f Reset Trip Time .................................................................................................. 3.8-3
3.8.2.g Current for Disabling ........................................................................................... 3.8-3
3.8.2.h Rated Phase-to-Phase Voltage .......................................................................... 3.8-3
3.8.3 Current Bay General Settings .................................................................................. 3.8-4
3.8.3.a Enable ................................................................................................................. 3.8-4
3.8.3.b Breaker ............................................................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.c Line ..................................................................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.d Bus Number Connection..................................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.e Invert Polarity ...................................................................................................... 3.8-4
3.8.3.f CT 89-TR Location (Logic 1) .............................................................................. 3.8-4
3.8.4 DBP-A General Settings (Voltage Bay) ................................................................... 3.8-5
3.8.4.a Enable ................................................................................................................. 3.8-5
3.8.4.b Invert Polarity ...................................................................................................... 3.8-5
3.8.5 General Settings ...................................................................................................... 3.8-5
3.8.1 Introduction
Both bay General settings and DBN Central Unit settings are shown is a settings table.
3.8.2 DBC General Settings (Central Unit)

3.8.2.a Relay “In Service” Output
Relay enabled (YES), means that all relay functions work normally (dependent on function
settings).
If DBC is disabled (NO), all functions are restricted to measurement operations only.
Measurements are visualized on display and through ZIVercomPlus® communications
program, but no bus can be tripped via digital input nor via differential element activation (as
their main differential elements cannot be activated), however a bus trip could occur via
activation of the Breaker Failure Unit. Also, with the DBC out of operation, Differential Alarm
Unit activation and the corresponding bus differential blocking is possible.
3.8.2.b Substation Name

This setting is only accessible through the communications program ZIVercomPlus® (not
included into the DBC HMI) and allows naming the substation with a maximum of 20 characters.
3.8.2.c Bus # Enable

Bus # enable (# = 1 to 4 or 5, depending on model), allows displaying measurements and
operations (both in the information menu and measurement screens displayed pressing F2). It
also allows sending bus voltages (only in models with voltage bays), differential and restraint
currents to control relays.
3.8.2.d Bus # Name

This setting can only be accessed from the communications program ZIVercomPlus® (not
included into the DBC HMI) and allows naming Bus # (# = 1 to 4 or 5, depending on model) with
a maximum of 20 characters.
3.8-2
BDBN0901A
3.8.2.e Trip Time Limit

Bay Retrip (RETRIP, RETRIP_R, RETRIP_S, RETRIP_T, RETRIP_RST) and trip (TRIP,
TRIP_87 and TRIP_BF) signals may not be active for longer than the Trip Time Limit setting
(see Bay Trip Logic and Breaker Failure paragraph), thus, signals deactivate when this limit is
exceeded provided the activation conditions remain (reset being normal before this time is
reached).
3.8.2.f Reset Trip Time

Bay retrip and bay trip signal reset time ensures a minimum signal activation time (See Bay
Tripping Logic section and Breaker Failure section).
Bay Retrip and Trip signals reset time only consider if the activation of these signals disappears
before the Trip Time Limit times out, as if this time is reached under activation conditions, reset
is instantaneous.
3.8.2.g Current for Disabling

This setting sets the sensitivity of the current supervision element of all three phases of the bay
to carry out the bay disable logic via digital input.
3.8.2.h Rated Phase-to-Phase Voltage

This setting is used only to define the voltage full scale for the control profile.
3.8-3
BDBN0901A
3.8.3 Current Bay General Settings

3.8.3.a Enable
This is a bay enable setting for bus protection (see Operation Principle and Logic section).
3.8.3.b Breaker
This setting is used to name the bay breaker. It can be accessed only through the
communications program ZIVercomPlus® (not included into the DBC HMI).
3.8.3.c Line
This setting is used to name the bay line. It can be accessed only through the communications
program ZIVercomPlus® (not included into the DBC HMI).
3.8.3.d Bus Number Connection

The bus setting defines the bus to which the bay is connected according to the table below:
Table 3.8-1: Bus Connection

Value Meaning
0 The bay is a tie or a bay connected to the bus defined by disconnecting switches inputs
1 Rigidly connected to bus 1
5 Rigidly connected to bus 5 (model 12 only)
For more details see current bay logic section.
3.8.3.e Invert Polarity

If the Invert Polarity setting is set to YES, analog channel polarity is opposite to the polarity
shown in the drawing of relay external connections.
3.8.3.f CT 89-TR Location (Logic 1)

This setting defines the location of the bay current transformer relative to 89-TR disconnecting
switch: specifically, whether the CT is located on the bus side or line side with respect to said
disconnecting switch. For more details see Transfer Bus with Combined Coupling Logic section.
3.8-4
BDBN0901A
3.8.4 DBP-A General Settings (Voltage Bay)

3.8.4.a Enable
This is a bay enable setting for bus protection.
3.8.4.b Invert Polarity

If the Invert Polarity setting is set to YES, analog channel polarity is opposite to the polarity
shown in the drawing of relay external connections.
3.8.5 General Settings
DBC General Settings (1 Group)

Settings Range Step By Default
Unit in Service YES / NO - NO
Substation Name (*) -
Bus # Enable YES / NO - YES
Bus # Name (*) -
Trip Time Limit 10 - 1000 cycles 1 cycle 1000 cycles
Reset Trip Time 2 - 20 cycles 1 cycle 3 cycles
Current for Disabling 0.05 – 2.00 A 0.01 A 0.15 A
Rated Line-to-Line Voltage (**) 100 - 130 V 0.01 V 110 V
# = 1 to 4 (1 to 5 in Model 12)
(*) Only available through ZIVercomPlus® communications program.
(**)Only available in Models with Voltage Bays (DBC**B and DBC**D).
DBP-B General Settings (1 Group)

Breaker (*) 5 characters maximum -
Line (*) 20 characters -
maximum
Bus Number Connection 0-4 1 0
0 - 5 (model 12)
Invert Polarity YES / NO - NO
CT 89-TR Location (Logic 1) 0 - CT Bus Side - CT Bus Side
1 - CT Line Side
(*) Only available through ZIVercomPlus® communications program.
DBP-A General Settings (1 Group)

Invert Polarity YES / NO - NO
3.8-5
BDBN0901A
• General Settings: HMI Access

Current Bay General Settings

... ...
28 - BAY # 28
29 - BAY # 29(*)
30 - BAY # 30(*)
31 - BAY # 31(*)
32 - BAY # 32(*)
(*) Only available in Models with Voltage Bays (DBC**B and DBC**D).
4 - LOGIC 4 - BUS 4
... 6 - CURRENT FOR DISABLING
7 - TRIP TIME LIMIT
8 - U NOMINAL (*)
(*)Only available in Models with Voltage Bays (DBC**B and DBC**D).
Note: For DBN model 12, the table above also shows BUS 5.
3.8-6
BDBN0901A
DBP-B General Settings

5 - BAY #5
...
28 - BAY # 28
29 - BAY # 29(*)
30 - BAY # 30(*)
31 - BAY # 31(*)
32 - BAY # 32(*)
0 - GENERAL 0- BAY ENABLE

1 - PROTECTION 1- BUS
2 - LOGIC 2- INVERT POLARITY
3- LOCATION CT - 89TR
DBP-A General Settings

2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - BAY #2
5 - BAY #5
...
28 - BAY # 28
29 - BAY# 29(*)
30 - BAY # 30(*)
31 - BAY # 31(*)
32 - BAY # 32(*)
0- GENERAL 0 - ENABLE
1- PROTECTION 1 - INVERT POLARITY
3.8-7
BDBN0901A
Table 3.8-2: DBC Auxiliary Outputs

AJS_F_SERV System Out of Service by Setting It activates when DBC relay
setting “In Service” is set to
NO.
3.8-8
BDBN0901A
3.9 Change Settings
Group

3.9.1 Description ............................................................................................................... 3.9-2
3.9.2 Changing the Settings Group via ZIVercomPlus® ................................................... 3.9-2
3.9.3 Change of Settings Group via DBC HMI ................................................................. 3.9-2
3.9.4 Change of Settings Group via Digital Inputs ............................................................ 3.9-3
3.9.5 Digital Inputs to Change Settings Groups ............................................................... 3.9-3
3.9.6 Events to Change Settings Groups ......................................................................... 3.9-4
3.9.1 Description
Parameters defining equipment operation can be grouped into homogeneous aggregates given
below:
- Configuration Settings.
- Central Unit General Settings.
- Bay Units General Settings.
- Transformer Settings.
- Central Unit Protection Settings.
- Bay Units Protection Settings.
- Central Unit Logic Settings.
- Bay Units Logic Settings.
- Oscillography Settings.
- Events Mask Settings.
The Protection and Logic settings are stored in three groups (Group 1, Group 2, or Group 3),
which can be activated or deactivated from the keypad or communications ports, or by using
digital inputs. In DBC model 12 with HW Rev. 2 (DBCC*****x12**, where x = 6, 7, 8 or 9) there
is only a settings table for the Logic settings groups (both of the Central Unit and bay units).
As stated in the DBC Configuration Settings section, setting Remote Setting Configuration is
used to enable (or disable) the change of settings table via: remote port (in this case the change
can be via communications and keyboard) or digital inputs (in this case the change can only be
via digital inputs).
3.9.2 Changing the Settings Group via ZIVercomPlus®

ZIVercomPlus® ACTIONS menu includes the Group Activation option. In the example of the
figure below Actual Value shows that Group 1 is the equipment active group, while Group 2
has been selected from the column Control Operation. So that when the action is “executed”
the relay will change its active group to group 2.
3.9.3 Change of Settings Group via DBC HMI

After DBC HMI selection to change the group, the user must introduce the password to select
the group to be activated. Selecting the group displays a screen to confirm the change. After
confirmation the relay activates the new group and a screen is displayed informing the group
has been activated.
3.9-2
BDBN0901A
3.9.4 Change of Settings Group via Digital Inputs

This function is used to modify via digital inputs the active settings group and therefore the
protection response. In this way, relay operation can be adapted to the change of external
conditions through digital inputs.
The use of this function requires adequate programming of digital inputs, via the programmable
digital input function, to control the settings group external activation function.
This programming change is made from the Configuration option in the main menu by
selecting Operation Enable and then Remote Settings. The value of DI (Digital Input) must be
set to “1” (YES) to enable settings group changes via digital inputs.
When Settings Group Control by Digital Inputs is enabled, no setting changes can be made
from the keypad or the local port. If the Active group option on the main menu is selected from
the keypad, the display will indicate: ACCESS DENIED. It is not permitted to simultaneously
enable Settings Group Control by Digital Inputs (DI set to “Y”) and by Remote Communications
Port (REM_P set to “Y”). Three digital inputs to activate the three setting groups must be
programmed to use this function.
Activation of the inputs, GROUP_1, GROUP_2 and GROUP_3, will activate GROUP 1, GROUP
2 and GROUP 3 respectively.
If, while one of the inputs is active, either of the other two or both are activated, no group
change will take place. The status contact settings group control logic will recognize a single
input only. If all three inputs are de-energized, the equipment will remain in the last settings
group activated.
If the Inhibit Setting Group Control Signal (INH_C_ED) is assigned to a status contact input,
and if that input is energized, it will prevent setting group control by Digital Inputs.
3.9.5 Digital Inputs to Change Settings Groups

Table 3.9-1: Digital Inputs of the DBC to Change Settings Group
GROUP_1 Change to Settings Group 1
They alternatively activate the
GROUP_2 Change to Settings Group 2 corresponding settings group
(1, 2 or 3). This function is
subordinated to the
GROUP_3 Change to Settings Group 3 Configuration setting.
Prevents table change by

INH_SGC Inhibit Change of Settings Group
digital input.
3.9-3
BDBN0901A
3.9.6 Events to Change Settings Groups
Table 3.9-2: Events to Change Settings Groups

Group Event
On Settings Group 1 Activation by Digital Input
General On Settings Group 2 Activation by Digital Input
On Settings Group 3 Activation by Digital Input
3.9-4
BDBN0901A
3.10 Event
Record

3.10.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 3.10-2
3.10.2 Pickup Events ........................................................................................................ 3.10-2
3.10.3 Event Mask ............................................................................................................ 3.10-2
3.10.4 Consulting the Record ........................................................................................... 3.10-3
3.10.5 Event Record Settings (via Communications) ....................................................... 3.10-3
3.10.1 Description
Every signal change in the DBN is stored in the event record. All the events that can occur are
reflected in this manual under the description of each section. The three tables below show the
events corresponding to the pickup of DBC, DBP-B (or “V” type bay) and DBP-A models
respectively.
The event record capacity is one hundred (100) events. When the record is full, a new event
displaces the oldest event
Event recorder management is optimized so that simultaneous operations generated by the

same event occupy a single position in the event memory. Simultaneous events are those
operations occurring within a 1 ms interval, the resolution time of the recorder.
The event date and time is stored in each event register (with millisecond accuracy).
3.10.2 Pickup Events
Table 3.10-1: Event of the DBC Pickup

Group Event
General ON Equipment Cold Start Up
Table 3.10-2: Event of the DBP-B (or “V” Type Bay) Pickup
Group Event
General Bay # Power Up
lb = 1 to 14 or 1 to 28 depending on the model (that is, depending on the current bays number).
Table 3.10-3:Event of the DBP-A Pickup

Group Event
General Bay # Power Up
vb = 29 to 32 (that is, in each voltage bay of the DBC**B and DBC**D models).
3.10.3 Event Mask

It is possible to mask unneeded events or those events without importance for the study of
protection behavior. Event masking can be done only via communications.
Important: Events that can be generated in excess should be masked since they could fill the
memory (100 events) and erase more important previous events.
3.10-2
BDBN0901A
3.10 Event Record
3.10.4 Consulting the Record

The communications and remote management program, ZIVercomPlus®, has a completely
decoded system for consulting the Event Record.
3.10.5 Event Record Settings (via Communications)
Events Mask
IED events may be masked separately
3.10-3
BDBN0901A
3.10-4
BDBN0901A
3.11 Oscillographic
Recording

3.11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 3.11-2
3.11.2 Number of Oscillograms and Length of each Stored Oscillogram ........................ 3.11-2
3.11.2.a Oscillogram Lengths for Models 10 and 11 ...................................................... 3.11-2
3.11.2.b Oscillogram Lengths for Model 12 .................................................................... 3.11-3
3.11.3 Oscillography Trigger Enabling.............................................................................. 3.11-3
3.11.4 Stored Data ............................................................................................................ 3.11-4
3.11.4.a Analog Channels .............................................................................................. 3.11-4
3.11.4.b Digital Channels................................................................................................ 3.11-4
3.11.4.c Digital Channels in Models 10 and 11 .............................................................. 3.11-5
3.11.4.d Digital Channels in Model 12 .......................................................................... 3.11-15
3.11.5 Oscillographic Recording Records ...................................................................... 3.11-25
3.11.6 Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording ..................................................... 3.11-28
3.11.7 Events of the Oscillographic Recording ............................................................... 3.11-28
3.11.1 Introduction
Below the DBN Oscillography Recorder is described with DBC data and bay data whether DBP
or “V” type (DRV or DCV). On the other hand, in each “V” type (DRV or DCV) bay there is
Oscillography Recorder specific only to that bay. Refer to the manual applicable to that
equipment.
The Oscillography function is composed of two different sub functions: Capture and Display.
The first captures and stores protection data inside the IED and is part of the relay's software;
the second retrieves and presents the stored data graphically with one or more programs
running on a PC connected to the protection.
Oscillogram Capture is carried out with a sampling and storing frequency of 48 samples per
cycle. The values of analog magnitudes and of all digital channels are captured in each
oscillogram, as well as the oscillogram pickup time.
The IEDs come with a display and analysis program, because the waveform records are in
binary COMTRADE format according to IEEE standard C37.111-1999. See in chapter 3.13 the
description of the oscillogram capture process.
3.11.2 Number of Oscillograms and Length of each Stored Oscillogram

The number of oscillograms stored in the relay (from 2 to 16) varies as a function of the setting
Number of Oscillograms and Oscillogram Length. Oscillogram length varies as a function of
this setting and as a function of the DBC model, as shown in the tables below.
3.11.2.a Oscillogram Lengths for Models 10 and 11
Number of Length of each Oscillogram (cycles)

Oscillograms DBCB#A DBCB#B DBCB#C DBCB#D
2 150 133 102 94
3 113 100 77 70
4 90 80 61 56
5 74 66 50 46
6 64 57 44 40
7 56 49 38 34
8 50 44 34 31
9 44 39 30 27
10 40 35 27 25
11 37 33 25 23
12 34 30 23 21
13 31 27 21 19
14 30 26 20 18
15 27 24 18 17
16 25 22 17 16
3.11-2
BDBN0901A
3.11.2.b Oscillogram Lengths for Model 12

The DBC model 12 cannot be applied to models with voltage bays. Therefore, the table below
shows oscillogram lengths for models DBC#A (with 14 current bays) DBC#C (with 28 current
bays).
Number of Length of each Oscillogram (cycles)

Oscillograms DBCB#A DBCB#C
2 135 94
3 102 70
4 81 56
5 67 46
6 58 40
7 50 34
8 45 31
9 40 27
10 36 25
11 33 23
12 30 21
13 28 19
14 27 18
15 24 17
16 23 16
3.11.3 Oscillography Trigger Enabling

The trigger function is determined by the settings Oscillography Trigger Enabling corresponding
to given bus internal signals (differential element trip, fault start, breaker failure trip, differential
alarm 87 blocking, breaker failure pickup) and oscillogram pickup signal by command or digital
input.
If Oscillography Trigger Enabling by a given signal is set to YES, the oscillogram picks up when
the signal activates. On the contrary, the oscillogram does not pickup by activation of said signal
if the applicable enable setting is set to NO.
3.11-3
BDBN0901A
3.11.4 Stored Data

Data that the oscillography records for each sample are:
3.11.4.a Analog Channels

- Three-phase currents per current bay.
- Three line voltages per voltage bay.
- Three differential currents per Bus (4 or 5 Buses, depending on the model).
- Three restraint currents per Bus (4 or 5 Buses, depending on the model).
The number of bays and busbars shown in the oscillograms (in COMTRADE format) can be
selected from the ZIVercomPlus® oscillogram capture screen. In DBC model 12 with HW Rev.
2 (DBCC*****x12**, where x = 6, 7, 8 or 9), the analog channels collected in the oscillograph
are given by the settings of each busbar and bay within the settings group Channel Filter. For
more details see the ZIVercomPlus® section.
Analog channels corresponding to the voltage and current of Bay Units are shown in the oscillo
in terms of primary values, whereas analog channels corresponding to differential currents and
restraint currents are shown in terms of secondary values (considering the transformer ratio
reference).
3.11.4.b Digital Channels

Each oscillogram includes the following digital channels:
- Differential and Supervision units status.

- Breaker Failure status of each bay.
- Status of the trips initiated on each bus (by Differential Unit, by Digital Input or by
Breaker Failure).
- Activation of Differential Blocking by the activation of the Differential Alarm of each bus.
- Trips generated in each bay.
- Fault start-up in each Phase and Bus.
- External fault in each Phase and Bus.
- Directional Blocking in each Phase and Bus.
- Current bay disable (via Dynamic Zone or Digital Input).
- Status of combined coupling settings in logic 1 (transferred 1 and transferred 2
settings).
- Each possible Bus 87 Blocking.
- Bus trip blockings via BF or digital input.
- All possible Single Bus Conditions.
- BF and Retrip output blocking (in DBC).
- Latched BF (in DBC).
- Tie Blind Spot.
- Lockout (in DBC).
- Bus Differential Alarm.
- Activation of all DBC digital inputs (DI_1 to DI_14 no matter the DBC model has one or
two input and output cards).
- Activation of all bay digital inputs (DI_1 to DI_16 no matter the selected bay has one or
two input and output boards). The number of bays displayed depends on the number of
bays of the DBC model.
3.11-4
BDBN0901A
3.11.4.c Digital Channels in Models 10 and 11

Oscillogram digital channels of a 14 bay DBN model 10 or 11 (DBCB*A), for example, are as
follows (the number stands for the channel number in the COMTRADE file, and the label shows
the channel name in the COMTRADE file):
Number Description Label

1 Bus 1 Phase R Differential Unit Activation 87_B_B1_R
2 Bus 1 Phase S Differential Unit Activation 87_B_B1_S
3 Bus 1 Phase T Differential Unit Activation 87_B_B1_T
13 Phase R Supervision Differential Unit Activation 87Sup_R
14 Phase S Supervision Differential Unit Activation 87Sup_S
15 Phase T Supervision Differential Unit Activation 87Sup_T
16 Bay 1 Breaker Failure BF-Bay1
3.11-5
BDBN0901A

48 Bus 1 Trip by Differential Unit TRIP_87_B1
49 Bus 1 Trip by External Input TRIP_DI_B1
50 Bus 1 Trip by Breaker Failure TRIP_BF_B1
51 87 Blocking by Bus 1 Differential Alarm 87BL_ALR_B1
64 Bay 1 Trip TRIP_Bay1
3.11-6
BDBN0901A

96 Bay 1 Disabled by Digital Input or by Dynamic Zone DZ/DI-dsbl-Bay1
3.11-7
BDBN0901A

128 Start Fault R Bus 1 F.INI_B1_R
129 Start Fault S Bus 1 F.INI_B1_S
130 Start Fault T Bus 1 F.INI_B1_T
140 Directional Blocking R Bus 1 DIR_BL_B1_R
144 External Fault R Bus 1 Ext.F_B1_R
145 External Fault S Bus 1 Ext.F_B1_S
146 External Fault T Bus 1 Ext.F_B1_T
156 Directional Blocking S Bus 1 DIR_BL_B1_S
160 Transferred Coupling 1 - Settings 2 Cpler1_Tranf2
3.11-8
BDBN0901A

168 Bus 1 87 Blocking by Combined Coupling Bypass 87BL_B1_Byp_CC
172 Directional Blocking T Bus 1 DIR_BL_B1_T
176 Buses 3 and 4 Connected as Single Bus 3 Single Bus 3-4
182 Bus 1 Trip Blocking by Breaker Failure or Digital Input BF_DI_BL_B1
186 Bus 1 Differential Unit Blocking 87BL_B1
190 Differential Units Blocking by Communications Failure 87BL_COM
191 Differential Units Blocking by Hardware Failure 87BL_HW
192 Differential Units Blocking by Discordance 87BL_Dsgr
193 BF and Retrip Outputs Blocking (in all bays) BF_RETR_BL
194 Latched Breaker Failure BF_SEAL
195 Blind Spot in Coupler 1 Blind Spot_Cpler1
199 Lockout LOCKOUT (86)
200 Differential Alarm in Bus 1 87ALR_B1
204 DBC (Central Unit) IN-1 Digital Input DI_1
3.11-9
BDBN0901A

218 Bay 1 IN-1 Digital Input DI_1-Bay1
3.11-10
BDBN0901A

3.11-11
BDBN0901A

3.11-12
BDBN0901A

3.11-13
BDBN0901A

3.11-14
BDBN0901A
3.11.4.d Digital Channels in Model 12

Oscillogram digital channels of a 14 bay DBN model 12 (DBCB*A), for example, are as follows
(the number stands for the channel number in the COMTRADE file, and the label shows the
channel name in the COMTRADE file):

3.11-15
BDBN0901A

68 Phase R Supervision Differential Unit Activation 87Sup_R
69 Phase S Supervision Differential Unit Activation 87Sup_S
70 Phase T Supervision Differential Unit Activation 87Sup_T
3.11-16
BDBN0901A

3.11-17
BDBN0901A

159 External Fault S Bus 2 Ext.F_B2_R
160 External Fault T Bus 2 Ext.F_B2_R
3.11-18
BDBN0901A

218 Differential Units Blocking by Communications Failure 87BL_COM
219 Differential Units Blocking by Hardware Failure 87BL_HW
220 Differential Units Blocking by Discordance 87BL_Dsgr
221 BF and Retrip Outputs Blocking (in all bays) BF_RETR_BL (DBC)
222 Latched Breaker Failure BF_SEAL
227 Lockout LOCKOUT(86)
3.11-19
BDBN0901A

3.11-20
BDBN0901A

3.11-21
BDBN0901A

3.11-22
BDBN0901A

3.11-23
BDBN0901A

3.11-24
BDBN0901A
3.11.5 Oscillographic Recording Records
Oscillographic Recording
Oscillography (Number and Length)* 2 - 16 disturbance 1 Mod. 10: 2
records disturbance records
Mod. 11 and 12: 8
disturbance records
PostFault Cycles (Note) 2 - X** cycles Mod. 10: 50
Mod. 11 and 12: 30
* Oscillogram length varies depending on model. See “Number of oscillograms and length of each stored
oscillogram” section
** X being the number of oscillogram cycles selected via setting “Number of oscillograms and oscillogram
length”
Note: The number of after fault cycles of each oscillogram must be set taking into account that it must be less
or equal to the number of cycles length (the minimum number of after fault cycles being 2 cycles).
Channel Filter (DBC Models with HW Rev. 2)

Bus Bus 1 YES / NO YES
Bus 2 YES / NO YES
Bus 3 YES / NO YES
Bus 4 YES / NO YES
Bus 5 YES / NO YES
Bay Bay IED 1 YES / NO YES
Bay IED 2 YES / NO YES
Bay IED 3 YES / NO YES
Bay IED #lb* YES / NO YES
(*) #lb = 14 or 28 line bays (depending on the DBC Model).
3.11-25
BDBN0901A
Oscillography Trigger Enabling

Setting HMI Label Range By Default
Bus 1 Differential Trip 1D YES / NO YES
Fault Start 1E YES / NO YES
Breaker Failure Trip 1F YES / NO YES
87 Block by Differential Alarm 1A YES / NO YES
Breaker Failure Pickup 1X YES / NO YES
(Note) Fault Start 5E YES / NO YES
Command or Digital Input EX YES / NO YES
Note: Only for DBC Models 12.
3.11-26
BDBN0901A
As previously stated, if Oscillography Trigger Enabling settings are set to YES, the
oscillogram picks up the instant the applicable enable signal is activated. Below are the signals
for oscillogram pickup:
- Oscillogram pickup by command or digital input: enables oscillogram pickup via

activation of DBC digital input Oscillography Trigger or via HMI oscillogram pickup
command or via the ZIVercomPlus®.
- Differential trip (each bus): enables oscillogram pickup via differential activation of the
applicable bus trip DBC internal signal.
- Fault Start (each bus): enables oscillogram pickup via activation of the applicable bus
fault start DBC internal signal (in any phase).
- Breaker failure trip (each bus): enables oscillogram pickup via activation of the
applicable bus breaker failure DBC internal signal.
- Differential alarm 87 blocking (each bus): enables oscillogram pickup via activation of
bus 87 blocking DBC internal signal by differential alarm in said bus.
- Breaker Failure pickup (each bus): enables oscillogram pickup via activation of internal
breaker failure start by digital input in any bay connected to the applicable bus (namely,
via activation of any of the breaker failure logic inputs BFIR, BFIS, BFIT, BFI3ph or
BFI_NC).
• Oscillographic Recording: HMI Access
0 - CONFIGURATION 0- CENTRAL UNIT 0 - GENERAL

... 6 - DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL (**)
28 - BAY # 28
29 - BAY # 29(*)
30 - BAY # 30(*)
31 - BAY # 31(*)
32 - BAY # 32(*)
(*) Only available in Models with Voltage Bays (DBC**B and DBC**D).
0 - GENERAL
1 - TRANSFORMER
2 - PROTECTION
3 - DIRECTIONAL BLOCKING
4 - LOGIC 0 - NUMBER OF OSCILLOS
5- OSCILLOGRAPHY 1 - POSTFAULT CYCLES
6- DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL (**) 2 - INITIATE ELEMENTS
3 - BUSBARS / BAYS(***)
(**) Only for models with DNP 3.0 Protocol.

(***) Only available in DBC Models with HW Rev. 2 (DBCC*****x12**, where x = 6, 7, 8 or 9).
3.11-27
BDBN0901A
3.11.6 Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording
Table 3.11-1: Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording (DBC)

DBC Input that activates
INIC_OSC Oscillography Trigger
oscillographic trigger.
Table 3.11-2: Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording Trigger

BFIR External BF Activation - Phase R Single phase breaker failure
BFIS External BF Activation - Phase S initiate, which will be
supervised by single phase
BFIT External BF Activation - Phase T
the single phase timer starts
counting.
BFI3ph External BF Activation - 3-Phase Three phase breaker failure
initiate, which will be
supervised by three phase
the three phase timer starts
counting.
BFI_NC External BF Activation - No Load 3-Phase Three phase breaker failure
initiate, which will progress if
the breaker is closed.
3.11.7 Events of the Oscillographic Recording
Table 3.11-3: Events of the Oscillographic Recording (DBC)

Group Event
General Oscillography Trigger
3.11-28
BDBN0901A
3.12 Inputs, Outputs & LED
Targets

3.12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 3.12-2
3.12.2 Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................... 3.12-2
3.12.2.a Logic Inputs of the Central Unit (DBC) ............................................................. 3.12-2
3.12.2.b Inputs Activation Events of the Central Unit (DBC) .......................................... 3.12-3
3.12.2.c Inputs Activation Events of the Bay Unit........................................................... 3.12-4
3.12.3 Auxiliary Outputs .................................................................................................... 3.12-5
3.12.3.a Logical Outputs of the Bay Unit ........................................................................ 3.12-7
3.12.3.b Logical Outputs of the Central Unit (DBC)........................................................ 3.12-7
3.12.4 Trip Outputs ........................................................................................................... 3.12-8
3.12.4.a Trip Outputs of the Central Unit (DBC) ............................................................. 3.12-8
3.12.4.b Trip Outputs of the Current Bay Unit ................................................................ 3.12-8
3.12.5 LED Targets (LEDs)............................................................................................... 3.12-9
3.12.6 Digital Inputs, Auxiliary Outputs and LEDs Test .................................................. 3.12-10
3.12.1 Introduction
The DBN has a flexible, user-definable structure of Inputs / Outputs / LEDs. It is described in
the following sections. Factory programming included default values. Settings can be changed
using the ZIVercomPlus® software package (communications front port).
In sections in which current bay Inputs, Outputs and LEDs are described, note that Inputs and
Outputs of “V” type (DRV or DCV) bays must be configured through the ZIVercomPlus® linked
to said bay. For details refer to the manual of the “V” type bay and Chapter 1.2 of the present
manual.

Several logic functions can be controlled by the logic input signals and any of these logic input
signals can be assigned to the available status contact inputs.
The number of digital inputs available will depend on each particular model. The DBN system is
provided with seven physical digital inputs in the DBC and as many again in the auxiliary
module (optional), as well as 8 physical digital inputs in each bay element, expandable to 16
through the auxiliary bay module (optional).
It must be remembered that more than one logic input signal can be assigned to a single status
contact input, but the same logic input signal can not be assigned to more than one status
contact input.
Digital inputs are sent from the Input / Output Configuration screen (or Input Configuration
screen for model 10) in the HMI Configuration menu.
3.12.2.a Logic Inputs of the Central Unit (DBC)
Table 3.12-1: Logic Inputs of the DBC

Activating the input for an
instant restores the DBC
memorized LEDs and the last
trip from the display. (If
RST_LED_HMI Reset LEDs and Last Trip
activated for 2 seconds or less,
it checks the correct LEDs
operation, without restoring the
memorized LEDs).
The activation pulse of this
input resets the memorized
RST_LEDS_Bay Reset Bay IEDs LEDs
LEDs of all bays linked to the
DBC.
3.12-2
BDBN0901A
3.12.2.b Inputs Activation Events of the Central Unit (DBC)
Table 3.12-2: Inputs Activation Events of the Central Unit DBC

Group Events Remarks
Status Contact Input IN-1 Activated
First inputs and outputs module
inputs.
Inputs: Activated
Second inputs and outputs
module inputs.
Status Contact Input IN-1 Deactivated
inputs.
Inputs: Status Contact Input IN-7 Deactivated
Deactivated Status Contact Input IN-8 Deactivated
module inputs.
3.12-3
BDBN0901A
3.12.2.c Inputs Activation Events of the Bay Unit
Table 3.12-3: Inputs Activation Events of the Bay

Group Event Remarks
Bay #b Status Contact Input IN-1 Activated
inputs.
Bay #lb Inputs Bay #b Status Contact Input IN-7 Activated
Activated Bay #b Status Contact Input IN-8 Activated
module inputs.
Bay #b Status Contact Input IN-1 Deactivated
inputs.
Bay #lb Inputs Bay #b Status Contact Input IN-7 Deactivated
Deactivated Bay #b Status Contact Input IN-8 Deactivated
module inputs.
#b = indicates bay number.
3.12-4
BDBN0901A

The system DBN has at DBC (Central Unit) 7 auxiliary contact outputs (6 of them configurable)
for the main module and the same number for the auxiliary module (optional). Bay IEDs contain
8 auxiliary contact outputs (7 configurable), which can be doubled to 16 with the optional I/O
expansion board (14 of them are configurable). Operational principles are described in the
following paragraphs.
The DBN System logic and metering units generate a series of logic output signals during
operation. Each of these signals has either a “true” or “false” value and this status can be used
as an input to either of the combinational logic gates shown in Figure 3.12.1. The desired final
output from the logic cell can then be connected to any one of the programmable auxiliary
contact outputs available in the equipment.
Figure 3.12.1 shows schematically one output configuration, while figure 3.12.2 shows the
ZIVerComPlus® screen to configure output 1.Two blocks of eight inputs are available. One of
the blocks performs an OR operation with the selected signals (any signal activates the logic
gate output). The other block performs an AND operation with the selected signals (all signals
need to be active to activate the logic gate output). The result of these two blocks is then
operated through either an AND or an OR gate. The pulse option can be added to the result of
this operation. It works as follows:
• Without pulses: By adjusting the pulse timer to 0, the output signal remains active as
long as the signal that activated it lasts.
• With pulses: Once the output signal is activated, it remains the set time whether or not
the signal that generated it is deactivated before or remains active.
Figure 3.12.1: Auxiliary Contact Output Logic Cell Block Diagram.
3.12-5
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.12.2: ZIVerComPlus Communication Program Screen Corresponding to 1 Auxiliary Output

Configuration.
Digital Outputs leave the factory with a certain setup, which may be modified through the local
communications port, by means of the ZIVerComPlus® program, if the user so requires. To
carry out digital input transmissions, the HMI screen Configure Inputs / Outputs (or Configure
Outputs in Models 10) must be called (via Configuration HMI menu).
Logic Outputs corresponding to the signals stated below are stored in nonvolatile memory, so
that information is not lost when power is back on after a power outage.
- Reduction to single bus.

- Lockout (86).
- Bus Protection Latched Trip.
- Bus Trip Blocking via Differential Unit.
- Bus Trip Blocking via Breaker Failure or Digital Input.
- Blocking of Breaker Failure and Retrip Outputs (available only in DBC and DBP-B).
- Latched Breaker Failure (DBP-B).
- Global Latched Breaker Failure DBC.
3.12-6
BDBN0901A
3.12.3.a Logical Outputs of the Bay Unit
Table 3.12-4: Logical Outputs of the DBP (Bay Unit)

IN_1_P IN-1 Bay IED Digital Input Activated
IN_8_P IN-8 Bay IED Digital Input Activated Output active depending on
IN_9_P (*) IN-9 Bay IED Digital Input Activated input status.
IN_10_P (*) IN-10 Bay IED Digital Input Activated
(*) Only for models with Inputs / Outputs Auxiliary Module.
3.12.3.b Logical Outputs of the Central Unit (DBC)
Table 3.12-5: Logical Outputs of the DBC

IN_1 IN-1 Central Unit DI Activated
IN_8(*) IN-8 Central Unit DI Activated Output active depending on
IN_9(*) IN-9 Central Unit DI Activated input status.
IN_10(*) IN-10 Central Unit DI Activated
(*) Only for models with Inputs / Outputs Auxiliary Module.
3.12-7
BDBN0901A
3.12.4 Trip Outputs

3.12.4.a Trip Outputs of the Central Unit (DBC)
The Central Unit is provided with two tripping relays in the first input / output board and two
other tripping relays in the input / output expansion board (only available in models with two
input / output boards). Each tripping relay is provided with two normally open contacts.
The first input / output board includes the following four contacts (not user configurable):
- SP1-1 and SP1-2, with signal [(Bus 1trip)+(Bus 1 latched trip)]

- SP2-1 and SP2-2, with signal [(Bus 2trip)+(Bus 2 latched trip)]
The input / output expansion board includes the following four contacts (not user configurable:
- SP3-1 and SP3-2, with signal [(Bus 3 trip)+(Bus 3 latched trip)]

- SP4-1 and SP4-2, with signal [(Bus 4 trip)+(Bus 4 latched trip)]
For more details see External connection schemes.
3.12.4.b Trip Outputs of the Current Bay Unit

DBP Trip Outputs are described below. For details of “V” type (DRV or DCV) bay trip outputs,
refer to the applicable manual.
Each current bay element has two tripping relays in the first input / output board and two other
tripping relays in the input / output expansion board (only available in models with two input /
output boards). Each tripping relay has two contacts. Three of these tripping relays are
configurable via setting Retrip Type, as shown in the table below, while the second relay of the
first board is always configured with the Lockout signal (provided with one normally open
contact and one normally closed contact).
Inputs / Outputs first board
Trip Relays Contacts Configured signal by means of “Retrip Type” Setting:

DBP-B Single-Phase With Retrip Relay Without Retrip
Relay
SP1 SP1-1 (N.O.) TRIP + RETRIP_R + RETRIP_RST TRIP TRIP
SP1-2 (N.O.)
SP3 SP3-1 (N.O.) LOCKOUT (86) LOCKOUT (86) LOCKOUT (86)
SP3-2 (N.C.)
Inputs / outputs second board
Trip Relays Contacts Configured signal by means of “Retrip Type” Setting:

DBP-B Single-Phase With Retrip Relay Without Retrip
Relay
SP2 SP2-1 (N.O.) TRIP + RETRIP_S + RETRIP_RST TRIP TRIP
SP2-2 (N.O.)
SP4 SP4-1 (N.O.) TRIP + RETRIP_T + RETRIP_RST RETRIP TRIP
SP4-2 (N.O.)
For more details see External connection schemes.
3.12-8
BDBN0901A
3.12.5 LED Targets (LEDs)

DBN Systems are provided with twelve (12) optical indicators (LEDs) located on the front panel
of the Central Unit (DBC) and four (4) in the Bay Units (DBP). A similar logic cell structure,
shown in the block diagram of Figure 3.12.2, permits the user to create combinational logic
equations for the LED Target Outputs. One of the two blocks has eight inputs that perform an
OR operation (any signal activates the output). The other block has one input. The two blocks
together can perform an OR or an AND operation without the subsequent possibility of using
pulses.
In figure 3.12.4, which represents the ZIVerComPlus® screen for LED 3 configuration.
Figure 3.12.3: Target Output Logic Cell Block Diagram.
Figure 3.12.4: ZIVercomPlus® Communication Program Screen corresponding to LED 3 Setup.
3.12-9
BDBN0901A
Each LED can be latched or unlatched. If an LED is latched, it will remain illuminated until reset.
DBC optical indicators can be reset pressing the key F2 (from the HMI Default screen) to
display the Reset LEDs screen, and pressing until all the memorized LEDs deactivate. To reset
bay LEDs via keyboard, press the R key of each bay, until all memorized LEDs deactivate.
LEDs may also be reset via the activation of digital input: DBC LEDs may be reset via digital
input RST_LED_HMI of the DBC; all bay LEDs linked to the DBC may be reset via DBC digital
input RST_LEDs_Bay.
The latching function resides in the volatile memory section of the microprocessor. A power
supply loss will cause any latched LED to reset.
LED Targets leave the factory with a certain setup, which may be modified through the local
communications port, by means of the ZIVerComPlus® program, if the user so requires. To
carry out LEDs transmissions, the HMI screen Configure Inputs / Outputs (or Configure
Outputs in Models 10) must be called (via Configuration HMI menu) as outputs and LEDs are
transmitted simultaneously.
3.12.6 Digital Inputs, Auxiliary Outputs and LEDs Test

• Digital Inputs
For the inputs test, the rated voltage is applied
between the terminals corresponding to the inputs
(marked in the external connections diagram),
always taking the polarity of the contacts into
account.
Figure 3.12.5: Digital Inputs Test.
3.12-10
BDBN0901A
To check each input:
- In the DBC: display the Inputs screen of the Information menu and check that when
applying voltage to the input, the input status “0” becomes “1”. Input activation can also
be checked via cyclic refreshment of the applicable ZIVerComPlus® Status screen.
Check the input deactivates when voltage is removed.
- In each DBP: check the activation of each input via cyclic refreshment of the applicable
ZIVerComPlus® status screen. Check the input deactivates when voltage is removed.
• Auxiliary Outputs
To test the auxiliary contact outputs, their operation is triggered according to how they are
configured. If they are not configured, they can be configured as activation of the status contact
inputs as shown in the tables below. In this case, each input will be activated and deactivated
checking the activation and deactivation of the corresponding outputs. Both in the DBC and
each DBP the outputs status can be checked in the ZIVerComPlus® Status screen as well as
the correct travel of the output physical contacts. Also, for the DBC, output activation can also
be displayed in the Outputs screen of the Information menu.
Table 3.12-6: DBP Outputs Configuration

Physical Output Number in Logical Logical Signal Description Board
Output the ZIVerComPlus® Signal
Status
AUX1 1 IN_1_P IN-1 Bay IED Digital Input Activated 1
3.12-11
BDBN0901A
Table 3.12-7: DBC Outputs Configuration

Physical Output Number in Logical Logical Signal Description Board
Output the ZIVerComPlus® Signal
Status
AUX1 1 IN_1 IN-1 Central Unit DI Activated 1
• LED Targets
Switch off the equipment and feed again at rated voltage. Then the Ready LED (green) (DBC
and each DBP) should go on.
To check the remaining LEDs (red):
- In the DBC: press the F2 key on the relay front to display the LEDs RESET option.
Keep pressed until all LEDs are on. Release the button and check that all LEDs go off.
- In each DBP: keep the R key on the relay front pressed to check that the four LEDs go
on. Release the button and check that all LEDs go off.
3.12-12
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications

3.13.1 Communications Ports ........................................................................................... 3.13-2
3.13.1.a Central Unit Communications Ports (DBC) ...................................................... 3.13-2
3.13.1.b Bay Unit Communications Ports ....................................................................... 3.13-2
3.13.2 Communications between DBC and Bay Unit. Events, Status and Blockings ...... 3.13-3
3.13.2.a Communications Events between DBC and Bay Unit ...................................... 3.13-3
3.13.2.b Statuses showing Communications between DBC and Bay Unit .................... 3.13-5
3.13.2.c Blocking on Communications Failure between the DBC and Enabled Bay ..... 3.13-5
3.13.3 Communications with the ZIVercomPlus® ............................................................. 3.13-5
3.13.3.a DBN Status in the ZIVercomPlus®. Alarms ...................................................... 3.13-7
3.13.3.b Actions and Operations Carried Out through the ZIVercomPlus® .................. 3.13-13
3.13.3.c Oscillogram Capture and Display ................................................................... 3.13-14
3.13.3.d ZIVercomPlus® Emulation Mode .................................................................... 3.13-17
3.13.4 DBC Communications Events ............................................................................. 3.13-18
3.13.5 IRIG-B 123 Synchronization ................................................................................ 3.13-18
3.13.5.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the IRIG-B Function .................................... 3.13-19
3.13.6 Communications Protocols .................................................................................. 3.13-19
3.13.6.a DNP 3.0 Protocol ............................................................................................ 3.13-20
3.13.6.b MODBUS Protocol .......................................................................................... 3.13-21
3.13.6.c IEC-61850 Protocol over CPT (G Protocol).................................................... 3.13-21
3.13.6.d IEC 61850 Protocol......................................................................................... 3.13-21
3.13.6.e PROCOME Protocol through Rear RJ45 Ethernet Port ................................. 3.13-21
3.13.7 Settings ................................................................................................................ 3.13-22
3.13.7.a IEC 61850 and Ethernet Port (RJ45) Settings................................................ 3.13-22
3.13.7.b DNP3, MODBUS and IEC-61850 Compliant CPT Settings ........................... 3.13-22
3.13.8 Communications Test .......................................................................................... 3.13-26
3.13.1 Communications Ports

Technical data for the DBN communications links can be found in Chapter 2.1 (Technical Data).
Information on model ports can be found in Chapter 1.4 (Model selection).
3.13.1.a Central Unit Communications Ports (DBC)

Apart from the rear glass fiber optic (ST) interfaces for internal DBN communications (DBC
communication with each bay), DBC relays are provided with various types of ports for external
communications:
- 1 RS232C type front local port.

- 2 rear selectable remote ports (depending on DBC model): RS232, PFO (1mm), GFO
(ST or SMA), RS485 or RJ45 for ETHERNET communications.
- In some DBC models, there is an IEC 61850 communications card with two ports that
can be: both RJ45, both ST or one port RJ45 and the other MTRJ.
DBC models with RJ45 connector for ETHERNET type communications have the following
Settings (Configuration / Rear Communications / Ethernet Port):
1. Enabling the Ethernet Port (YES-NO): enables (YES) or disables (NO) the Ethernet
Port.
2. IP Address (ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd): Ethernet device ID number.
3. Net mask (128.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.254): number that indicates to the device what
part of the IP address is the network number, and what part of the IP address corresponds to
the device.
4. Port Number (0 - 65535): number used to indicate the delivery route of the data received,
to the destination device.
5. Max. Time between Messages TCP (0-65 sec.): number of seconds between Keepalive
packages - if zero then Keepalive packages were not sent. These Packages inform the
server if a client is still present on the Ethernet Network.
6. RX Car Time (0-60000 milliseconds): maximum time between characters allowed while
receiving a message through the Ethernet. The message is timed out if the set time is
exceeded between the receipt of two characters.
7. Communication fault indication time (0-600 sec.): maximum time between messages
via the Ethernet port before an indication that communications have stopped.
DBC communications via local and remote ports is settable (see Configuration settings in
chapter 3.7). Information on all DBC models can be found in section 1.4.1, DBC Model
Selection.
3.13.1.b Bay Unit Communications Ports

Each bay unit includes a rear glass fiber optic (ST) interface for communications with the DBC
(DBN internal communications).
Moreover, each DBP type bay has a RS232C type front local port for DBN external
communications. This communications port is not settable (see 3.13.3, ZIVercomPlus®
Communications).
3.13-2
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
3.13.2 Communications between DBC and Bay Unit. Events, Status

and Blockings
As previously stated, for internal DBN communications, the Central Unit (DBC) connects to
each bay unit through rear glass fiber optic (ST) interface:
- Bay connector RX must be connected, through glass fiber optic, to DBC connector TX-
b#, where b# is the bay number for this bay settings in the DBN.
- Bay connector TX must be connected, through glass fiber optic, to DBC connector RX-
b#, where b# is the bay number for this bay settings in the DBN.
3.13.2.a Communications Events between DBC and Bay Unit

When communication between one DBC and a bay b# is established, a communications
initiation with bay b# event occurs. However, if DBC communications with bay b# is lost, an
event of loss of communications with bay b# occurs.
Table 3.13-1: Communications Events between DBC and DBP

Group Event Remarks
Communication Established with Bay IED #1
Communication Established with Bay IED #7 Events existing in all DBC
Communication Established with Bay IED #8 models.
Communications Established with Bay IED #15
Start of Communications Established with Bay IED #16
Communications
with Bays Communications Established with Bay IED #17
Communications Established with Bay IED #21 Events existing only in models
Communications Established with Bay IED #22 DBC**C and DBC**D.
Communications Established with Bay IED #30 Events existing only in models
DBC**B and DBC**D (namely,
Communications Established with Bay IED #31 models with voltage bays).
3.13-3
BDBN0901A
Table 3.13-1: Communications Events between DBC and DBP

Group Event Remarks
Communication Lost with Bay IED #1
Communication Lost with Bay IED #7 Events existing in all DBC
Communication Lost with Bay IED #8 models.
Communications Lost with Bay IED #15
Lost of Communications Lost with Bay IED #16
Communications
with Bays Communications Lost with Bay IED #17
Communications Lost with Bay IED #21 Events existing only in models
Communications Lost with Bay IED #22 DBC**C and DBC**D.
Communications Lost with Bay IED #30 Events existing only in models
DBC**B and DBC**D (namely,
Communications Lost with Bay IED #31 models with voltage bays).
3.13-4
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
3.13.2.b Statuses showing Communications between DBC and Bay Unit

If communications between DBC and bay b# exist, the ZIVercomPlus® status shows this
communications by activating the bay PRESENCE LED (this LED is present both in the DBN
summary status screen and in the drop down screen that shows the Central Unit status in
section Bay General Information of Global Indicators).
On the other hand, the DBC display also shows information on the communications between
DBC and bays through:
- The Information- Status - Presence screen, where bays with no communication with
the DBC are represented with “0” and bays with communication with the DBC are
represented with “1”.
- The Information - Status - Communications Failure Counter screen, where the
number of communications failures between the DBC and each bay is shown.
3.13.2.c Blocking on Communications Failure between the DBC and

Enabled Bay
As stated in Chapter 3.1, in case of loss of communications between DBC and one enabled bay
(for example, by failed fiber optic), differential trip block of the four busbars on communications
failure occurs (displayed as COM in the ZIVercomPlus® drop down status screen and in the
DBC display of the Information - Status - Active 87 Blocks screen), and the merge of all
buses into a single bus (bus 1 is the single bus).
Once the communications problem between Bay and DBC is solved, the Differential Trip Block
remains activated in all four buses until the user resets the same (via command or digital input).
3.13.3 Communications with the ZIVercomPlus®

Protection, loading or reading programmable logic configuration and reading out protection data
(events, oscillograms,...) can be configured through communications ports set for PROCOME
protocol. The local port is always assigned this protocol, whereas for remote ports it depends on
settings.
For the correct capture or transfer of settings through the ZIVercomPlus®, the DBC must show
the Default screen or the display must show the last trip.
Communications are established through ZIVercomPlus® communications program, which

allows dialog between the DBN family and other relays, whether locally (via a PC connected to
front port) or remotely (via rear ports with PROCOME protocol), covering all needs regarding
programming, settings, recording, reports, etc.
3.13-5
BDBN0901A
The configuration of DBC local and remote communications ports is carried out through its HMI.
However, if communications with DBN is carried out through a DBP port RS232C,
communications parameters not being settable, but are selected from the table below.
DBC Rear Port DBC Front Port DBP Front Port

Communications Communications Communications
Equipment Number Adjustable All All
Baud Rate Adjustable Adjustable 4800 Bauds
Bits Number 8 8 8
Stop Bits Adjustable Adjustable 1
Parity Adjustable Adjustable Odd
For correct communications with DBN, ZIVercomPlus® configuration parameters are not
default parameters, but parameters First Character Time, Message Time, Time between
Retries and Number of Retries must be configured, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3.13.1: Configuration of Communications Parameters.
3.13-6
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
The ZIVercomPlus®, that runs in WINDOWSTM environment is easy to operate and uses
buttons or keys to display the different submenus.
There exists the possibility to establish a communications password and timeout in remote
mode. Enable and timeout settings can be configure from the HMI configuration menu or via
local and remote communications, whereas the communications password can only be edited
from the HMI configuration menu or via local communications.
When changing settings (both through the ZIVercomPlus® and the DBC HMI), events showing
this change of settings occur.
Table 3.13-2: Events of the DBC

Group Event
General ON Change of Settings Initialization
3.13.3.a DBN Status in the

ZIVercomPlus®. Alarms
The DBN status is described in detail through
the Central Unit status drop down menu and
each bay status (figure 3.13.2). The DBN status
summary screen (shown in figure 3.13.4) is very
useful for an overall view of the substation.
Pressing (with the left mouse button) the
ZIVercomPlus® toolbar button Synoptic (shown
in figure 3.13.3) displays the DBN status
summary screen.
Figure 3.13.2: Status Drop Down Menu (in a

Model with 14 Bays and 4 Busbars).
Figure 3.13.3: ZIVercomPlus® Toolbar

Button Synoptic.
3.13-7
BDBN0901A
• DBN Status Summary Screen

This screen shows the Central Unit status:
Figure 3.13.4: DBN Status Summary Screen (in Model 11 with 14 Bays, only 4 Bays Connected).
- Differential and restraint current measurements for each phase and bay (4 or 5 bays
depending on model).
- Activation of each bay trip.
- Activation of each bay and phase Main Differential Unit (87A, 87B, 87C).
- Activation of each bay and phase Differential Alarm Unit (AL87A, AL87B, AL87C).
- Activation of each Bus Trip Blocking (BL87).
- Activation of each Bus Breaker Failure Trip Blocking (BL FI/ED).
- Global signaling: possible merges into Single Bus, Lockout activation, Latched Breaker
Failure Activation, activation of each Phase Differential Supervision Unit (Sup 87A, Sup
87B, Sup 87C).
This screen also shows the status of all bays connected to the Central Unit, as well as the name
of the line set in each bay. Figure 3.13.4 shows the status of a DBN model 11 (provided with 4
buses and phase angles of bay current measurements) with 14 bays, of which only 4 are
connected to the DBC (bays 2, 3, 4 and 5) and through which no current flows.
If the DBC had HW rev 2, the status of the special longitudinal-transversal coupling disconnect
switches (89-Busbar 1L, 89- Busbar 2L, 89- Busbar 3L, 89- Busbar 4L and, in case of DBN
Model 12, also the 89-Busbar 5L) will be indicated to the upper right part of screen in figure
3.13.4.
3.13-8
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
Each bay shows the status of:
- Primary values of phase current measurements (from Model 11 inclusively the

measurement phase angle is included).
o If no current is applied, the angle shows asterisks.
o The first phase with current is taken as angle reference for all bays.
- Breaker (52) status.
- Status of Bus 1 disconnecting switch (89-Bus 1), Bus 2 disconnecting switch (89-Bus 2),
Bus 3 disconnecting switch (89-Bu3 1), Bus 4 disconnecting switch (89-Bus 4), CT
bypass disconnecting switch (89-Bypass), line disconnecting switch (89-Line),
disconnecting switch for connection to transfer bus (89-Transfer). For Model 12, the
status of bus 5 (89-Bus 5) is also shown.
o Disconnecting switch and breaker status can be OPEN, CLOSED, UNKNOWN
(when the two corresponding inputs are activated or both inputs are deactivated) or
NOT CONFIGURED (when the applicable inputs are not configured in the bay).
- Displays bay tripping, presence (shows the bay is connected to the DBC), enable via
setting, disable (via digital input or dynamic zone activation ).
• Status Drop Down Menu
The figure below shows the Central Unit status drop down menu:
Figure 3.13.5: Central Unit Status Drop Down Menu (I).
3.13-9
BDBN0901A
Figure 3.13.6: Central Unit Status Drop Down Menu (II).
• Alarms: normally alarms are displayed in green. It turns into red when activated.
o Settings alarm: activates on missing settings.
o Failed clock alarm: activates when clock stops (seconds counter stopped).
o Clock battery alarm: activates when the clock battery wears out.
o PROTECTION alarm: shows no communication exists between central unit DSPs. (In
this case the DBC output ALARM_PR is also activated and block 87 of all busbars
occurs signaled by HDW in the HMI active blocks status screen, and activating Block
87 output on DBC hardware problems).
o EEPROM alarm: activates on writing errors in the EEPROM;
o RAM battery alarm: activates when the RAM battery wears out.
Apart from the ZIVercomPlus®, status alarms the relay has alarm outputs in the central unit:
Table 3.13-3: DBC Alarm Outputs

Shows that no communication
ALARM_PR Protection Module Alarm exists between central unit
DSPs.
ALRMENR Internal Firmware Alarm
3.13-10
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
- Bus status: the figure above shows bus 1 status signals. The status tree is similar for all
busbars (identical to this one from Model 11 inclusively, in which the causes of bus
differential trip blocks are included).
- Global signaling: in this tree there should be a special mention for:
o Status of the special disconnecting switches of the Longitudinal-Transverse Coupling
(89-Bus 1L, 89-Bus 2L, 89-Bus 3L, 89-Bus 4L and, for DBN model 12, also 89-Bus
5L).
o Status of Combined Coupling settings (logic 1), which can be: Normal, Transferred-1,
or Transferred-2.
o Status of merge into Single Bus of the various busbars, status of Latched Breaker
Failure and Lockout activation are included into the DBC status from DBN model 11
inclusively.
The figure below shows the drop down menu of the status of each current bay (specifically, the
figure represents bay 2 of a Model 11):
Figure 3.13.7: Drop Down Menu of the Status of each Current Bay.
3.13-11
BDBN0901A
- Inputs, outputs and LEDs: the

status of all bay inputs,
outputs and LEDs is
displayed. Take into account
that if the bay is “V” type
(DRV or DCV), only part of
them is displayed depending
on model (refer to Chapter 1.2
of the present manual).
- Measurements: shows the
measurements of the three
bay current phases (primary
values). From Model 11
inclusively each bay current
phase angle is also shown.
Figure 3.13.8: Measurements Drop Down Menu.
- Signaling: includes units activation, status of bay breaker, disconnecting switch and
alarms.
o Protection Alarm: activates when a bay is connected to the DBC but is disabled via
setting. This situation also causes the activation of the corresponding bay alarm
output (see table below) and the corresponding bay signal in the information- status-
alarms screen of the DBC HMI.
o Missing settings alarm: activates when settings cannot be loaded into the bay owing
to a communications problem between DBC and any bay.
Table 3.13-4: DBP Alarm Outputs (Bay Unit)

Shows that no communication
ALARM_PR Protection Module Alarm exists between central unit
DSPs.
ALRMENR Internal Firmware Alarm
3.13-12
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
3.13.3.b Actions and Operations Carried Out through the ZIVercomPlus®

The figure below shows the various operations that can be carried out through the
ZIVercomPlus®.. The figure represents Model 10 or Model 11 operations (for Model 12, it also
includes bus 5 operations). These operations can also be carried out through the DBC HMI
Operations menu and through the control communications profile with any of the implemented
protocols (PROCOME, DNP3.0 or MODBUS).
Figure 3.13.9: Model 10 or Model 11 Operations.
Note: if figure 3.13.9 were related to a DBC model with HW Rev. 2, operations displayed with current status in
grey would be displayed with the actual status (except the oscillograph starting operation).
3.13-13
BDBN0901A
4 types of operations are included:
- Differential Bus Trip Blocking and Unblocking: under the situation of the figure above,
when a given bar operation is “executed”, a blocking “action” occurs. The “present
value” becomes BLOCKED and the “action” becomes UNBLOCKING. Therefore, when
the operation is “executed” an unblocking “action” occurs.
- Bus Trip Blocking and Unblocking via BF or digital input: under the situation of the figure
above when a given bar operation is “executed”, an unblocking “action” occurs. The
“present value” becomes UNBLOCKING and the “action” becomes BLOCKING.
Therefore, when the operation is “executed” a blocking “action” occurs.
- Single Bus: merge and splitting of different bus combinations.
- Other operations: Oscillography Trigger and Breaker Failure Reset (resets bay and
central unit latched BF signal) and Lockout (86) Reset (resets this signal both in bay
and central unit).
Operations are located in the ZIVercomPlus® Actions menu, within which the change of group
action (see 3.9) and the time synchronizing action is also located. Time synchronization is used
to synchronize the relay date and time with the date and time of the PC through which the
ZIVercomPlus® communicates, thus the corresponding event occurs:
Table 3.13-5: DBC Synchronization Event

Group Event
General ON Clock Synchronization
3.13.3.c Oscillogram Capture and Display

To capture the oscillogram list stored in the equipment, press
the button of the toolbar displayed when pressing Records -
Oscillography in the ZIVercomPlus® drop down menu. In this
way the list of oscillograms stored into the relay is shown in the
right hand side screen of the ZIVercomPlus®.
Figure 3.13.10:Oscillogra-
phy Menu.
In the example of the figure below, the equipment is provided with 2 oscillographs with a
frequency of 50 Hz. The Trip column shows the activation time of the cause for oscillogram
pickup. As no oscillograms have been captured yet, column C/S does not show any marked
oscillogram and column Comtrade File shows asterisks which mean the corresponding
Comtrade file has not been generated.
Figure 3.13.11: Relay Oscillogram List.
3.13-14
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
Oscillograms are captured pressing

twice with the left button of the mouse
on the oscillogram to capture or else
select the oscillogram to capture and
press with the right button, in this way
a menu is displayed in which Collect
Oscillo can be pressed.
Figure 3.13.12: Collect Oscillo.
Then, a screen is displayed to mark the

oscillogram Collecting Channels (in the figure
example, the user has selected bus 1 and 2 and
the first five bays).
In DBC Models with HW Rev. 2 (DBCC*****x12**,

where x = 6, 7, 8 or 9), the analog channels
collected in the oscillograph are given by the
settings of each busbar and bay within the settings
group Channel Filter. Therefore, in the screen
Collecting Channels the channels set to YES are
displayed as selected (although in this screen
channel selection can be modified).
Figure 3.13.13: Collecting Channels.
Pressing Collect and during the oscillogram

capture displays the screen Communications, in
which the user can cancel the capture process if
desired, pressing the Cancel button.
Figure 3.13.14: Communications Screen

(Collecting Channels).
3.13-15
BDBN0901A
After completion of the oscillogram request, the ZIVercomPlus® right screen shows the
captured oscillogram marked with a C for completed and the column Comtrade file shows the
Comtrade File names (CFG extension and DAT extension) generated for this oscillogram.
Figure 3.13.15: information of Completed Oscillogram.
To display oscillograms, the

oscillogram viewer included into the
ZIVercomPlus® program must be
open (press twice on the captured
oscillogram with the left button of the
mouse or select the oscillogram and
press with the right button of the
mouse to display the screen of the
figure below and select View Oscillo).
Figure 3.13.16: Oscillogram Display Menu.
After opening the Comtrade displaying program (figure below), browse the CFG file
corresponding to this oscillogram Comtrade (saved into the ZIVercomPlus® “Oscillograms”
folder by default). Pressing CFG displays the name of all the analog and digital oscillogram
channels in the window under the browser. For displaying just drag to the oscillogram window to
the right the channels to be displayed. The viewer allows opening several oscillogram screens,
which is useful, for example, to have an oscillogram graph for each phase.
3.13-16
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
Figure 3.13.17: Oscillogram Viewer.
3.13.3.d ZIVercomPlus® Emulation Mode

The ZIVercomPlus® Emulation Mode is used to show the settings of all equipment models
(except configuration and control profile settings). Therefore, it is very useful, for example, to
carry out settings lists when a relay for the local connection is not available.
To log in the emulation mode, select the

EMULATE option within RELAYS in the toolbar
displayed when opening the program. In this way
a screen is displayed (see figure) in which the
model to emulate can be selected (taking it to right
of the screen). Also, several relays can be
emulated simultaneously if a different relay
number is selected for each model to the right of
the screen.
Figure 3.13.18: Selecting the Model to

Emulate.
3.13-17
BDBN0901A
In DBC Models previous to HW Rev. 2, To select the DBC model to emulate, it must be taken
into account that the ZIVercomPlus® does not discern the presence of IRIG-B in the DBC and,
therefore, if a DBC has, for example, two input / output boards and has IRIG-B, the model to
select will be ***1, as the ZIVercomPlus® considers ***1 equal to ***3. This gives way to the
following model table:
DBCB Model DBC Model in ZIVercomPlus® Emulation

(See 1.4, Model Selection) Mode (*)
DBCB##***0##** DBCB##***0##**
DBCB##***2##**
DBCB##***4##**
DBCB##***1##** DBCB##***1##**
DBCB##***3##**
DBCB##***5##**
DBC models with HW Rev.2 always have two input / output cards and have IRIG-B. Therefore,
the name of the model shown in the emulation mode only an asterisk appears in the
corresponding field, as shown in the examples of the table below:
DBCB Model DBC Model in ZIVercomPlus® Emulation

(See 1.4, Model Selection) Mode (*)
DBCB##***911*E DBCB##***911*(D/E/F/G/H/I)
DBCC##***912*E DBCC##***912*(D/E/F/G/H/I)
DBCC##***x12*J siendo x=6,7 u 8. DBCC##****12*(J/K/L/M)
(*) Characters indicated with asterisks are kept with asterisks in the name of the model to emulate, whereas
characters indicated with hash marks are shown with the corresponding character of the selected model.
3.13.4 DBC Communications Events
Table 3.13-6: DBC Communications Events

Group Event
Local Mode (keypad and display)
Communications Remote Mode (rear port)
Local Mode (front port)
3.13.5 IRIG-B 123 Synchronization

DBC equipments are provided with a BNC type input for IRIG-B 123 standard time
synchronization signal. Said input is located at the relay rear panel. Synchronization accuracy is
±1ms.
An output can be configured to show IRIG-B signal received status. This output remains active
while the equipment receives correctly said signal.
Relays are also prepared for indication of both the loss and recovery of IRIG-B signal by
generating events associated to each of these circumstances.
3.13-18
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
3.13.5.a Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the IRIG-B Function
Table 3.13-7: Outputs of the IRIG-B Function

Signal indicates that IRIG-B
IRIG-B 123 Synchronization by IRIG-B
signal is being received.
Table 3.13-8: Events of the IRIG-B Function

Group Event
IRIG-B Synchronization
General
IRIG-B Error
3.13.6 Communications Protocols

All DBC models are provided with two rear communications ports for remote access and one
front port for local access. While the local port always uses PROCOME protocol, rear ports can
use various communications protocols depending on model (see Model Selection in chapter
1.4). One of the remote ports will always be PROCOME 3.0 whereas the other remote port
(selectable via setting as a function of model) can be PROCOME 3.0, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or
IEC-61850 for CPT.
In DBC models with remote RJ45 Ethernet port with PROCOME Protocol, as this port occupies
the remote port 2, if this model has also MODBUS or DNP 3.0, these may only be configured in
Remote Port 1.
There are DBC models in which, apart from the two above mentioned rear ports, there is an IEC
61850 communications card with two ports (Type RJ45, MTRJ or ST according to model).
For more detail on protocol features, refer to the applicable sections.
3.13-19
BDBN0901A
3.13.6.a DNP 3.0 Protocol

Models using the DNP3 communications protocol option have the following configuration
settings (DNP Configuration settings):
- DNP Port: selects DNP on that port (can be any of the DBC rear ports).
- Numbers RTU and MTU: slave and master relay address.
- Unsolicited message enable or disable.
- Unsolicited delay: time elapsed from the moment an event occurs until the
corresponding unsolicited message is transmitted (in case they are enabled).
- Time-Out N7 setting, determines the time-out for receiving confirmation from the
master requested by the slave with the CON bit to 1. Namely, sets the time-out to
receive confirmation of the Application layer (N7) from the master.
- Number of Retries N7 sets the number of retries applicable to wait for confirmation from
the master if this does not occur within the time set by Time-Out N7. Namely, the
number of retries of the application layer (N7) applicable after confirmation time-out
from the master. The option of infinite retries is only applied for unsolicited messages.
- Advice Time setting: time during which forewarning characters are generated.
Forewarning time is defined as the time (in milliseconds) during which the relay
transmits zeroes (00) prior to sending the message.
- Echo Control sets transmission echo enable or disable. Namely, enables (1) or
disables (0) the collision control, via reception of the transmission echo. It is applied to
half-duplex systems.
- Number of Retries N2 sets the number of retries applicable to the link layer in case a
collision occurs. It is applied if Echo control is enabled.
- Fixed Delay and Max. Random Delay are applied if Echo Control is enabled. They are
used to define the Backoff Time, that the relay waits after detecting a collision, before
transmitting the message: Backoff Time = Fixed Delay + random (Max. Random Delay)
Note: Advice Time and Echo Control settings are used to arrange several relays connected to a CCY type
concentrator working in multimaster mode.
• Analog inputs (Dead Bands)

The second settings menu option for DNP 3.0 protocol features the possibility to set separately
30 analog measurement Dead Bands (from 0 to 29). For each of them, the set percentage
represents the maximum measurement value taken as reference to check the analog change to
annotate.
If the difference of analog measurements is more than said percentage, the change is
annotated. If the setting is set to 100%, analog measurement changes are not annotated, it
being deemed disabled.
For more details, refer to DNP3.0 Communications Profile in one Annex of this manual.
3.13-20
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
3.13.6.b MODBUS Protocol

The functions that will be implemented are:
ModBus Function Meaning

01 Read Coil Status (*)
02 Read Input Status (*)
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
Any other function not among those indicated will be considered illegal and will return exception
code 01 (Illegal Function).
(*) Depending on the selected setting through MODBUS DBC outputs, the relay outputs can be contemplated in
MODBUS function 01 or MODBUS function 02 addresses. For more details, refer to MODBUS communications
profile in one appendix of this manual.
3.13.6.c IEC-61850 Protocol over CPT (G Protocol)

In DBC models including IEC-61850 over CPT one of the DBC remote ports can be connected
to a substation central unit (CPT), which carries out communications through IEC-61850
protocol. In this way, DBC communications through the CPT is carried out using IEC-61850
protocol (communications between DBC and CPT does not adhere to a standard format).
3.13.6.d IEC 61850 Protocol

IEC 61850 Protocol settings are described in the chapter on Configuration Settings. The
protocol is described in the applicable Annex of the present manual.
3.13.6.e PROCOME Protocol through Rear RJ45 Ethernet Port

Settings of this communications port are described in chapter Configuration settings.
3.13-21
BDBN0901A
3.13.7 Settings
3.13.7.a IEC 61850 and Ethernet Port (RJ45) Settings
See Configuration Settings chapter.
3.13.7.b DNP3, MODBUS and IEC-61850 Compliant CPT Settings

The range of the DBC rear port and front port communications settings are described in chapter
Configuration Settings.
Communications through DBC ports can be set, whereas communications through a bay local
port is always fixed to 4800 baud, with 1 stop bit and even parity.
DNP3 Settings (DBC Settings)

DNP3 Port Remote 1 - None
Remote 2 (*)
None
MTU Number (Master equipment number) 0 - 65519 1 1
RTU Number (Slave equipment number) 0 - 65519 1 1
Time-out N7 100 - 60000 ms 1 1000 ms
New attempts N7 0 - 1 - 2 - 3 - infinities - 0
Enable Unsolicited YES / NO - NO
Unsol Retard 100 - 60000 ms 1 1000 ms
Warning time 0 - 60000 ms 1 0 ms
Echo control YES / NO - NO
New attempts N2 0 - 32 1 6
Fixed Delay 0 - 30000 ms 1 100 ms
Max. Random Delay 0 - 30000 ms 1 100 ms
These settings can be accessed from the DBC HMI.

(*) When the DBC model has an Ethernet port with H, I, L or M protocol, as this Ethernet port occupies the
REMOTE port 2, DNP3 PORT setting options in the HMI still are REMOTE 1, REMOTE 2 or NONE, but do not set
to REMOTE 2 as in this case the device operates as if it were set to NONE.
DNP Analog Inputs

(DBC Settings) Independent Settings for 30 metering channels
Change metering 0 0.00 - 100 % 0.01% 100 %
Change metering 1 0.00 - 100 % 0.01% 100 %
Change metering 2 0.00 - 100 % 0.01% 100 %
Change metering 3 0.00 - 100 % 0.01% 100 %
...
Change metering 29 0.00 - 100 % 0.01% 100 %
DBN communications can use DNP 3.0 protocol through one of the two DBC rear ports (selected via DNP3 Port
setting). If DNP3 Port is set to None, communications of both DBC rear ports is carried out using PROCOME
protocol.
3.13-22
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
MODBUS Configuration Settings

MODBUS Port Remote 1 - None
Remote 2 (*)
None
DBC outputs in MODBUS 0 - MODBUS 01 Function - 1 - MODBUS
1 - MODBUS 02 Function 02 Function

(*) When the DBC model has an Ethernet port with H, I, L or M protocol, as this Ethernet port occupies the
REMOTE port 2, MODBUS PORT setting options in the HMI still are REMOTE 1, REMOTE 2 or NONE, but do not
set to REMOTE 2 as in this case the device operates as if it were set to NONE.
protocol.
Depending on the selected setting through MODBUS DBC outputs, DBC auxiliary outputs and some logic
outputs can be contemplated in MODBUS function 01 or MODBUS function 02 addresses.
Configuration Settings for IEC-61850 Compliant CPT (G Protocol)

IEC Port Remote 1, Remote 2 or - None
None
protocol.
3.13-23
BDBN0901A
• DNP 3.0 Protocol

... 6 - DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL
0 - GENERAL 0 - DNP CONFIGURATION 0- DNP3 PORT

... 1 - ANALOG INPUTS 1- RTU ADDRESS
6 - DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL 2- N7 CONFIRM TIMEOUT
3- N7 RETRIES
4- ENABLE UNSOL REP.
5- MTU ADDRESS
6- UNSOL. DELAY REP.
7- ENABLE ECO CONTROL
8- N2 RETRIES
9- ADVICE TIME
10- FIXED DELAY
11- MAX. RANDOM DELAY
0 - GENERAL 0 - DNP CONFIGURATION 0 - DEADBAND AI#0

... 1 - ANALOG INPUTS 1 - DEADBAND AI#1
6 - DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL 2 - DEADBAND AI#2
3 - DEADBAND AI#3
...
35 - DEADBAND AI#29
3.13-24
BDBN0901A
3.13 Communications
• MODBUS Protocol
DBC Model 10 and Models with MODBUS Protocol

0 - CONFIGURATION 0- PASSWORDS 0 - TERMINAL ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS … 1 - BAUD RATE
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 4- REAR PORT COMM 2 - STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS … 3 - PARITY
4 - INFORMATION 4 - COMMS PASSWORD ENABLE
5 - COMMS PWD TIMEOUT
6 - COMMS PASSWORD
7 - MODBUS PORT
8 - DBC OUTPUTS BY MODBUS
DBC Models 11 and 12 and Models with MODBUS Protocol

0 - CONFIGURATION 0- PASSWORDS 0 - TERMINAL ADDRESS
1 - OPERATIONS … 1 - BAUD RATE
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 3- REAR PORT COMM 2 - STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS … 3 - PARITY
4 - INFORMATION 4 - COMMS PASSWORD ENABLE
5 - COMMS PWD TIMEOUT
6 - COMMS PASSWORD
7 - MODBUS PORT
8 - DBC OUTPUTS BY MODBUS
0- TERMINAL ADDRESS
... 0- FUNCTION 01 OF MODBUS
8- DBC OUTPUTS BY MODBUS 1- FUNCTION 02 OF MODBUS
• IEC-61850 Compliant CPT Protocols (G Protocol)
0 - CONFIGURATION 0 - PASSWORDS 0 - TERMINAL ADDRESS

1 - OPERATIONS 1 - OPERATION PERMISSION 1 - BAUD RATE
2 - ACTIVATE GROUP 2 - CONFIGURE INPUTS 2 - STOP BITS
3 - CHANGE SETTINGS 3 - CONFIGURE OUTPUTS 3 - PARITY
4 - INFORMATION 4 - REAR PORT COMM 4 - COMMS PASSWORD ENABLE
5 - FRONT PORT COMM 5 - COMMS PWD TIMEOUT
6 - DATE & TIME 6 - COMMS PASSWORD
7 - PROTECTION CONFIG. 7- IEC PORT
Note: ETHERNET Port Settings will be available only for DBC Models with ETHERNET Port.
3.13-25
BDBN0901A
3.13.8 Communications Test

In order to proceed with the communications testing the relay must be supplied with the nominal
voltage. Then the In Service LED must light up.
Connect with the equipment through the front port via a male DB9 cable. Synchronize the time
through the ZIVercomPlus® program. Disconnect the relay and wait for two minutes. Then,
supply power to the relay again and connect with the relay through both rear ports. Finally set
the program ZIVercomPlus® to cyclic and check that the time updates properly.
3.13-26
BDBN0901A
3.14 Alarm
Codes

3.14.1 Description of the Alarm Codes in DBC Display.................................................... 3.14-2
3.14.2 DBN Status Alarm .................................................................................................. 3.14-2
3.14.1 Description of the Alarm Codes in DBC Display

The following table lists the protection alarm codes and their description. These codes are
displayed in the HMI display.
Software Alarms
Code Description
11 00 Loss of settings
10 01 E2PROM writing error
Hardware Alarms
Code Description
50 00 Communications error between DSPs
10 08 Low clock battery
10 10 Clock not running
10 20 RAM battery alarm
If more than one alarm occurs at the same time, the hexadecimal codes (OR) are added as
shown below:
10 01 and 10 08 = 10 09
50 00 and 10 20 = 50 20
10 01 and 10 10 and 10 08 = 10 19
Warning: contact the manufacturer if the unit displays any of these alarms codes.
3.14.2 DBN Status Alarm

As described in 3.13 (Communications), in section 3.13.3.a, ZIVercomPlus® DBN Status.
ZIVercomPlus® DBC Status Alarms (see this chapter for more details) also shows the alarms
described for the DBC display.
This same section of chapter 3.13 describes the alarms shown in DBP status (missing settings
alarm and protection alarm).
Figure 3.14.1: ZIVercomPlus® Alarms.
3.14-2
BDBN0901A
A. PROCOME 3.0
Protocol

A.1 PROCOME 3.0 Protocol: Model DBC-***-****11*D* ................................................... A-2
A.1.1 Control Application Layer ............................................................................................ A-2
A.1.2 Control Metering (MEA-s) ........................................................................................... A-4
A.1.3 Digital Control Signals (ISC-s) .................................................................................... A-5
A.2 PROCOME 3.0 Protocol: Model DBC-***-****12*D* ................................................... A-6
A.2.1 Control Application Layer ............................................................................................ A-6
A.2.2 Control Metering (MEA-s) ........................................................................................... A-8
A.2.3 Digital Control Signals (ISC-s) .................................................................................... A-9
Annex A. PROCOME 3.0 Protocol
A.1 PROCOME 3.0 Protocol: Model DBC-***-****11*D*

A.1.1 Control Application Layer
• Application Functions
; Initialization of the secondary station

; Clock synchronization
; Control functions
; Control interrogation
; Refreshing of digital control signals
; Overflow
; Force single coil
• Compatible ASDUs in Secondary-to-Primary Direction
; <5> Identification
; <6> Clock synchronization
; <100> Transmission of metering values and digital control signal changes
; <103> Transmission of digital control states
; <121> Force single coil
• Compatible ASDUs in Primary to Secondary Direction

; <100> Control data request
; <103> Request for digital control states
A-2
BDBN0901A
• Force single coil
; <0> Reset_86
; <1> Reset_BF_DI_1
; <2> Reset_Dif_1
; <3> Reset_Dif_2
; <4> Reset_Dif_3
; <5> Reset_Dif_4
; <6> Block_BF_DI_1
; <7> Block_Dif_1
; <8> Block_Dif_2
; <9> Block_Dif_3
; <10> Block_Dif_4
; <11> Oscillo Pickup
; <12> Reset_BF
; <13> SingleBus_1_&_2
; <17> SingleBus_2_&_4,
; <18> SingleBus_3_&_4,
; <19> Split Single Bus_1_&_2
; <25> Block_BF_DI_2
; <28> Reset_BF_DI_2
A-3
BDBN0901A
A.1.2 Control Metering (MEA-s)

Disabled bus measurements will not be transmitted (through bus enable settings located in
Central Unit General settings).
As can be seen in the chart below, depending on the type of DBC, voltage bay measurements
can be available, as shown below:
DBC without DBC with Voltage Measurement Description

Voltage Bays Bays
DBC-**A DBC-**C DBC-**B DBC-**D
; <0> ; <0> Bus 1 Phase A Differential Current Measurement
; <1> ; <1> Bus 1 Phase B Differential Current Measurement
; <2> ; <2> Bus 1 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
; <3> ; <3> Bus 1 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
; <4> ; <4> Bus 1 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
; <5> ; <5> Bus 1 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
It does not exist ; <24> Bus 1 Phase A Voltage
It does not exist ; <25> Bus 1 Phase B Voltage
It does not exist ; <26> Bus 1 Phase C Voltage
A-4
BDBN0901A
• Full Scale Values

For Restraint current measurements, 4095 corresponds to the result of multiplying by 1.2 the
rated current (1 or 5 A depending on model) and the maximum number of bays that can be
connected to the differential unit (14 or 28 depending on model).
For Differential current measurements, 4095 corresponds to the value taken for restraint
currents divided by 10 (as the differential current has normally very small values and greater
resolution is needed).
For Voltage measurements, 4095 corresponds to the rated voltage setting (set value of DBC
central unit general settings for models with voltage bays) multiplied by 1.2.
A.1.3 Digital Control Signals (ISC-s)

Bus Differential Central Unit (DBC) features the following PROCOME control signals for reading
/ refreshing (depending on whether the relay has one or two input / output boards):
CENTRAL UNIT (DBC) with 1 Board for Inputs / Outputs DBC-***-***011*D* or DBC-***-***211*D*
Programmable Signal Physical Contact PROCOME Digital Control Signal Digital Control
Signal Type Number Number Signal Number Changes States
Output 1 AUX-1 0 YES YES
CENTRAL UNIT (DBC) with 2 Boards for Inputs / Outputs DBC-***-***111*D* or DBC-***-***311*D*
A-5
BDBN0901A
A.2 PROCOME 3.0 Protocol: Model DBC-***-****12*D*

A.2.1 Control Application Layer
• Application Functions
; Initialization of the secondary station

; Clock synchronization
; Control functions
; Control interrogation
; Refreshing of digital control signals
; Overflow
; Force single coil
• Compatible ASDUs in Secondary-to-Primary Direction
; <5> Identification
; <100> Transmission of metering values and digital control signal changes
; <103> Transmission of digital control states
• Compatible ASDUs in Primary to Secondary Direction

; <100> Control data request
; <103> Request for digital control states
A-6
BDBN0901A
• Force single coil
; <0> Reset_86
; <1> Reset_BF_DI_1
; <2> Reset_Dif_1
; <3> Reset_Dif_2
; <4> Reset_Dif_3
; <5> Reset_Dif_4
; <6> Block_BF_DI_1
; <7> Block_Dif_1
; <8> Block_Dif_2
; <9> Block_Dif_3
; <10> Block_Dif_4
; <11> Oscillo Pickup
; <12> Reset_BF
; <33> Block_Dif_5
; <34> Reset_Dif_5
A-7
BDBN0901A
A.2.2 Control Metering (MEA-s)

Disabled bus measurements will not be transmitted (through bus enable settings located in
Central Unit General settings).
As can be seen in the chart below, depending on the type of DBC, voltage bay measurements
can be available, as shown below:
DBC without Voltage Bays Measurement Description

DBC-**A DBC-**C
; <0> Bus 1 Phase A Differential Current Measurement
; <1> Bus 1 Phase B Differential Current Measurement
; <2> Bus 1 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
; <3> Bus 1 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
; <4> Bus 1 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
; <5> Bus 1 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
Note: DBN Model 12 does not include Voltage Bays.
A-8
BDBN0901A

For Restraint current measurements, 4095 corresponds to the result of multiplying by 1.2 the
rated current (1 or 5 A depending on model) and the maximum number of bays that can be
connected to the differential unit (14 or 28 depending on model).
For Differential current measurements, 4095 corresponds to the value taken for restraint
currents divided by 10 (as the differential current has normally very small values and greater
resolution is needed).
A.2.3 Digital Control Signals (ISC-s)

Bus differential Central Unit (DBC) features the following PROCOME control signals for reading
/ refreshing (depending on whether the relay has one or two input / output boards):
CENTRAL UNIT (DBC) with 1 Board for Inputs / Outputs DBC-***-***012*D* or DBC-***-***212*D*
UNIDAD CENTRAL (DBC with 2 Boards for Inputs / Outputs DBC-***-***112*D* or DBC-***-***312*D*
A-9
BDBN0901A
A-10
BDBN0901A
B. DNP V3.00 Device
Profile Document
DNP 3.0 : Device Profile Document
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
This document must be accompanied by: Implementation Table and Point List.
Vendor Name: ZIV Aplicaciones y Tecnología S.A.
Device Name: DBC – **C - ****12*E
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests 2 Master 7 Slave

For Responses 2
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
1) Supports Enable/Disable Unsolicited Responses (FC=20 and 21), for classes 1

and 2.
2) Supports Write operations (FC=2) on Time and Date objects.
3) Supports Delay measurement Fine (FC=23).
4) Supports Warm Start command (FC=14).
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted _____292______ Transmitted _560 (if >2048, must be

Received (must be 292) configurable)
Received___249__(must be >= 249)
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
7 None None
Fixed at ____________________ 7 Configurable, range __0__ to __3__
Configurable, range ___ to _____ (Fixed is not permitted)
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
7 Never
Always
Sometimes. If 'Sometimes', when?
____________________________________________
Configurable. If 'Configurable', how?
__________________________________________
Page 2 of 28
Atención © ZIV Aplicaciones y Tecnología, S.A. Zamudio 2004
Este documento contiene información confidencial propiedad de ZIV S.A. Cualquier forma de reproducción o
divulgación está absolutamente prohibida y puede ser causa de severas medidas legales.
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always (not recommended)
7 When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) For unsolicited, Class 1 and Class
2 responses that contain Event Data. (If there is no Event Data reported into a Class 1 or 2
response, Application Layer Confirmation is not requested)
When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm 7 None Fixed at ____ Variable

Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment 7 None Fixed at ____ Variable
Configurable
Application Confirm None Fixed at ____ Variable 7
Configurable
Complete Appl. Response 7 None Fixed at ____ Variable
Configurable
Others
_______________________________________________________________________
___
Attach explanation if 'Variable' or 'Configurable' was checked for any timeout
Application Confirm timeout setting (HMI): Range 100 ms - 60.000 ms.
Page 3 of 28
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
• Maximum number of CROB (obj. 12, var. 1) objects supported in a single message
1
• Maximum number of Analog Output (obj. 41, any var.) supported in a single message
0
Pattern Control Block and Pattern Mask (obj. 12, var. 2 and 3 respectively)
supported.
CROB (obj 12) and Analog Output (obj 41) permitted together in a single message.
WRITE Binary Outputs 7 Never Always

Sometimes
Configurable
SELECT (3) / OPERATE (4) Never 7 Always Sometimes
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE (5) Never 7 Always Sometimes
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK (6) Never 7Always Sometimes
Configurable
Count > 1 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never 7Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never 7Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never 7Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Clear Queue 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable
_______________________________________________________________________
Attach explanation:
• All points support the same Function Codes: (3) Select, (4) Operate, (5) Direct
Operate and (6) Direct Operate - NO ACKNOWLEDGE.
• All points support the same Control Codes: (1H) Pulse ON, (3H) Latch ON, (4H)
Latch OFF, (41H) Close-Pulse ON and (81H) Trip-Pulse ON.
• Each of the permitted Control Codes performs the same operation in all points.
• ON-time and OFF-time fields are ignored.
• Maximum Select/Operate Delay Time: 60 seconds.
Page 4 of 28
FILL OUT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR SLAVE DEVICES ONLY:

Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change
no specific variation requested: Events when no specific variation requested:
Never Never
7 Only time-tagged 7 Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative
Configurable to send both, one or Time
the Configurable (attach explanation)
other (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never 7 Never
7 Configurable (See Note D) When Device Restarts
7 Only certain objects (Class 1 and When Status Flags Change
2)
Sometimes (attach explanation) No other options are permitted.
7 ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
7 No Counters Reported 7 No Counters Reported

Configurable (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object ____________ 16 Bits
Default Variation ____________ 32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached Other Value _____________
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: 7 Yes No
Page 5 of 28
QUICK REFERENCE FOR DNP3.0 LEVEL 2 FUNCTION CODES & QUALIFIERS

Function Codes 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Index Size Qualifier Code
1 Read
2 Write
3 Select Index Size Qualifier Code
4 Operate
5 Direct Operate 0- No Index, Packed 0- 8-Bit Start and Stop Indices
6 Direct Operate-No ACK 1- 1 byte Index 1- 16-Bit Start and Stop Indices
13 Cold Start 2- 2 byte Index 2- 32-Bit Start and Stop Indices
14 Warm Start 3- 4 byte Index 3- 8-Bit Absolute address Ident.
20 Enable Unsol. Messages 4- 1 byte Object Size 4- 16-Bit Absolute address Ident.
21 Disable Unsol. Messages 5- 2 byte Object Size 5- 32-Bit Absolute address Ident.
23 Delay Measurement 6- 4 byte Object Size 6- No Range Field (all)
129 Response 7- 8-Bit Quantity
130 Unsolicited Message 8- 16-Bit Quantity
9- 32-Bit Quantity
11-(0xB) Variable array
Page 6 of 28
IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(DBC will parse) (DBC will respond)
Func Qual Func Qual
Obj Var Description Codes Codes Codes Codes Notes
(dec) (hex) (dec) (hex)
1 0 Binary Input – All variations 1 6
Assigned to
1 1 Binary Input 129 1 Class 0.
2 0 Binary Input Change – All variations 1 6,7,8
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 6,7,8 129 B

Assigned to
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 6,7,8 129,130 28 Class 1.
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 6,7,8 129 B
10 0 Binary Outputs – All variations 1 6 129 A
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3,4,5,6 17,28 129 17,28
20 0 Binary Counter – All variations 1 6 129 A
21 0 Frozen Counter – All variations 1 6 129 A
22 0 Counter Change Event – All variations 1 6,7,8 129 B
30 0 Analog Input – All variations 1 6

Assigned to
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 129 1 Class 0.
32 0 Analog Change Event – All variations 1 6,7,8

Assigned to
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 129,130 28 Class 2.
40 0 Analog Output Status – All variations 1 6 129 A
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block 3,4,5,6 17,28 129 A

7
50 1 Time and Date 2 129 C
count=1
7
52 2 Time Delay Fine 23 129 F, G
count=1
Page 7 of 28
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
Func Qual Func Qual
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 6 129 1
1 6,7,8
60 2 Class 1 Data 129,130 28 D
20,21 6
1 6,7,8
60 3 Class 2 Data 129,130 28 D
20,21 6
1 6,7,8
60 4 Class 3 Data N/A B
20,21 6
0
80 1 Internal Indications 2 E
index=7
-- -- No Object (Cold Start) 13 F
-- -- No Object (Warm Start) 14 F
-- -- No Object (Delay Measurement) 23 G
NOTES
A: Device implementation level does not support this group and variation of object or, for static objects, it has no objects
with this group and variation. OBJECT UNKNOWN response (IIN2 bit 1 set).
B: No point range was specified, and device has no objects of this type. NULL response (no IIN bits set, but no objects
of the specified type returned).
C: Device supports write operations on Time and Date objects. Time Synchronization-Required Internal Indication bit (IIN1-
4) will be cleared on the response.
D: The device can be configured to send unsolicited responses depending on a configuration option selected in the HMI
(Human-Machine-Interface or front-panel user interface). Then, the Master can Enable or Disable Unsolicited messages
(for Classes 1 and 2) by means of requests (FC 20 and 21).
If the unsolicited response mode is configured "on", then upon device restart, the device will transmit an initial Null
unsolicited response, requesting an application layer confirmation. While waiting for that application layer confirmation,
the device will respond to all function requests, including READ requests.
E: Restart Internal Indication bit (IIN1-7) can be cleared explicitly by the master.
F: The outstation, upon receiving a Cold or Warm Start request, will respond sending a Time Delay Fine object message
(which specifies a time interval until the outstation will be ready for further communications), restarting the DNP process,
clearing events stored in its local buffers and setting IIN1-7 bit (Device Restart).
G: Device supports Delay Measurement requests (FC = 23). It responds with the Time Delay Fine object (52-2). This object
states the number of milliseconds elapsed between Outstation receiving the first bit of the first byte of the request and the
time of transmission of the first bit of the first byte of the response.
Page 8 of 28
DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES
• Internal Indication IIN1-6 (Device trouble): Set to indicate a change in the current DNP
configuration in the outstation. Cleared in the next response. Used to let the master station
know that DNP settings have changed at the outstation. Note that some erroneous
configurations could make this condition impossible to communicate to a master station.
This document also states the DNP3.0 settings currently available in the device. If the user
changes any of these settings, it will set the Device Trouble Internal Indication bit on the
next response sent.
• Event buffers: device can hold as much as 50 Binary Input Changes and 50 Analog Input
Changes. If these limits are reached the device will set the Event Buffers Overflow Internal
Indication bit on the next response sent. It will be cleared when the master reads the
changes, making room for new ones.
• Configuration Ä Operation Enable menu: the device can enable or disable permissions for
operations. If permissions are configured off (disabled) the response to a command (issued
as Control Relay Output Block) will have the Status code NOT_AUTHORIZED. If the
equipment is blocked the only command allowed is to Reset it.
• Configuration Ä Binary Inputs/Outputs menu: what is shown on the Point List is the default
configuration (as shipped from factory or after a reset by means of F4 key), but customers
can configure Inputs/Outputs to suit their needs, by means of ZIVerCom® software.
T Deadbands
• Deadbands are used for configuring Analog Input Change objects (Object 32).
• A Deadband is defined as a percentage over the Full Scale Range (FSR). In this device, for
differential currents and restraint currents, the FSR is defined in the notes under Analog
Input objects of the Point List.
• A Deadband setting of 10% means that a change equal or greater than ± 0+/- 1,68A in a
differential current or +/- 16,8A in a restraint current between last-reported value and the
current value is required to generate an event.
• The Deadband can be adjusted to the device by means of HMI (Human-Machine Interface or
front-panel user interface), between 0.00% and 100.00%, in steps of 0.01%. Default value is
100.00%, meaning that generation of Analog Change Events is DISABLED for that input.
There is an independent setting for each Analog Input.
Page 9 of 28
POINT LIST
ANALOG INPUT (OBJECT 30) -> Assigned to Class 0.
ANALOG INPUT CHANGE (OBJECT 32) -> Assigned to Class 2.
Index Description Full Scale Range
0 Phase A differential current Bus 1 Note A (0 a 32767). TDeadband.
1 Phase B differential current Bus 1 Note A (0 a 32767). TDeadband.
2 Phase C differential current Bus 1 Note A (0 a 32767). TDeadband.
3 Phase A restraint current Bus 1 Note B (0 a 32767). TDeadband.
4 Phase B restraint current Bus 1 Note B (0 a 32767). TDeadband.
5 Phase C restraint current Bus 1 Note B (0 a 32767). TDeadband.
Page 10 of 28
NOTES
A: For the restraint current measured values, the value 32767 corresponds to 20% over the rated current (1 or 5 A times 1.2
depending on model) times the maximum number of possible bays connected to the differential (14 or 28 depending on
model) 28 in this case.
B: For the differential current measured valued, the value 32767 corresponds to the restraint current value divided by 10 (in
general, differential currents have small values, therefore larger resolution is required) - (1.2 x In x 28) / 10 .
BINARY INPUT (OBJECT 1) -> Assigned to Class 0.

BINARY INPUT CHANGE (OBJECT 2) -> Assigned to Class 1.
Index Description Description
for DBC with 2 I/0 Boards: for DBC with 1 I/0 Board:
DBC-***-***112*E* DBC-***-***012*E*
or DBC-***-***312*E* or DBC-***-***212*E*
0 Protection output (AUX-1) Protection output (AUX-1)
6 Protection output (AUX-8)
Page 11 of 28
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK (OBJECT 12)

Index Description
0 Reset_86
1 Reset_BF_DI_1
2 Reset_Dif_1
3 Reset_Dif_2
4 Reset_Dif_3
5 Reset_Dif _4
6 Block_BF_DI_1
7 Block_Dif_1
8 Block_Dif_2
9 Block_Dif_3
10 Block_Dif _4
11 Oscillo Pickup
12 Reset_BF
13 SingleBus_1_&_2
14 SingleBus _1_&_3
15 SingleBus _1_&_4
16 SingleBus 2_&_3
17 SingleBus _2_&_4
18 SingleBus _3_&_4
19 Split Single Bus_1_&_2
20 Split Single Bus _1_&_3
25 Block_BF_DI_2
26 Block_BF_DI_3
27 Block_BF_DI_4
28 Reset_BF_DI_2
29 Reset_BF_DI_3
30 Reset_BF_DI_4
31 Block_BF_DI_5
32 Reset_BF_DI_5
33 Block_Dif_5
34 Reset_Dif _5
35 SingleBus_1_&_5
36 SingleBus _2_&_5
37 SingleBus _3_&_5
38 SingleBus _4_&_5
Page 12 of 28
DNP3 PROTOCOL SETTINGS
DNP3 Protocol Settings

DNP Configuration
Setting Name Type Minimum Maximu Default Step Current
Value m Value Value Value
RTU Address Integer 0 65519 1 1
N7 Confirm Timeout Integer 100 60000 1000 1 ms
N7 Retries Integer 0 3 0 1
Enable Unsol. Report Boolean 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) 1
MTU Address Integer 0 65519 1 1
Unsol. Delay Report Integer 100 60000 1000 1 ms
Enable Echo Control Boolean 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) 1
Advice Time Integer 0 60000 0 1 ms
Fixed Delay Integer 0 30000 100 1 ms
Max. Random Delay Integer 0 30000 100 1 ms
Analog Inputs (Deadbands)
Deadband AI#0 Float 0% 100 % 100 % 0.01 %
Page 13 of 28
Default Values stands for factory settings (values after reset by meansF4of key).
All settings remain unchanged after a power loss.
RTU Address :
Remote Terminal Unit Address. Addresses 0xFFF0 to 0xFFFF are reserved as Broadcast
Addresses.
N7 Confirm Timeout :
Timeout while waiting for Application Layer Confirmation. It applies to Unsolicited
messages and Class 1 and Class 2 responses with event data.
N7 Retries :
Number of retries of the Application Layer after timeout while waiting for Confirmation.
Enable Unsolicited Reporting :

Enables or disables Unsolicited reporting.
Unsolicited Delay Reporting :

Delay between an event being generated and the subsequent transmission of the
unsolicited message, in order to group several events in one message and to save
bandwidth.
MTU Address :
Destination address of the Master device to which the unsolicited responses are to be sent.
Addresses 0xFFF0 to 0xFFFF are reserved as Broadcast Addresses. It is useful only when
Unsolicited Reporting is enabled.
Enable Echo Control :

Collision avoidance procedure, based on detection of transmitted data (monitoring all data
on the link). It is useful in multi-drop environments with unsolicited responses. If the device
prepares to transmit and finds the link busy, it waits until is no longer busy, and then waits
a backoff_time as follows:
backoff_time = fixed_delay + random(max_random_delay)
After the backoff_time, the device tries again ,up to a configurable number of retries. Refer
also to N2 Retries , Fixed Delay and Max. Random Delay settings.
Advice Time :
The device can transmit several zero characters before the message.
Page 14 of 28
Page 15 of 28
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
This document must be accompanied by: Implementation Table and Point List.
Vendor Name: ZIV Aplicaciones y Tecnología S.A.
Device Name: DBC – **C - *******E
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests 2 Master 7 Slave

For Responses 2
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):
1) Supports Enable/Disable Unsolicited Responses (FC=20 and 21), for classes 1

and 2.
2) Supports Write operations (FC=2) on Time and Date objects.
3) Supports Delay measurement Fine (FC=23).
4) Supports Warm Start command (FC=14).
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted _____292______ Transmitted _560 (if >2048, must be

Received (must be 292) configurable)
Received___249__(must be >= 249)
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
7 None None
Fixed at ____________________ 7 Configurable, range __0__ to __3__
Configurable, range ___ to _____ (Fixed is not permitted)
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
7 Never
Always
____________________________________________
__________________________________________
Page 16 of 28
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always (not recommended)
7 When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) For unsolicited, Class 1 and Class
2 responses that contain Event Data. (If there is no Event Data reported into a Class 1 or 2
response, Application Layer Confirmation is not requested)
When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm 7 None Fixed at ____ Variable

Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment 7 None Fixed at ____ Variable
Configurable
Application Confirm None Fixed at ____ Variable 7
Configurable
Complete Appl. Response 7 None Fixed at ____ Variable
Configurable
Others
_______________________________________________________________________
___
Attach explanation if 'Variable' or 'Configurable' was checked for any timeout
Application Confirm timeout setting (HMI): Range 100 ms - 60.000 ms.
Page 17 of 28
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
• Maximum number of CROB (obj. 12, var. 1) objects supported in a single message
1
• Maximum number of Analog Output (obj. 41, any var.) supported in a single message
0
Pattern Control Block and Pattern Mask (obj. 12, var. 2 and 3 respectively)
supported.
CROB (obj 12) and Analog Output (obj 41) permitted together in a single message.
WRITE Binary Outputs 7 Never Always

Sometimes
Configurable
SELECT (3) / OPERATE (4) Never 7 Always Sometimes
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE (5) Never 7 Always Sometimes
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK (6) Never 7Always Sometimes
Configurable
Count > 1 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never 7Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never 7Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never 7Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Clear Queue 7 Never Always Sometimes Configurable
_______________________________________________________________________
Attach explanation:
• All points support the same Function Codes: (3) Select, (4) Operate, (5) Direct
Operate and (6) Direct Operate - NO ACKNOWLEDGE.
• All points support the same Control Codes: (1H) Pulse ON, (3H) Latch ON, (4H)
Latch OFF, (41H) Close-Pulse ON and (81H) Trip-Pulse ON.
• Each of the permitted Control Codes performs the same operation in all points.
• ON-time and OFF-time fields are ignored.
• Maximum Select/Operate Delay Time: 60 seconds.
Page 18 of 28
FILL OUT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FOR SLAVE DEVICES ONLY:

Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change
no specific variation requested: Events when no specific variation requested:
Never Never
7 Only time-tagged 7 Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative
Configurable to send both, one or Time
the Configurable (attach explanation)
other (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never 7 Never
7 Configurable (See Note D) When Device Restarts
7 Only certain objects (Class 1 and When Status Flags Change
2)
Sometimes (attach explanation) No other options are permitted.
7 ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
7 No Counters Reported 7 No Counters Reported

Configurable (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object ____________ 16 Bits
Default Variation ____________ 32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached Other Value _____________
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: 7 Yes No
Page 19 of 28
QUICK REFERENCE FOR DNP3.0 LEVEL 2 FUNCTION CODES & QUALIFIERS

Function Codes 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Index Size Qualifier Code
1 Read
2 Write
3 Select Index Size Qualifier Code
4 Operate
5 Direct Operate 0- No Index, Packed 0- 8-Bit Start and Stop Indices
6 Direct Operate-No ACK 1- 1 byte Index 1- 16-Bit Start and Stop Indices
13 Cold Start 2- 2 byte Index 2- 32-Bit Start and Stop Indices
14 Warm Start 3- 4 byte Index 3- 8-Bit Absolute address Ident.
20 Enable Unsol. Messages 4- 1 byte Object Size 4- 16-Bit Absolute address Ident.
21 Disable Unsol. Messages 5- 2 byte Object Size 5- 32-Bit Absolute address Ident.
23 Delay Measurement 6- 4 byte Object Size 6- No Range Field (all)
129 Response 7- 8-Bit Quantity
130 Unsolicited Message 8- 16-Bit Quantity
9- 32-Bit Quantity
11-(0xB) Variable array
Page 20 of 28
IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
Func Qual Func Qual
1 0 Binary Input – All variations 1 6
Assigned to
1 1 Binary Input 129 1 Class 0.
2 0 Binary Input Change – All variations 1 6,7,8
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 6,7,8 129 B

Assigned to
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 6,7,8 129,130 28 Class 1.
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 6,7,8 129 B
10 0 Binary Outputs – All variations 1 6 129 A
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3,4,5,6 17,28 129 17,28
20 0 Binary Counter – All variations 1 6 129 A
21 0 Frozen Counter – All variations 1 6 129 A
22 0 Counter Change Event – All variations 1 6,7,8 129 B
30 0 Analog Input – All variations 1 6

Assigned to
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 129 1 Class 0.
32 0 Analog Change Event – All variations 1 6,7,8

Assigned to
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 129,130 28 Class 2.
40 0 Analog Output Status – All variations 1 6 129 A
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block 3,4,5,6 17,28 129 A

7
50 1 Time and Date 2 129 C
count=1
7
52 2 Time Delay Fine 23 129 F, G
count=1
Page 21 of 28
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
Func Qual Func Qual
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 6 129 1
1 6,7,8
60 2 Class 1 Data 129,130 28 D
20,21 6
1 6,7,8
60 3 Class 2 Data 129,130 28 D
20,21 6
1 6,7,8
60 4 Class 3 Data N/A B
20,21 6
0
80 1 Internal Indications 2 E
index=7
-- -- No Object (Cold Start) 13 F
-- -- No Object (Warm Start) 14 F
-- -- No Object (Delay Measurement) 23 G
NOTES
A: Device implementation level does not support this group and variation of object or, for static objects, it has no objects
with this group and variation. OBJECT UNKNOWN response (IIN2 bit 1 set).
B: No point range was specified, and device has no objects of this type. NULL response (no IIN bits set, but no objects
of the specified type returned).
C: Device supports write operations on Time and Date objects. Time Synchronization-Required Internal Indication bit (IIN1-
4) will be cleared on the response.
D: The device can be configured to send unsolicited responses depending on a configuration option selected in the HMI
(Human-Machine-Interface or front-panel user interface). Then, the Master can Enable or Disable Unsolicited messages
(for Classes 1 and 2) by means of requests (FC 20 and 21).
If the unsolicited response mode is configured "on", then upon device restart, the device will transmit an initial Null
unsolicited response, requesting an application layer confirmation. While waiting for that application layer confirmation,
the device will respond to all function requests, including READ requests.
E: Restart Internal Indication bit (IIN1-7) can be cleared explicitly by the master.
F: The outstation, upon receiving a Cold or Warm Start request, will respond sending a Time Delay Fine object message
(which specifies a time interval until the outstation will be ready for further communications), restarting the DNP process,
clearing events stored in its local buffers and setting IIN1-7 bit (Device Restart).
G: Device supports Delay Measurement requests (FC = 23). It responds with the Time Delay Fine object (52-2). This object
states the number of milliseconds elapsed between Outstation receiving the first bit of the first byte of the request and the
time of transmission of the first bit of the first byte of the response.
Page 22 of 28
DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES
• Internal Indication IIN1-6 (Device trouble): Set to indicate a change in the current DNP
configuration in the outstation. Cleared in the next response. Used to let the master station
know that DNP settings have changed at the outstation. Note that some erroneous
configurations could make this condition impossible to communicate to a master station.
This document also states the DNP3.0 settings currently available in the device. If the user
changes any of these settings, it will set the Device Trouble Internal Indication bit on the
next response sent.
• Event buffers: device can hold as much as 50 Binary Input Changes and 50 Analog Input
Changes. If these limits are reached the device will set the Event Buffers Overflow Internal
Indication bit on the next response sent. It will be cleared when the master reads the
changes, making room for new ones.
• Configuration Ä Operation Enable menu: the device can enable or disable permissions for
operations. If permissions are configured off (disabled) the response to a command (issued
as Control Relay Output Block) will have the Status code NOT_AUTHORIZED. If the
equipment is blocked the only command allowed is to Reset it.
• Configuration Ä Binary Inputs/Outputs menu: what is shown on the Point List is the default
configuration (as shipped from factory or after a reset by means of F4 key), but customers
can configure Inputs/Outputs to suit their needs, by means of ZIVerCom® software.
T Deadbands
• Deadbands are used for configuring Analog Input Change objects (Object 32).
• A Deadband is defined as a percentage over the Full Scale Range (FSR). In this device, for
differential currents and restraint currents, the FSR is defined in the notes under Analog
Input objects of the Point List.
• A Deadband setting of 10% means that a change equal or greater than ± 0+/- 1,68A in a
differential current or +/- 16,8A in a restraint current between last-reported value and the
current value is required to generate an event.
• The Deadband can be adjusted to the device by means of HMI (Human-Machine Interface or
front-panel user interface), between 0.00% and 100.00%, in steps of 0.01%. Default value is
100.00%, meaning that generation of Analog Change Events is DISABLED for that input.
There is an independent setting for each Analog Input.
Page 23 of 28
POINT LIST
BINARY INPUT (OBJECT 1) -> Assigned to Class 0.
BINARY INPUT CHANGE (OBJECT 2) -> Assigned to Class 1.
Index Description Description
for DBC with 2 I/0 Boards: for DBC with 1 I/0 Board:
DBC-***-***1***E* DBC-***-***0***E*
or DBC-***-***3***E* or DBC-***-***2***E*

Page 24 of 28

NOTES
A: For the restraint current measured values, the value 32767 corresponds to 20% over the rated current (1 or 5 A times 1.2
depending on model) times the maximum number of possible bays connected to the differential (14 or 28 depending on
model) 28 in this case.
B: For the differential current measured valued, the value 32767 corresponds to the restraint current value divided by 10 (in
general, differential currents have small values, therefore larger resolution is required) - (1.2 x In x 28) / 10 .
Page 25 of 28
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK (OBJECT 12)

Index Description
0 Reset_86
1 Reset_BF_DI_1
2 Reset_Dif_1
3 Reset_Dif_2
4 Reset_Dif_3
5 Reset_Dif _4
6 Block_BF_DI_1
7 Block_Dif_1
8 Block_Dif_2
9 Block_Dif_3
10 Block_Dif _4
11 Oscillo Pickup
12 Reset_BF
13 SingleBus_1_&_2
14 SingleBus _1_&_3
15 SingleBus _1_&_4
16 SingleBus 2_&_3
17 SingleBus _2_&_4
18 SingleBus _3_&_4
25 Block_BF_DI_2
26 Block_BF_DI_3
27 Block_BF_DI_4
28 Reset_BF_DI_2
29 Reset_BF_DI_3
30 Reset_BF_DI_4
Page 26 of 28
DNP3 PROTOCOL SETTINGS
DNP3 Protocol Settings

DNP Configuration
RTU Address Integer 0 65519 1 1
N7 Confirm Timeout Integer 100 60000 1000 1 ms
Enable Unsol. Report Boolean 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) 1
MTU Address Integer 0 65519 1 1
Unsol. Delay Report Integer 100 60000 1000 1 ms
Enable Echo Control Boolean 0 (No) 1 (Yes) 0 (No) 1
Advice Time Integer 0 60000 0 1 ms
Fixed Delay Integer 0 30000 100 1 ms
Max. Random Delay Integer 0 30000 100 1 ms
Analog Inputs (Deadbands)
Default Values stands for factory settings (values after reset by meansF4of key).
All settings remain unchanged after a power loss.
Page 27 of 28
RTU Address :
Remote Terminal Unit Address. Addresses 0xFFF0 to 0xFFFF are reserved as Broadcast
Addresses.
N7 Confirm Timeout :
Timeout while waiting for Application Layer Confirmation. It applies to Unsolicited
messages and Class 1 and Class 2 responses with event data.
N7 Retries :
Number of retries of the Application Layer after timeout while waiting for Confirmation.
Enable Unsolicited Reporting :

Enables or disables Unsolicited reporting.
Unsolicited Delay Reporting :

Delay between an event being generated and the subsequent transmission of the
unsolicited message, in order to group several events in one message and to save
bandwidth.
MTU Address :
Destination address of the Master device to which the unsolicited responses are to be sent.
Addresses 0xFFF0 to 0xFFFF are reserved as Broadcast Addresses. It is useful only when
Unsolicited Reporting is enabled.
Enable Echo Control :

Collision avoidance procedure, based on detection of transmitted data (monitoring all data
on the link). It is useful in multi-drop environments with unsolicited responses. If the device
prepares to transmit and finds the link busy, it waits until is no longer busy, and then waits
a backoff_time as follows:
backoff_time = fixed_delay + random(max_random_delay)
After the backoff_time, the device tries again ,up to a configurable number of retries. Refer
also to N2 Retries , Fixed Delay and Max. Random Delay settings.
Advice Time :
The device can transmit several zero characters before the message.
Page 28 of 28
C. MODBUS RTU
Documentation
Address Map

C.1 Models DBC-***-*******F* ........................................................................................... C-2
C.1.1 Preliminary Information .............................................................................................. C-2
C.1.2 Function 01: Read Coil Status ................................................................................... C-2
C.1.2.a Modbus Address Range ....................................................................................... C-2
C.1.2.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-*******F* ......................................................... C-2
C.1.3 Function 02: Read Input Status ................................................................................. C-5
C.1.4 Function 04: Read Input Registers ............................................................................ C-8
C.1.5 Function 05: Force Single Coil................................................................................. C-10
C.1.5.a Modbus Address Range ..................................................................................... C-10
C.1.5.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-*******F* ....................................................... C-10
C.2 Models DBC-***-****12*F* ....................................................................................... C-11
C.2.1 Preliminary Information ............................................................................................ C-11
C.2.2 Function 01: Read Coil Status ................................................................................. C-11
C.2.2.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-****12*F*...................................................... C-11
C.2.3 Function 02: Read Input Status ............................................................................... C-14
C.2.4 Function 04: Read Input Registers .......................................................................... C-17
C.2.5 Function 05: Force Single Coil................................................................................. C-19
C-1
Annex C. MODBUS RTU Documentation Address Map
C.1 Models DBC-***-*******F*

C.1.1 Preliminary Information
This a reference document for implementing the MODBUS RTU protocol in the DBC-***-
*******F* IED.
This document provides a detailed MODBUS address map (coil status, input registers and force
single coil) and their equivalent in the DBC-***-*******F* equipment.

01 Read Coil Status (see Note)
02 Read Input Status (see Note)
code 01 (Illegal function).
Note: Depending on the DBC setting CONFIGURATION – REAR COMMUNICATIONS - DBC Outputs in
MODBUS”, the Read Coil Status can be assigned to addresses in MODBUS Functions 01 or 02.
C.1.2 Function 01: Read Coil Status

C.1.2.a Modbus Address Range
Address Content
0200H..02FFH Read Coil Status (see Note)
C.1.2.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-*******F*

Depending on MODBUS DBC Outputs setting, the MODBUS address map for the relay DBC-
***-*******F* will be as follows.
• Setting “MODBUS DBC Outputs” = “Function 01 of MODBUS”
In this case, the address map depends on whether the relay has one or two input / output
boards, as shown in the table below.
Assigned addresses are fixed. The content of the addresses indicated with an (*) is also fixed,
the content of the other addresses being variable (it depends on the configuration selected by
the end-user for each relay).
The remaining addresses of the range will be considered as illegal and the exception code 02
(Illegal Data Address) will be returned as a reply.
C-2
BDBN0901A
Address DBC-***-***1***F* DBC-***-***0***F*

Description Description
(two I/O boards) (one I/O board)
0200H (*) Indication of the Lockout (DBC output 35)
0201H (*) Global Breaker Failure Sealing (DBC output 108)
0202H (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 1 (DBC output 29)
0206H (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 1 by BF or DI (DBC output 119)
020AH (*) Tie buses 1 and 2 in bus 1 (DBC output 84)
020BH (*) Tie buses 1 and 3 in bus 1 (DBC output 85)
020CH (*) Tie buses 1 and 4 in bus 1 (DBC output 86)
020DH (*) Tie buses 2 and 3 in bus 2 (DBC output 87)
020EH (*) Tie buses 2 and 4 in bus 2 (DBC output 88)
020FH (*) Tie buses 3 and 4 in bus 3 (DBC output 89)
0210H Aux-1 Output Status Aux-1 Output Status
0216H Aux-8 Output Status
021AH Aux-12 Output Status
021BH Aux-13 Output Status
C-3
BDBN0901A

The address map in this case is always as indicated in the following table independent of the
number of I/O modules. Control address data are always zero.
Address Description
0200H (*) 0
0201H (*) 0
0202H (*) 0
0203H (*) 0
0204H (*) 0
0205H (*) 0
0206H (*) 0
0207H (*) 0
0208H (*) 0
0209H (*) 0
020AH (*) 0
020BH (*) 0
020CH (*) 0
020DH (*) 0
020EH (*) 0
020FH (*) 0
0210H (*) 0
Assigned addresses are fixed. The content of the addresses indicated with an (*) is fixed.
C-4
BDBN0901A
C.1.3 Function 02: Read Input Status

Address Content
0000..00FFH Read Input Status, or relay inputs and outputs (see Note)

***-*******F* will be as follows.
Address DBC-***-***1***F* DBC-***-***0***F*

0000H IN 1 Digital Input Status IN 1 Digital Input Status
0007H IN 8 Digital Input Status
000AH IN 11 Digital Input Status
000BH IN 12 Digital Input Status
000CH IN 13 Digital Input Status
000DH IN 14 Digital Input Status
Assigned addresses are fixed, their content being variable (it depends on the configuration
selected by the end-user for each relay).
C-5
BDBN0901A

The address map depends on whether the relay has one or two input / output boards, as shown
in the table below.
Address in Address in Description

DBC-***-***1***F* DBC-***-***0***F*
0000H 0000H IN 1 Digital Input Status
000EH (*) 0007H (*) Indication of the Lockout (DBC output 35)
000FH (*) 0008H (*) Global Breaker Failure Sealing (DBC output 108)
0010H (*) 0009H (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 1 (DBC output 29)
0011H (*) 000AH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 2 (DBC output 30)
0012H (*) 000BH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 3 (DBC output 31)
0013H (*) 000CH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 4 (DBC output 32)
0014H (*) 000DH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 1 by BF or DI (DBC output 119)
0015H (*) 000EH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 2 by BF or DI (DBC output 120)
0016H (*) 000FH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 3 by BF or DI (DBC output 121)
0017H (*) 0010H (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 4 by BF or DI (DBC output 122)
0018H (*) 0011H (*) Tie buses 1 and 2 in bus 1 (DBC output 84)
001AH (*) 0013H (*) Tie buses 1 and 4 in bus 1 (DBC output 86)
001BH (*) 0014H (*) Tie buses 2 and 3 in bus 2 (DBC output 87)
001CH (*) 0015H (*) Tie buses 2 and 4 in bus 2 (DBC output 88)
001DH (*) 0016H (*) Tie buses 3 and 4 in bus 3 (DBC output 89)
C-6
BDBN0901A

DBC-***-***1***F* DBC-***-***0***F*
001EH 0017H Aux-1 Output Status
001FH 0018H Aux-2 Output Status
0020H 0019H Aux-3 Output Status
0021H 001AH Aux-4 Output Status
0022H 001BH Aux-5 Output Status
0023H 001CH Aux-6 Output Status
Assigned addresses are fixed.
The content of the addresses indicated with an (*) is fixed, other addresses content being
variable (it depends on the configuration selected by the end-user for each relay).
C-7
BDBN0901A
C.1.4 Function 04: Read Input Registers

Address Content
2000H..2023H Measurement value

The following is the MODBUS address map for differential currents and restraint currents
metering in models DBC-***-*******F*. Also, models with Voltage Bays include voltage metering.

DBC-**A DBC-**B
DBC-**C DBC-**D
2000H 2000H Bus 1 Phase A Differential Current Measurement
2001H 2001H Bus 1 Phase B Differential Current Measurement
2002H 2002H Bus 1 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
2003H 2003H Bus 1 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
2004H 2004H Bus 1 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
2005H 2005H Bus 1 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
200AH 200AH Bus 2 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
200BH 200BH Bus 2 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
200CH 200CH Bus 3 Phase A Differential Current Measurement
200DH 200DH Bus 3 Phase B Differential Current Measurement
200EH 200EH Bus 3 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
200FH 200FH Bus 3 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
C-8
BDBN0901A

DBC-**A DBC-**B
DBC-**C DBC-**D
It does not exist 2018H Bus 1 Phase A Voltage
It does not exist 2019H Bus 1 Phase B Voltage
It does not exist 201AH Bus 1 Phase C Voltage
It does not exist 201BH Bus 2 Phase A Voltage
It does not exist 201CH Bus 2 Phase B Voltage
It does not exist 201DH Bus 2 Phase C Voltage
It does not exist 201EH Bus 3 Phase A Voltage
It does not exist 201FH Bus 3 Phase B Voltage
It does not exist 2020H Bus 3 Phase C Voltage
It does not exist 2021H Bus 4 Phase A Voltage
It does not exist 2022H Bus 4 Phase B Voltage
It does not exist 2023H Bus 4 Phase C Voltage
The rest of addresses will be considered as illegal and the exception code 02 (Illegal Data
Address) will be returned as a reply.
Disabled bus measurements (through bus Enable settings located in Central Unit General
settings), will send an invalid value (although the protocol does not specify anything on invalid
data, the value 32767 decimal = 7FFF H will be sent, which can be considered invalid as it is
out of the allowable measurement range, the maximum of which is 32760 decimal). Therefore,
in case no bus is enabled, all measurements will have an invalid value.
For Restraint Current metering, 32760 decimal counts (7FF8 H) corresponding to the rated
current setting multiplied by 1.2 (1A or 5A depending on model) times the maximum number of
Bay Units that can be connected to the central unit (14 or 28 depending on model).
For Differential current measurements, 32760 d (7FF8 h) corresponds to the values taken for
restraint currents divided by 10 (as the differential current has normally very small values and
greater resolution is needed).
For Voltage metering, 32760 decimal counts (7FF8 H) corresponding to the rated voltage
setting multiplied by 1.2 (setting under Central Unit General Settings of DBC models with
Voltage Bays).
C-9
BDBN0901A
C.1.5 Function 05: Force Single Coil

Address Content
0200H..02FFH Force Single Coil Value

The MODBUS force single coil address map of the DBC-***-*******F* equipment will be:
Address Value Function

0200H FF00H-ON 86 Reset
0201H FF00H-ON Oscillography PickUp
0202H FF00H-ON BF Reset
0203H FF00H-ON 87 Trip Blocking (Bus 1)
0203H 0000H-OFF 87 Trip Unblocking (Bus 1)
0207H FF00H-ON Bus 1 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
020AH FF00H-ON Bus 4 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
0207H 0000H-OFF Bus 1 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
020AH 0000H-OFF Bus 4 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
020BH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 1 and 2
020CH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 1 and 3
020DH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 1 and 4
020EH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 2 and 3
020FH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 2 and 4
0210H FF00H-ON Tie Buses 3 and 4
020BH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 1 and 2
020CH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 1 and 3
020DH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 1 and 4
020EH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 2 and 3
020FH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 2 and 4
0210H 0000H-OFF Split Buses 3 and 4
The rest of addresses of the range will be considered as illegal and the exception code 02
Any other value different to 0000H or FF00H will be considered illegal and the exception
code 03 (Illegal Data Value) will be returned as a reply.
C-10
BDBN0901A
C.2 Models DBC-***-****12*F*

C.2.1 Preliminary Information
This a reference document for implementing the MODBUS RTU protocol in the DBC-***-
****12*F* IED.
This document provides a detailed MODBUS address map (coil status, input registers and force
single coil) and their equivalent in the DBC-***-****12*F* equipment.

01 Read Coil Status (see Note)
02 Read Input Status (see Note)
code 01 (Illegal function).
C.2.2 Function 01: Read Coil Status

Address Content
0200H..02FFH Read Coil Status (see Note)
C.2.2.b Modbus Address Map for DBC-***-****12*F*

***-****12*F* will be as follows.
Assigned addresses are fixed. The content of the addresses indicated with an (*) is also fixed,
the content of the other addresses being variable (it depends on the configuration selected by
the end-user for each relay).
C-11
BDBN0901A
Address DBC-***-****12*F* Description (one or two I/O boards)

0200H (*) Indication of the Lockout (DBC output 42)
0201H (*) Global Breaker Failure Sealing (DBC output 108)
020AH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 4 by BF or DI (DBC output 123)
020BH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 5 by BF or DI (DBC output 124)
020CH (*) Tie buses 1 and 2 in bus 1 (DBC output 83)
020DH (*) Tie buses 1 and 3 in bus 1 (DBC output 84)
020EH (*) Tie buses 1 and 4 in bus 1 (DBC output 85)
020FH (*) Tie buses 1 and 5 in bus 1 (DBC output 86)
0210H (*) Tie buses 2 and 3 in bus 2 (DBC output 87)
Address DBC-***-***112*F* DBC-***-***012*F*
021AH Aux-5 Output Status Aux-5 Output Status
021BH Aux-6 Output Status Aux-6 Output Status
021CH Aux-8 Output Status
021DH Aux-9 Output Status
021EH Aux-10 Output Status
021FH Aux-11 Output Status
C-12
BDBN0901A

The address map in this case is always as indicated in the following table independent of the
number of I/O modules. Control address data are always zero.
Address Description
0200H (*) 0
0201H (*) 0
0202H (*) 0
0203H (*) 0
0204H (*) 0
0205H (*) 0
0206H (*) 0
0207H (*) 0
0208H (*) 0
0209H (*) 0
020AH (*) 0
020BH (*) 0
020CH (*) 0
020DH (*) 0
020EH (*) 0
020FH (*) 0
0210H (*) 0
Assigned addresses are fixed. The content of the addresses indicated with an (*) is fixed.
C-13
BDBN0901A
C.2.3 Function 02: Read Input Status

Address Content
0000..00FFH Read Input Status, or relay inputs and outputs (see Note)

***-****12*F* will be as follows.
Address DBC-***-***112*F* DBC-***-***012*F*

Assigned addresses are fixed, their content being variable (it depends on the configuration
selected by the end-user for each relay).
C-14
BDBN0901A

The address map depends on whether the relay has one or two input / output boards, as shown
in the table below.

DBC-***-***112*F* DBC-***-***012*F*
000EH (*) 0007H (*) Indication of the Lockout (DBC output 42)
000FH (*) 0008H (*) Global Breaker Failure Sealing (DBC output 108)
0010H (*) 0009H (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 1 (DBC output 35)
0011H (*) 000AH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 2 (DBC output 36)
0012H (*) 000BH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 3 (DBC output 37)
0013H (*) 000CH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 4 (DBC output 38)
0014H (*) 000DH (*) Blocking of Differential Unit Bus 5 (DBC output 39)
0015H (*) 000EH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 1 by BF or DI (DBC output 120)
0016H (*) 000FH (*) Trip Blocking in Bus 2 by BF or DI (DBC output 121)
001AH (*) 0013H (*) Tie buses 1 and 2 in bus 1 (DBC output 83)
001BH (*) 0014H (*) Tie buses 1 and 3 in bus 1 (DBC output 84)
001CH (*) 0015H (*) Tie buses 1 and 4 in bus 1 (DBC output 85)
001DH (*) 0016H (*) Tie buses 1 and 5 in bus 1 (DBC output 86)
C-15
BDBN0901A

DBC-***-***112*F* DBC-***-***012*F*
001EH (*) 0017H (*) Tie buses 2 and 3 in bus 2 (DBC output 87)
001FH (*) 0018H (*) Tie buses 2 and 4 in bus 2 (DBC output 88)
0021H (*) 001AH (*) Tie buses 3 and 4 in bus 3 (DBC output 90)
0022H (*) 001BH (*) Tie buses 3 and 5 in bus 3 (DBC output 91)
0023H (*) 001CH (*) Tie buses 4 and 5 in bus 4 (DBC output 92)
0024H 001DH Aux-1 Output Status
0025H 001EH Aux-2 Output Status
0026H 001FH Aux-3 Output Status
002AH Aux-8 Output Status
002BH Aux-9 Output Status
002CH Aux-10 Output Status
002DH Aux-11 Output Status
002EH Aux-12 Output Status
002FH Aux-13 Output Status
Assigned addresses are fixed.
The content of the addresses indicated with an (*) is fixed, other addresses content being
variable (it depends on the configuration selected by the end-user for each relay).
C-16
BDBN0901A
C.2.4 Function 04: Read Input Registers

Address Content
2000H..2023H Measurement value

The following is the MODBUS address map for differential currents and restraint currents
metering in models DBC-***-****12*F*.
Address in DBC-**A DBC-**C Description

2000H Bus 1 Phase A Differential Current Measurement
2001H Bus 1 Phase B Differential Current Measurement
2002H Bus 1 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
2003H Bus 1 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
2004H Bus 1 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
2005H Bus 1 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
200AH Bus 2 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
200BH Bus 2 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
200CH Bus 3 Phase A Differential Current Measurement
200DH Bus 3 Phase B Differential Current Measurement
200EH Bus 3 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
200FH Bus 3 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
201AH Bus 5 Phase C Differential Current Measurement
201BH Bus 5 Phase A Restraint Current Measurement
201CH Bus 5 Phase B Restraint Current Measurement
201DH Bus 5 Phase C Restraint Current Measurement
Note: DBN Model 12 does not include Voltage Bays.
C-17
BDBN0901A
The rest of addresses will be considered as illegal and the exception code 02 (Illegal Data
Address) will be returned as a reply.
Disabled bus measurements (through bus Enable settings located in Central Unit General
settings), will send an invalid value (although the protocol does not specify anything on invalid
data, the value 32767 decimal = 7FFF H will be sent, which can be considered invalid as it is
out of the allowable measurement range, the maximum of which is 32760 decimal). Therefore,
in case no bus is enabled, all measurements will have an invalid value.
For Restraint Current metering, 32760 decimal counts (7FF8 H) corresponding to the rated
current setting multiplied by 1.2 (1A or 5A depending on model) times the maximum number of
Bay Units that can be connected to the central unit (14 or 28 depending on model).
For Differential current measurements, 32760 d (7FF8 h) corresponds to the values taken for
restraint currents divided by 10 (as the differential current has normally very small values and
greater resolution is needed).
C-18
BDBN0901A
C.2.5 Function 05: Force Single Coil

Address Content
0200H..02FFH Force Single Coil Value

The MODBUS force single coil address map of the DBC-***-****12*F* equipment will be:
Address Value Function

0200H FF00H-ON 86 Reset
0201H FF00H-ON Oscillography PickUp
0202H FF00H-ON BF Reset
020AH FF00H-ON Bus 3 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
020BH FF00H-ON Bus 4 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
020CH FF00H-ON Bus 5 Trip Blocking by BF or DI
020AH 0000H-OFF Bus 3 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
020BH 0000H-OFF Bus 4 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
020CH 0000H-OFF Bus 5 Trip Unblocking by BF or DI
020DH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 1 and 2
020EH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 1 and 3
020FH FF00H-ON Tie Buses 1 and 4
C-19
BDBN0901A
Address Valor Function

020DH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 1 and 2
020EH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 1 and 3
020FH 0000H-OFF Split Buses 1 and 4
The rest of addresses of the range will be considered as illegal and the exception code 02
Any other value different to 0000H or FF00H will be considered illegal and the exception
code 03 (Illegal Data Value) will be returned as a reply.
C-20
BDBN0901A
D. IEC 61850
Protocol

D.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ D-2
D.2 Starting Communications ........................................................................................... D-3
D.3 Information Screens ................................................................................................... D-4
D.4 Web Server ................................................................................................................ D-6
D.5 Communications Port Configuration .......................................................................... D-7
D.6 FTP Access................................................................................................................ D-9
D.7 SCL: Substation Configuration Language ................................................................. D-9
D.7.1 CID file for Protection and Control Equipment ......................................................... D-10
D.7.2 Loading the CID trough FTP .................................................................................... D-10
D.7.3 Loading the CID through USB by means of a Pendrive .......................................... D-11
D.8 Errors ....................................................................................................................... D-12
Annex D. IEC 61850 Protocol
D.1 Introduction
IEC 61850 is a standard applicable to Substation Automation Systems (SAS) that defines the
communications between substation IEDs and related system requirements.
Significant technology development has involved the evolution of secondary substation

equipment: from electromechanical to digital devices and thus the possibility to implement SAS
using a number of IEDs to carry out protection, control and monitoring functions.
Presently, efficient communications between IEDs is needed and therefore standard protocols
are needed that support both “interoperability” and “interchangeability”.
IEC61850 communications equipment of the ‘V’ family is provided with functions additional to
those provided by protection and control equipment.
This equipment may become independent from communications, performing their protection or
control functions independently or may be used for data reports, set or receive specific data.
IEC61850 communications provide the following additional services:
- Report device-generated data (Starting, tripping, blocking, etc) to higher level equipment
(Central unit, remote control, HMI, etc).
- Report prompt data (GOOSE) to other same level equipment (protections, control
equipment, auxiliary services) or even to other higher level equipment.
- MMS communications that allows any MMS browser to receive the model of equipment
data and be able to operate with it to edit settings and parameters and execute
commands to the equipment.
- Handle a single configuration file (CID) that allows having a backup of all parameters
whether they are protection, control and communications.
- Web server to provide data about equipment status, errors and state and measurement
values.
D-2
BDBN0901A
D.2 Starting Communications

Unlike protection and control functions that start in less than 3 seconds, IEC61850
communications start in a variable time as a function of the data configured.
In a reboot, the main IEC61850 communications screens are as follows:
Initial moment in which the basic data of the

operating system are loaded. ZIV
#DBN
Central Unit
06/08/11 02:98:36
Starting IEC61850
Autorun screen that manages the IP and

allows to stop booting or carry out other ZIV
maintenance tasks.
AUTORUN 1.35 E(3.8)
LN1:192.168.1.81
PRESS F4
Screens to create the IEC61850 model and

read CID. ZIV
READ CID
_DBCC1A612P.CID
Equipment home screen that indicates the

equipment is fully booted and ready for ZIV
communications. #DBN
Central Unit
06/08/11 02:98:36
D-3
BDBN0901A
D.3 Information Screens

Equipment with IEC61850 communications include a data Menu, access of which is gained
pressing the key combination: Up Scroll Arrow and Dot from the HMI default screen.
This screen displays in the first line the

equipment software model, in the second ZIV
line, versions of the active IEC61850 #DBCC1A***112*PFFFF
application, the third, the equipment IP (if
no network cable were connected, it will V(0.6) [01] [6.2R]
show 0.0.0.0) and the last line, the MAC of 192.168.1.81
the network adapter. 00:E0:AB:02:98:36
From this screen more data can be displayed through the function keys F2, F3 and F4.
Pressing F2 displays a screen with Goose

message data. This screen displays ZIV
information on whether Goose message [ON ]GIe:0000 0000
transmission is activated: [ON ]GO, if
receive is configured [ON ]GI, and if so, the 01?? GIv:0000 0000
message that is not being received: 01?? [ON ]GOe:0000 0000→
The arrow → indicates the moment when a GOv:0000 0000
Goose message is sent.
Pressing F3 displays a screen with

expanded data. ZIV
EBOOT (3.8)
[IRV-9836]
Ver SO(2.99)
IEC [6.2R][RUN]
D-4
BDBN0901A
It is a screen that can be scrolled down using the scroll arrows, the complete data being: Data
on the Eboot, Operating System, application, checksums versions and network adapter data,
etc.
EBOOT (3.8)
[IRV-9836]
Ver SO(2.99)
IEC [6.2R][RUN]
CRC:[4720E6D0]
BLD[Sep 28 2011]
BLD[08:46:05]
MMS<->IEC<->IRV
#DBCC1A***112*PFFFF
(0.6)[01]
[BOND_ETHBOND]
192.168.1.81
00:E0:AB:02:98:36
DHCP[0]
Type[6]
GWY[192.168.1.10]
CONNECTIONS 0
[BOND:ETHBOND]
RxERR:[0]
TxERR:[0]
FiFoE:0 Uso:1
FiFoM:0 Uso:68
NmRtr:0 Mxmed:4
Pressing F4 displays the SNTP client data

screen. The screen shows the version of ZIV
the Operating System, the version of the Ver S.O.(2.99)
SNTP client, whether the client is switched
off, switched on or in Error and the receive Ver SNTP(2.250)
time and whether is valid (v) or invalid (i). Sinc SNTP [ON] 11/09/29
11/09/29 09:04:25v
Press ESC to return to the default screen
from any screen.
D-5
BDBN0901A
D.4 Web Server

Through the web server access can be gained to firmware versions, boot status and useful
relay data. Write the equipment IP address in a web browser for access:
The following data are displayed:
(C) ZIV http://www.ziv.es

EBOOT See (3.8) ID[IRV-9836]
Version NK 2.99
Version IEC [6.2R][RUN]
Build EXE [Sep 28 2011][4720E6D0]
Model IRV #DBCC1A***112*PFFFF
Version API (0.6)[01]
HTML APLICATION
HTML EXECUTION
HTML MAPPING
HTML CIDLOAD
CONNECTIONS
LIST DIGITALS
LIST ANALOGS
LIST OSCILOS
TXT APLERROR.LOG
TXT MAPERROR.LOG
TXT EXECERROR.LOG
TXT CIDERROR.LOG
CID ACTIVE _DBCC1A612P.CID
ETHERNET ADAPTERS
LAN2 BOND_ETHBOND 128.127.50.152 00:E0:AB:02:98:36 DHCP ON Type[6] GATEWAY:[128.127.0.102]
That corresponds to firmware versions, network adapter data, boot data, which can be
displayed in web page (HTML) format or in downloadable text file (TXT) format.
Also, information on the active MMS connections (MMS clients), a list of internal signals and
their value in IEC61850 standard format with their actual description is provided.
Generated oscillograms (DAT and CFG files) can be displayed and downloaded from the link.
Also, the active CID will be available, which can be downloaded from the link.
D-6
BDBN0901A
D.5 Communications Port Configuration

IEC61850 communications equipment use Ethernet and TCP/IP protocol for MMS
communications (standard used to pack data on the network).
Therefore, irrespective of the physical media and the connection (fiber, copper, etc) the IP used
by the equipment in the network must be configured.
DBCs are provided with 2 physical ports with separate IPs thus separate configuration settings.
Equipment models #DBC-***-*******P* are provided with 2 physical ports with a single IP with
only one group of settings.
The different functions are represented in the diagrams below:
This diagram
corresponds to
equipment models other
than #DBC-***-
*******P*, in which 2
separate network
adapters with different
MAC and thus different
IP are arranged.
Both adapters are
independent and can
gain access to the same
MMS data at the same
time, but not so with the
GOOSE messages that
will be sent and
received only by one of
them.
Figure D.1: Communications Ports Configuration
D-7
BDBN0901A
This diagram
corresponds to
equipment model
#DBC-***-*******P*,
which is provided with 2
network adapters that
work as a single
adapter (with only one
MAC and a single IP),
only one of them being
active as a function of
media detection (a
broken connection to
the adaptor results in
switching to the other
adaptor that does not
have connection
problems).
Figure D.2: Communications Ports Configuration for #DBC-***-

*******P* Models
Equipment other than #DBC-***-*******P* will be provided with the following settings by adapter:
- IP Address.
- DHCP Enable.
- Default Gateway.
- Network Mask.
- DNS Address.
Apart from being able to configure through which of the 2 adapters GOOSE messages are to be
sent/received (by default, it will be adapter 2).
Equipment models #DBC-***-*******P* are provided with the following settings common to both
adapters:
- IP Address.
- DHCP Enable.
- Default Gateway
- Network Mask.
- DNS Address
There not being a setting to configure the send/receive GOOSE channel as that will always be
through the active adapter. Also, a setting is included to be able to configure the media
switching time (from 25 to 100ms)
D-8
BDBN0901A
D.6 FTP Access

The FTP access will allow having a number of equipment folders available. There will be
different folders as a function of the user and password:
Logging in as anonymous, without user and password, access is gained to a directory in which
only one CID can be copied (refer to section on how to change the CID configuration file).
Logging in as user: info and password: info, a

directory structure similar to the one on the right
will be displayed.
These are read-only folders and can be

downloaded.
Directories will contain the same data provided by

the web server: Boot data, active CID, oscillogram
files, etc.
Figure D.3: Directory Structure
D.7 SCL: Substation Configuration Language

SCL is a tool to interchange IED capability description and substation automation system
description between IED engineering tools and system engineering tools of different
manufacturers.
The engineering process of the substation calls for the SCL to be able to describe in full detail
the functional specification of the substation, the capability of the IEDs used and the final
system configured.
SCL determines the use of various types of files during the engineering process. Main files for
relays are:
- ICD (IED Capability Description): describes engineering and functional capabilities of

the IED without specific configuration. An IED complying with the standard must be
accompanied by its ICD.
- CID (Configured IED Description): describes the full configuration of the IED within the
specific project and all data required for the “IED configurator” to load it onto the IED.
D-9
BDBN0901A
D.7.1 CID file for Protection and Control Equipment

The equipment includes a file (CID) in IEC61850 standard format according to part 6 (SCL).
This file allows knowing the equipment data model in node, data and attribute format.
Also, it allows to configure GOOSE message parameters, receive other GOOSES, create
datasets and assign them to Reports, edit settings, change the control logic, descriptions,
parameters, etc.
This file can be edited through a SCL file editing program, the ZiverCID®.
This program allows configuring this file to be sent later to the equipment through FTP or USB
port.
D.7.2 Loading the CID trough FTP

In order to gain access to the equipment through FTP an FTP client program is required. The
Windows browser itself allows making an FTP to the equipment address. For this, enter the
equipment IP address in the Address bar in the following way:
The CID configured can be copied to the FTP root directory without entering user and
password.
The equipment will validate the CID (checks it is a correct SCL and the CID IP matches that of
the equipment).
Once it has been validated, the equipment carries out a backup and reboot process, rebooting
communications and using a new CID.
D-10
BDBN0901A
D.7.3 Loading the CID through USB by means of a Pendrive

To load a new CID to the equipment through the HMI USB, an empty Pendrive is needed to
copy the new CID to the root directory.
With the equipment fully booted and from

the home screen, insert the i Pendrive and ZIV
wait for it to be detected. COPY CID
Then confirmation to copy is requested. _DBCC1A612P.cid
CONFIRM COPY
YES NO
Confirm by pressing F1.

ZIV
REMOVE PENDRIVE
COPY OK
When removing the Pendrive, the

equipment will copy the CID to a temporary ZIV
directory where it will be validated (it will VALID CID
check it is a correct SCL and CID IP
matches that of the equipment). VALIDATE CID
Once it has been validated, the equipment carries out a backup and reboot process, rebooting
communications and using the new CID.
D-11
BDBN0901A
D.8 Errors
During equipment configuration, actions may be carried out resulting in errors that can be
identified and corrected.
- Switching the equipment off

during the process of CID write to ZIV
a Flash memory: during operation,
the equipment writes the CID to
Flash type non volatile memory. !WRITING CID!
DO NOT POWER OFF
If during this process, the equipment

is switched off, it is likely that the CID ZIV
copied to the Flash is lost. IEC [6.2R]
In this case, in the next boot up the !ERROR!:[0100]
type of message below will be DBCC1A612P.cid
displayed on the screen, YES RESTORE CID? NO
_IRVA3N403B.CID being the active
CID file.
For a few seconds, it will be possible to recover the backup copy of the CID available in
the equipment just before the settings were last changed.
If F1 is pressed to recover the CID, the equipment will use this backup copy to boot up. If
F4 or no key is pressed, the equipment will remain waiting for a new CID through any of
the CID loading methods (FTP or USB).
- In case of multiple undue

shutdowns (e.g. shutdown after CID ZIV
recovery), the backup copy of the IEC [6.2R]
CID could also be lost. In this case
the message on the right will be !ERROR!:[0100]
displayed, waiting for a new CID to -------.CID
be introduced by any of the CID
loading methods (FTP or USB).
- Error message 10 40. This means

there is a problem with IEC61850 ZIV
communications that does not affect [ERROR N. 10 40]
the protection and control function.
In this case, please contact the Central Unit
technical service to identify the 06/08/11 02:98:36
nature of the failure.
D-12
BDBN0901A
E. Schemes and
Drawings
Dimension and Drill Hole Schemes
DBC (4U x 1 rack de 19”) >>4BF0100/0030

DBP (2U x 1 rack de 19”) >>4BF0100/0011
External Connection Schemes
DBC (14 Bays, I., 1 I/O M) >>3RX0152/0017

DBC (14 Bays, I., 2 I/O M) >>3RX0152/0018
DBC (28 Bays, I., 1 I/O M) >>3RX0152/0019
DBC (28 Bays, I., 2 I/O M) >>3RX0152/0020
DBP-B (1 I/O M) >>3RX0175/0014
DBP-B (2 I/O M) >>3RX0175/0015
DBP-A (1 I/O M) >>3RX0176/0004
F. List of Illustrations and
Tables

F.1 List of Illustrations ....................................................................................................... F-2
F.2 List of Tables............................................................................................................... F-4
Annex F. List of Illustrations and Tables
F.1 List of Illustrations

1.3.1 Alphanumeric Display .................................................................................. 1.3-2
1.3.2 Keypad ......................................................................................................... 1.3-2

2.3.1 Front of the Central Unit............................................................................... 2.3-3
2.3.2 Front of the Bay Units. ................................................................................. 2.3-3
2.3.3 Rear of the Central Unit. .............................................................................. 2.3-4
2.3.4 Rear of the Central Unit with IRIG-B 123 Synchronization. ......................... 2.3-4
2.3.5 Rear of the Central Unit with IEC 61850 Communications Board. .............. 2.3-5
2.3.6 Rear of the Bay Unit. .................................................................................... 2.3-5

3.1.1 Bus Differential Protection Block Diagram. .................................................. 3.1-3
3.1.2 Trip Logic of the Bus X................................................................................. 3.1-4
3.1.3 Bus Differential Trip Logic. ........................................................................... 3.1-5
3.1.4 Trip Logic of the Bus by BF.......................................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.5 Trip Logic of the Bus by Digital Input. .......................................................... 3.1-7
3.1.6 Trip Logic of the DBP Type Bay................................................................... 3.1-8
3.1.7 Issues to be Considered. ............................................................................. 3.1-10

3.2.1 Logic of the DBC-B Main Differential Unit .................................................... 3.2-3
3.2.2 Example of Saturated External Fault Currents. ........................................... 3.2-4
3.2.3 Differential Characteristic Trip Zone. ........................................................... 3.2-6
3.2.4 Damped Restraint Current. .......................................................................... 3.2-6

3.3.1 Breaker Failure Metering Unit Diagram. ...................................................... 3.3-2
3.3.2 Measuring Unit Block Diagram for each Phase. .......................................... 3.3-3
3.3.3 BF and Retrip (enabled) Logic Diagram. ..................................................... 3.3-5
3.3.4 Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit General Diagram. ...................................... 3.3-6
3.3.5 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic Scheme..................................................... 3.3-13
3.3.6 Dynamic Protection Zone Logic Scheme with Time Setting. ....................... 3.3-14
3.3.7 Scheme of Possible Locations of CT (for Dynamic Zone). .......................... 3.3-15
3.3.8 End Fault Trip Unit Logic. ............................................................................ 3.3-15
3.3.9 Bay Enable Logic for Bus Protection. .......................................................... 3.3-18
3.3.10 Disabling Logic by Digital Input. ................................................................... 3.3-19

3.4.1 Undervoltage Unit Diagram.......................................................................... 3.4-3

3.5.1 Logic Diagram of the Lockout (86) Function. ............................................... 3.5-3
3.5.2 Latched Trip Logic of the Bus “X”. ............................................................... 3.5-3
3.5.3 Fault in the Tie Blind Spot. ........................................................................... 3.5-4
3.5.4 Ties with one CT. ......................................................................................... 3.5-7
3.5.5 Ties with two CTs. ........................................................................................ 3.5-8
3.5.6 Example of Longitudinal-Transversal Coupler. ............................................ 3.5-9
3.5.7 Example of Combined Coupler. ................................................................... 3.5-10
3.5.8 Combined Coupler (Tie Logic 1). ................................................................. 3.5-11
F-2
BDBN0901A
3.5.9 Logic for Activating Condition 1 (Part of 1 Logic). ....................................... 3.5-12

3.5.10 Blocking 87 and Single Bus Due to Combined Coupler Disconnecting
Switch Status. .............................................................................................. 3.5-12
3.5.11 Location of CT Relative to 89-TR (Setting).................................................. 3.5-13
3.5.12 Example of Configuration with a Transfer Bus and a Combined
Coupler. ....................................................................................................... 3.5-14
3.5.13 Fault in the Tie Blind Spot............................................................................ 3.5-28

3.6.1 Status of the Connection in a Double Bus Configuration. ........................... 3.6-2
3.6.2 Tie-Transferred Trip. .................................................................................... 3.6-4

3.12.1 Auxiliary Contact Output Logic Cell Block Diagram. ................................... 3.12-5
3.12.2 ZIVerComPlus® Communication Program Screen Corresponding to 1
Auxiliary Output Configuration. .................................................................... 3.12-6
3.12.3 Target Output Logic Cell Block Diagram. .................................................... 3.12-9
3.12.4 ZIVerComPlus® Communication Program Screen corresponding to
LED 3 Setup. ............................................................................................... 3.12-9
3.12.5 Digital Inputs Test ........................................................................................ 3.12-10
3.13 Communications
3.13.1 Configuration of Communications Parameters. ........................................... 3.13-6
3.13.2 Status Drop Down Menu (in a Model with 14 Bays and 4 Busbars). .......... 3.13-7
3.13.3 ZIVercomPlus® Toolbar Button Synoptic. .................................................... 3.13-7
3.13.4 DBN Status Summary Screen (in Model 11 with 14 Bays, only 4 Bays
Connected). ................................................................................................. 3.13-8
3.13.5 Central Unit Status Drop Down Menu (I). .................................................... 3.13-9
3.13.6 Central Unit Status Drop Down Menu (II). ................................................... 3.13-10
3.13.7 Drop Down Menu of the Status of each Current Bay. ................................. 3.13-11
3.13.8 Measurements Drop Down Menu. ............................................................... 3.13-12
3.13.9 Model 10 or Model 11 Operations. .............................................................. 3.13-13
3.13.10 Oscillogra-phy Menu. ................................................................................... 3.13-14
3.13.11 Relay Oscillogram List. ................................................................................ 3.13-14
3.13.12 Collect Oscillo. ............................................................................................. 3.13-15
3.13.13 Collecting Channels. .................................................................................... 3.13-15
3.13.14 Communications Screen (Collecting Channels). ......................................... 3.13-15
3.13.15 information of Completed Oscillogram. ....................................................... 3.13-16
3.13.16 Oscillogram Display Menu. .......................................................................... 3.13-16
3.13.17 Oscillogram Viewer. ..................................................................................... 3.13-17
3.13.18 Selecting the Model to Emulate. .................................................................. 3.13-17
3.14 Alarm Codes

3.14.1 ZIVerComPlus® Alarms. ............................................................................... 3.14-2
D. IEC 61850 Protocol

D.1 Communications Ports Configuration .......................................................... D-7
D.2 Communications Ports Configuration for #DBC-***-*******P* Models ......... D-8
D.3 Directory Structure ....................................................................................... D-9
F-3
BDBN0901A
F.2 List of Tables

1.5-1 Current Metering Test (In = 5A) ................................................................... 1.5-5
1.5-2 Current Metering Test (In = 1A) ................................................................... 1.5-6
1.5-3 Voltage Metering Test .................................................................................. 1.5-6

3.1-1 Digital Inputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking ....................................... 3.1-14
3.1-2 Digital Inputs of the BF Trip and of the Latched BF Reset .......................... 3.1-14
3.1-3 Digital Inputs of the Buses Trip .................................................................... 3.1-15
3.1-4 Digital Inputs Affecting Current Bay Tripping ............................................... 3.1-15
3.1-5 Auxiliary Outputs of the Buses Trip (DBC) .................................................. 3.1-16
3.1-6 Events of the Buses Trip (DBC) ................................................................... 3.1-16
3.1-7 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking ................................ 3.1-17
3.1-8 Events of the Bus Differential Trip Blocking................................................. 3.1-17
3.1-9 Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Supervision ..................................... 3.1-18
3.1-10 Auxiliary Outputs of the BF Trip and BF Trip Blocking ................................ 3.1-19
3.1-11 Events of the Trip Blocking by BF and Latched BF Reset ........................... 3.1-20
3.1-12 Auxiliary Outputs and Events of the Current Bay Trip ................................. 3.1-20
3.1-13 Trip Events of the Current Bay (*) ................................................................ 3.1-20

3.2-1 Digital Inputs of the Supervision Differential Unit (DBC) ............................. 3.2-14
3.2-2 Auxiliary Outputs of the Main Differential Units (DBC) ................................ 3.2-14
3.2-3 Events of the Main Differential Units (DBC)................................................. 3.2-15
3.2-4 Auxiliary Outputs of the Supervision Differential Unit (DBC) ....................... 3.2-16
3.2-5 Events of the Supervision Differential Unit (DBC) ....................................... 3.2-16
3.2-6 Auxiliary Outputs of the Differential Alarm Units (DBC) ............................... 3.2-16
3.2-7 Events of the Differential Alarm Units (DBC) ............................................... 3.2-17
3.2-8 Tests at 5A Rated Current (Main Differential Characteristic) ...................... 3.2-18
3.2-9 Tests at 1A Rated Current (Main Differential Characteristic) ...................... 3.2-18
3.2-10 Slope Tests (Main Differential Characteristic) ............................................. 3.2-19
3.2-11 Tests at 5A Rated Current (Differential Supervision Characteristic) ........... 3.2-20
3.2-12 Tests at 1A Rated Current (Differential Supervision Characteristic) ........... 3.2-20
3.2-13 Slope Tests (Differential Supervision Characteristic) .................................. 3.2-21

3.3-1 Operation Outputs as a Function of Retrip Type Setting ............................. 3.3-10
3.3-2 Dynamic Zone Characteristics as a Function of CT Location...................... 3.3-16
3.3-3 Dynamic Zone Settings as a Function of CT Location ................................ 3.3-17
3.3-4 Digital Inputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit (In the
ZIVercomPlus® communicating with the DBN) ............................................ 3.3-24
3.3-5 Digital Inputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic (DBP-B) (In the
3.3-26
3.3-6 Digital Inputs of Bay Disabling (In the ZIVercomPlus® communicating
with the DBN) ............................................................................................... 3.3-26
3.3-7 Auxiliary Outputs of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit (In the
3.3-8 Events of the Breaker Failure and Retrip Unit (In the ZIVercomPlus®
communicating with the DBN)...................................................................... 3.3-28
3.3-9 Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault
Protection Unit (In the ZIVercomPlus® communicating with the DBN) ........ 3.3-29
F-4
BDBN0901A
3.3-10 Events of the 50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault Protection Unit

(In the ZIVercomPlus® communicating with the DBN) ................................ 3.3-29
3.3-11 Auxiliary Outputs of the 50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit (In
the ZIVercomPlus® communicating with the DBN) ...................................... 3.3-30
3.3-12 Auxiliary Outputs of the Dynamic Zone Logic (In the ZIVercomPlus®
communicating with the DBN) ..................................................................... 3.3-30
3.3-13 Events of the Dynamic Zone Logic (In the ZIVercomPlus®
3.3-14 Auxiliary Outputs of Bay Disabling (In the ZIVercomPlus®
3.3-15 Events of Bay Disabling (In the ZIVercomPlus® communicating with
the DBN) ...................................................................................................... 3.3-31
3.3-16 Test for 5A rated current (50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault
Protection Unit) ............................................................................................ 3.3-34
3.3-17 Test for 1A rated current (50 Supervision of 87 Trip or End Fault
Protection Unit) ............................................................................................ 3.3-34
3.3-18 Test for 5A rated current (50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit) ...... 3.3-35
3.3-19 Test for 1A rated current (50 Supervision of Breaker Failure Trip Unit) ...... 3.3-35

3.4-1 Auxiliary Outputs of the Supervision by Undervoltage Unit (DBP-B) .......... 3.4-4
3.4-2 Auxiliary Outputs of the Undervoltage Trip Supervision (DBC) ................... 3.4-4
3.4-3 Events of the Supervision by Undervoltage Unit (DBP-A)........................... 3.4-4
3.4-4 Undervoltage Unit Pickups .......................................................................... 3.4-5

3.5-1 Digital Inputs of the Lockout (86) in the DBC .............................................. 3.5-21
3.5-2 Digital Inputs used for the DBP-B Bay Bus Tie Blind Spot (DBP-B)* .......... 3.5-21
3.5-3 Digital Inputs of the Bus Couplers (DBP-B)* ............................................... 3.5-21
3.5-4 Auxiliary Outputs of the Lockout (86) .......................................................... 3.5-23
3.5-5 Events of the Lockout (86) en el DBC ......................................................... 3.5-23
3.5-6 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bus Latched Trip in the DBC................................. 3.5-24
3.5-7 Auxiliary Outputs of the 87 Block by Disagreement (DBC) ......................... 3.5-24
3.5-8 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bus Couplers (DBP-B)* ......................................... 3.5-24
3.5-9 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay (for Transfer Logic)* ....................................... 3.5-25
3.5-10 Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC (for Transfer Logic) ....................................... 3.5-25
3.5-11 Events of the Central Unit (for Transfer Logic) ............................................ 3.5-25

3.6-1 Digital Inputs of the Bus Disconnecting Switches (DBP-B)*........................ 3.6-9
3.6-2 Digital Inputs of the DBC Bus Connection Logic ......................................... 3.6-9
3.6-3 Digital Inputs of the Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic (DBP-B)* ............ 3.6-10
3.6-4 Digital Inputs of the 89-TR Logic (DBP-B)* ................................................. 3.6-10
3.6-5 Digital Inputs of the 89-LIN Logic (DBP-B)*................................................. 3.6-10
3.6-6 Digital Inputs of the 89-Long-Transv. Logic (DBP-B)* ................................. 3.6-11
3.6-7 Digital Inputs used for the Bus Tie Blind Spot (DBP-B)* ............................. 3.6-11
3.6-8 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the Bus Connection Logic* ....................... 3.6-12
3.6-9 Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC Bus Connection Logic ................................... 3.6-12
3.6-10 Events of the Bus Connection Logic (Bay)*................................................. 3.6-13
3.6-11 Events of the Bus Connection Logic (DBC)................................................. 3.6-13
3.6-12 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the Bypass Disconnecting Switch
Logic* ........................................................................................................... 3.6-22
3.6-13 Events of the Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic (DBP-B)* ...................... 3.6-23
3.6-14 Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic ............. 3.6-23
3.6-15 Events of the DBC Bypass Disconnecting Switch Logic ............................. 3.6-23
3.6-16 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the 89-TR Logic and 89-LIN Logic* .......... 3.6-24
F-5
BDBN0901A
3.6-17 Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC for the 89-TR Logic and 89-LIN Logic........... 3.6-24
3.6-18 Events of the 89-TR Logic and 89-LIN Logic (Bay)* .................................... 3.6-24
3.6-19 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the 89-Long-Transv. Logic*....................... 3.6-25
3.6-20 Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC for the 89-Long-Transv. Logic ....................... 3.6-25
3.6-21 Auxiliary Outputs of the Bay for the 52 Logic* ............................................. 3.6-26
3.6-22 Auxiliary Outputs of the DBC for the 52 Logic ............................................. 3.6-26
3.6-23 Events of the Bay for the 52 Logic ............................................................... 3.6-26

3.8-1 Bus Connection ............................................................................................ 3.8-4
3.8-2 DBC Auxiliary Outputs ................................................................................. 3.8-8

3.9-1 Digital Inputs of the DBC to Change Settings Group ................................... 3.9-3
3.9-2 Events to Change Settings Groups ............................................................. 3.9-4
3.10 Event Record

3.10-1 Event of the DBC Pickup ............................................................................. 3.10-2
3.10-2 Event of the DBP-B (or “V” Type Bay) Pickup ............................................. 3.10-2
3.10-3 Event of the DBP-A Pickup .......................................................................... 3.10-2

3.11-1 Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording (DBC) .................................. 3.11-28
3.11-2 Digital Inputs of the Oscillographic Recording Trigger ................................ 3.11-28
3.11-3 Events of the Oscillographic Recording (DBC) ............................................ 3.11-28

3.12-1 Logic Inputs of the DBC ............................................................................... 3.12-2
3.12-2 Inputs Activation Events of the Central Unit DBC ........................................ 3.12-3
3.12-3 Inputs Activation Events of the Bay ............................................................. 3.12-4
3.12-4 Logical Outputs of the DBP (Bay Unit) ........................................................ 3.12-7
3.12-5 Logical Outputs of the DBC ......................................................................... 3.12-7
3.12-6 DBP Outputs Configuration.......................................................................... 3.12-11
3.12-7 DBC Outputs Configuration ......................................................................... 3.12-12
3.13 Communications
3.13-1 Communications Events between DBC and DBP ....................................... 3.13-3
3.13-2 Events of the DBC ....................................................................................... 3.13-7
3.13-3 DBC Alarm Outputs ..................................................................................... 3.13-10
3.13-4 DBP Alarm Outputs (Bay Unit)..................................................................... 3.13-12
3.13-5 DBC Synchronization Event......................................................................... 3.13-14
3.13-6 DBC Communications Events...................................................................... 3.13-18
3.13-7 Outputs of the IRIG-B Function.................................................................... 3.13-19
3.13-8 Events of the IRIG-B Function ..................................................................... 3.13-19
F-6
BDBN0901A
G. Warranty
Annex G. Warranty
ZIV GRID AUTOMATION, S.L.

Standard Product Warranty
All new products sold to customers are warranted against defects in design, materials, and workmanship
for a period of ten (10) years from the time of delivery (at the moment the product leaves ZIV GRID
AUTOMATION premises, as indicated in the shipping documents). Customer is responsible of notifying
ZIV GRID AUTOMATION of any faulty conditions as soon as they are detected. If it is determined that the
new product defect is covered by the warranty, ZIV GRID AUTOMATION will repair, or substitute the
product at its own discretion to the customer at no charge.
ZIV GRID AUTOMATION may, at its own discretion, require the customer to ship the unit back to the
factory for diagnosis before making a determination as to whether it is covered by this warranty. Shipping
costs to the ZIV GRID AUTOMATION factory (including but not limited to, freight, insurance, customs fees
and taxes, and any other expenses) will be the responsibility of the customer. All expenses related to the
shipment of the repaired or replacement units back to the customer will be borne by ZIV GRID
AUTOMATION.
Customers are responsible for all expenses related to the shipment of defective units back to ZIV GRID
AUTOMATION when it is determined that such units are not covered under this warranty or that the fault is
not ZIV GRID AUTOMATION´s responsibility. Units repaired by ZIV GRID AUTOMATION are warranted
against defects in materials, and manufacturing for a period of one (1) year from the time of delivery (at the
moment the product leaves ZIV GRID AUTOMATION premises, as indicated by the shipping documents),
or for the remaining of the original warranty, whichever is greater.
ZIV GRID AUTOMATION warranty does not cover: 1) improper installation, connection, operation,
maintenance, and/or storage, 2) minor defects not interfering with the operation of the product, possible
indemnities, misuse or improper usage, 3) abnormal or unusual operating conditions or application outside
the specifications for the product, 4) application in any way different from that for which the products were
designed, 5) repairs or alterations performed by individuals other than ZIV GRID AUTOMATION
employees or an authorized representative.
Limitations:
1) Equipment or products provided but not manufactured by ZIV GRID AUTOMATION. Such products
may be covered by a warranty issued by the corresponding manufacturer.
2) Software: ZIV GRID AUTOMATION warrants that the licensed Software corresponds with the
specifications included in the instruction manuals provided with the units, or with the specifications
agreed with the end-customer. ZIV GRID AUTOMATION sole and entire liability, and customer
exclusive remedy, with respect to any claims relating to the Software shall be to provide a new set
of diskettes free of charge.
3) In the case that a bank guarantee or similar instrument be required to back up the warranty period,
such warranty period, and only for these purposes, will be of a maximum of twelve (12) months
from the time of delivery (at the moment the product leaves ZIV GRID AUTOMATION premises, as
indicated in the shipping documents).
THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES AND ZIV GRID AUTOMATION HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO
EVENT SHALL ZIV GRID AUTOMATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY OTHER LOSS, INJURY, DAMAGE, OR
EXPENSE OF ANY KIND INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING
FROM ANY SOURCE.
ZIV GRID AUTOMATION, S.L.

Parque Tecnológico, 210
48170 Zamudio - Bizkaia - Spain
Tel.- (+34)-(94) 452.20.03
Fax - (+34)-(94) 452.21.40
G-2
BDBN0901A

Instruction Manual-Bus Diff

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual-Bus Diff

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DBN Bus Differential Protection

© ZIV GRID AUTOMATION, S.L. 2011 BDBN0901Av07

ZIV APLICACIONES Y TECNOLOGÍA, S.L.

THE EQUIPMENT YOU HAVE PURCHASED INCLUDES EMBEDDED SOFTWARE

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN US ( AS “LICENSEE) AND ZIV

IF YOU INSTALL OR USE THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND

Terms and Conditions of License

ZIV Aplicaciones y Tecnología, S.L.

Chapter 1. Description and Start-Up

1.1 DBN Functions (Bus Differential) ............................................................. 1.1-1

1.2 DBN Additional Functions ........................................................................ 1.2-1

1.3 Local Interface: Alphanumeric Keypad and Display.............................. 1.3-1

1.4 Model Selection ......................................................................................... 1.4-1

1.5 Installation and Commissioning............................................................... 1.6-1

Chapter 2. Technical Specifications and Physical Description

2.1 Technical Data ............................................................................................ 2.1-1

2.2 Standards and Type Tests ........................................................................ 2.2-1

2.3 Physical Architecture ................................................................................ 2.3-1

Chapter 3. Functions and Description of Operation

3.1 Trip and Operation Principles .................................................................. 3.1-1

3.2 Protection Functions in the DBN Central Unit ........................................ 3.2-1

3.3 Current Bay Functions .............................................................................. 3.3-1

3.3.2.b Disabling Breaker Failure Function .............................................................. 3.3-6

3.4 Voltage Bay Functions .............................................................................. 3.4-1

3.5 DBN Central Unit Logic ............................................................................. 3.5-1

3.5.10.a Lockout and Bus Latched Trip Test ............................................................. 3.5-26

3.6 DBN Current Bay Logic ............................................................................. 3.6-1

3.7 Configuration Settings .............................................................................. 3.7-1

3.8 General Settings ........................................................................................ 3.8-1

3.8.3.d Bus Number Connection .............................................................................. 3.8-4

3.9 Change Settings Group ............................................................................. 3.9-1

3.10 Event Record .............................................................................................. 3.10-1

3.11 Oscillographic Recording ......................................................................... 3.11-1

3.12 Inputs, Outputs & LED Targets................................................................. 3.12-1

3.13 Communications ........................................................................................ 3.13-1

3.13.1.b Bay Unit Communications Ports .................................................................. 3.13-2

3.14 Alarm Codes ............................................................................................... 3.14-1

A. PROCOME 3.0 Protocol............................................................................. A-1

B. DNP V3.00 Device Profile Document ....................................................... B-1

C. MODBUS RTU Documentation Address Map ......................................... C-1

C.1.5.a Modbus Address Range .............................................................................. C-10

D. IEC 61850 Protocol .................................................................................... C-1

E. Schemes and Drawings............................................................................. E-1

F. List of Illustrations and Tables ................................................................. E-1

1.1 DBN Functions (Bus Differential)

When bays are DBP type

When bays are “V” type (DRV or DCV)

1.1.1 DBC Central Unit

1.1.1.b Supervision Differential Unit

1.1.1.c Differential Alarm Unit

1.1.1.d Lockout Function

1.1.2 Current Bay Unit Functions (DBP-B)

1.1.2.b 50 Supervision Unit for Breaker Failure Trip

1.1.2.c Breaker Failure Unit (with Retrip Function, Previously Failed BF

1.1.4 Voltage Bay Unit Functions (DBP-A)

1.2.1 Local Control

1.2.2 LED Targets

1.2.3 Digital Inputs

1.2.4 Analog Inputs

1.2.5 Trip Outputs

1.2.6 Auxiliary Outputs

1.2.7 Event Recording

1.2.8 Oscillographic Register